JP6662426B2 - Gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

  Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, are provided with a picture display device for variably displaying pictures on a display screen. In this type of gaming machine, for example, when a game ball passes through an operating port provided in a game area, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to generate a specific gaming state advantageous to a player such as a winning state. At the same time, the variable display of the picture is started. When a lottery is won, a specific pattern combination or the like is finally stopped and displayed on the display screen, and the gaming state shifts to the specific gaming state (for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2005-074175 A

  In recent years, various devices have been devised to increase the degree of interest in games. However, there is still room for improvement in the structure of the gaming machine in order to increase the level of attention to the game.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above-described circumstances and the like, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of appropriately improving the degree of attention to a game.

  Hereinafter, means for solving the above problems will be described.

In order to solve the above problems, the invention described in claim 1 is:
A picture display means for variably displaying a plurality of pictures on the display screen,
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the satisfaction of a predetermined acquisition condition,
Acquired information storage means for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means, with a predetermined number predetermined as a plurality as an upper limit,
Grant determining means for sequentially determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storing means corresponds to a grant corresponding result corresponding to granting a privilege to a player;
A bonus granting unit that grants a bonus to the player based on the result of the granting determination by the granting determining unit being the granting result,
Said particular based grant decision is made by the grant determining unit, the variable display of the picture in picture display unit is started, the display to change the display of the picture of the stop result corresponding to the determination result of the grant decision Ending the game as one of the game times, and controlling the pattern display means such that the pattern of each game time is changed and displayed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. A gaming machine provided with time control means,
A first area and a second area are set in a display area of the pattern on the display screen of the pattern display means ,
A first state and a second state and a switchable switching means to invisibility or not visible than the first state at least a portion of the picture to be stopped in the second region,
The information corresponding to the determination result in the case where the predetermined special information stored in the acquisition information storage unit is the target of the assignment determination, and the information before the predetermined special information becomes the target of the assignment determination. Destination specifying means for specifying at the timing;
When the specified result by the preceding specifying means is a predetermined specifying result, the specifying of the preceding specifying means is performed in a game time performed before the gaming time related to the special information targeted by the preceding specifying means. Special notification means for performing special notification corresponding to the result,
The special notifying means, when the specified result by the preceding specifying means is a predetermined specified result, a game time performed prior to the gaming time related to the special information specified by the preceding specifying means. A stop mode determining means for determining a stop mode of the picture,
The stop mode determined by the stop mode determining means includes:
A first special stop mode that is a predetermined special stop mode depending on a combination of pictures stopped in the first area;
A second special stop mode which is a predetermined special stop mode by a combination of patterns including a pattern stopped in the second area;
The special notification means,
A first means for performing the special notification by stopping the picture in the first special stop mode in a game time performed before the game time related to the special information that has been specified by the destination specifying means;
In the game time performed before the game time relating to the special information targeted by the destination specifying means, the pattern is stopped in the second special stop mode, and the switching from the second state of the switching means is performed. And second means for performing the special notification by switching to the first state.
With
The second means includes means for switching the switching means from the second state to the first state after all of the plurality of patterns variably displayed on the display screen are stopped. I do.

  Attention to the game can be appropriately improved.

It is a front view showing the pachinko machine in a 1st embodiment. It is a perspective view which expands and shows the main structure of a pachinko machine. It is a perspective view which expands and shows the main structure of a pachinko machine. It is a front view of a game board unit. It is an exploded perspective view showing the game board unit disassembled for each main configuration. It is a perspective view showing the composition of a game board. It is an exploded perspective view of a game board. It is the schematic which shows the positional relationship of a game board and a production unit. It is the schematic which shows the positional relationship of a game board and a production unit. FIG. 2 is a block diagram illustrating an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine. It is a schematic diagram for explaining display contents on the display screen of the symbol display device. It is a schematic diagram for explaining display contents on the display screen of the symbol display device. It is the schematic for demonstrating the content of various counters used for a success / failure lottery. It is the schematic which shows a distribution table. 6 is a flowchart illustrating a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU of the main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the winning processing for working ports performed by the MPU of the main control device. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a normal process executed by the MPU of the main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the game time control processing performed by MPU of a main control device. 6 is a flowchart illustrating a fluctuation start process executed by the MPU of the main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the game state transition process performed by MPU of a main control apparatus. It is a block diagram which shows the electrical structure concerning a display effect. It is the schematic for demonstrating the aspect of the fluctuation | variation display of a symbol. It is a schematic diagram for explaining a re-fluctuation effect. It is a schematic diagram for explaining a re-fluctuation effect. It is a schematic diagram for explaining a reservation notice effect. It is a schematic diagram for explaining a reservation notice effect. It is the schematic for demonstrating a fanning effect. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation | variation display control processing performed by MPU of an effect control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the process for fluctuation | variation start performed by MPU of an effect control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the effect setting process for big hits performed by the MPU of the effect control device. (A) is a schematic diagram for explaining a final stop line table, and (b) is a schematic diagram for explaining a re-variation table. It is a flowchart which shows the effect setting process for reach generation performed by the MPU of the effect control device. It is the schematic which shows the stop result table for non-effective uniform effects. It is a flowchart which shows the effect setting process for normal deviation performed by the MPU of the effect control device. It is a flowchart which shows the process for a change performed by the MPU of an effect control device. It is a flowchart which shows the process for fluctuation | variation termination performed by MPU of an effect control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the confirmation process for reservation notice performed by MPU of a main control apparatus. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a setting process of a hold command executed by the MPU of the main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the suspension notice control process performed by the MPU of the effect control device. It is a flowchart which shows the suspension notice setting process performed by the MPU of the effect control device. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot notice setting process performed by the MPU of the effect control device. It is a flowchart which shows the announcement notice setting process performed by the MPU of the effect control device. It is a flowchart which shows the effect setting process for hold notices performed by the MPU of the effect control device. It is a schematic diagram for explaining the stop result table for (a) normal suspension notice, and (b) is a schematic diagram for explaining the stop result table for special suspension notice. It is a flowchart which shows the replacement process performed by the MPU of the effect control device. It is a flowchart which shows the stop result correction process performed by the MPU of the effect control device. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st correction process performed by MPU of an effect control device. It is a schematic diagram showing a correction table. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd correction process performed by MPU of an effect control device. It is a flowchart which shows the 3rd correction process performed by MPU of an effect control device. It is a flowchart which shows the notice setting process for a departure performed by MPU of the effect control device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the effect setting process for hold notices performed by the MPU of the effect control device. It is the schematic for demonstrating the stage effect in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot notice setting process performed by the MPU of the effect control device. It is a flowchart which shows the announcement notice setting process performed by the MPU of the effect control device. It is a flowchart which shows the effect setting process for hold notices performed by the MPU of the effect control device. It is a flowchart which shows the effect setting process for reach performed by the MPU of the effect control device. It is a flowchart which shows the replacement process performed by the MPU of the effect control device. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd correction process performed by MPU of an effect control device. It is a flowchart which shows the 3rd correction process performed by MPU of an effect control device. It is a schematic diagram for explaining a duplication notice production. It is a schematic diagram for explaining a duplication notice production. It is a schematic diagram for explaining a duplication notice production. It is a schematic diagram for explaining a duplication notice production. It is a flowchart which shows the duplication notice setting process performed by the MPU of the effect control device. It is a flowchart which shows the correction process for duplication notice performed by MPU of an effect control device. It is a schematic diagram showing a correction table. It is the schematic for demonstrating the relationship between the number of suspension information and a stage effect. It is a schematic diagram for explaining each reservation notice effect in a 4th embodiment. It is a schematic diagram for explaining reach display. It is a schematic diagram for explaining a middle symbol row stop result information table. It is a schematic diagram for explaining the development point to super reach. It is a flowchart which shows the middle symbol row | line control process at the time of the reach performed by MPU of a display control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the effect setting process for hold notices performed by the MPU of the effect control device. It is a schematic diagram showing a notice type lottery table. It is a flowchart which shows the effect setting process for reach performed by the MPU of the effect control device. It is a flowchart which shows the stop result determination process for the 1st reservation notice performed by the MPU of the effect control device. It is a flowchart which shows the stop result determination process for 2nd reservation advance notices performed by MPU of an effect control device. It is a flowchart which shows the stop result determination process for 3rd reservation advance notices performed by MPU of an effect control device. It is the schematic which shows the relationship between the stop point of a reach symbol, the development point to a super reach, and a suspension notice. It is the schematic which shows the relationship between the stop point of a reach symbol, the development point to a super reach, and a suspension notice. It is the schematic which shows the various effect pattern tables in 5th Embodiment. It is the schematic which shows the relationship between the stop point of a reach symbol, the development point of a super reach, and a suspension notice. It is a front view showing a game board in a 6th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the process for a change performed by the MPU of an effect control device. It is a flowchart which shows the process for ball passing performed by MPU of an effect control device. It is a front view showing the composition of the movable accessory device in a 7th embodiment. It is a front view which shows the structure of a movable accessory device. It is a front view showing the composition of the 1st movable role. It is a schematic diagram for explaining the structure of a gear. It is the schematic which shows the positional relationship of an upper and lower movable role. It is the schematic which shows the relationship between the upper and lower movable objects and the design of the display screen. It is the schematic which shows the stop aspect of the symbol in 8th Embodiment. It is the schematic which shows the stop aspect of the symbol in 9th Embodiment. (A) It is the schematic which shows the game board in 10th Embodiment, (b) It is the elements on larger scale of a game board. (A) It is a rear view of a game board, (b) It is the schematic which shows the relationship between a game board and a movable accessory device. (A) It is the schematic which shows the relationship between the game board in 11th Embodiment, and a movable accessory apparatus, (b) It is the XX sectional view taken on the line of FIG. 97 (a). It is the schematic which shows the operation aspect of a movable accessory apparatus.

<First embodiment>
Hereinafter, a first embodiment of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, referred to as a “pachinko machine”) that is a kind of gaming machine will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10, and FIGS. 2 and 3 are exploded perspective views showing main components of the pachinko machine 10. FIG. In FIG. 2, the configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the game area is omitted for convenience.

  The pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 forming an outer shell of the pachinko machine 10, and a game machine main body 12 attached to the outer frame 11 so as to be rotatable forward. By attaching and fixing the outer frame 11 to the island facility, the pachinko machine 10 is installed in the game hall. In the pachinko machine 10, the outer frame 11 is not an indispensable configuration, but may be a configuration in which the outer frame 11 is provided on an island facility in a game arcade.

  The game machine main body 12 includes an inner frame 13 as a base body, a front door frame 14 arranged in front of the inner frame 13, and a back pack unit 15 arranged behind the inner frame 13. The inner frame 13 of the gaming machine main body 12 is rotatably supported with respect to the outer frame 11.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the inner frame 13 is mainly composed of a resin base 21 whose outer shape is substantially the same as the outer frame 11. A front door frame 14 is rotatably attached to the inner frame 13, and the front door frame 14 is rotatable forward with the left side as a rotation base end side and the right side as a rotation front end side in a game machine front view. Has become. As shown in FIG. 3, a back pack unit 15 is rotatably attached to the inner frame 13, and the back pack unit 15 is turned on the left side and on the right side as viewed from the front of the gaming machine. It is rotatable backward as the moving tip side.

  The gaming machine main body 12 is provided with a locking device 16 at an end on the rotation tip side, and has a function of locking the gaming machine main body 12 so that it cannot be opened with respect to the outer frame 11. And has a function to lock the front door frame 14 so that it cannot be opened with respect to the inner frame 13. Each of these locked states is released by performing an unlocking operation using an unlocking key on the cylinder lock 17 exposed on the front of the pachinko machine 10.

  Next, the configuration of the front side of the gaming machine main body 12 will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the front door frame 14 is provided so as to cover the entire front side of the inner frame 13. A window opening 56 is formed in the front door frame 14 so that substantially the entire game area described later can be visually recognized from the front. The window opening 56 has a substantially elliptical shape, and a transparent window panel 57 is fitted therein. Around the window opening 56, light emitting means such as various lamps are provided. A light emitting unit 58 is provided above the window opening 56 as a part of various lamp units. Further, on both left and right sides of the light emitting unit 58, there are provided speaker units 59 for outputting a sound effect or the like according to a game state.

  Below the window opening 56 in the front door frame 14, an upper bulging portion 61 and a lower bulging portion 62 bulging toward the near side are vertically arranged side by side. An upper plate 61a that opens upward is provided inside the upper bulging portion 61, and a lower plate 62a that also opens upward is provided inside the lower bulging portion 62. The upper plate 61a has a function of temporarily storing game balls paid out from a payout device described later, and guiding the game balls to the game ball launching mechanism side while aligning them in a line. The lower plate 62a has a function of storing surplus game balls in the upper plate 61a.

  A firing handle 55 is provided on the right side of the lower bulging portion 62 so as to protrude toward the near side. By operating the firing handle 55, a game ball is fired from the game ball firing mechanism 51 (see FIG. 2) mounted on the lower portion of the inner frame 13. The game ball launching mechanism 51 is provided with a launching solenoid 54 and a ball feeder 53 as a drive unit, and based on the operation of the launching handle 55, the launching solenoid 54 and the ball feeder 53 are driven and become 0. A game ball is fired every .6 seconds.

<Game board unit 90>
A game board unit 90 is detachably attached to the inner frame 13. As shown in FIG. 2, the game board unit 90 includes a substantially flat game board 100 facing the window panel 57 through a central opening formed in the inner frame 13 (resin base 21), and a rear face of the game board 100. And a back block 160 (see FIG. 3) attached. Here, the game board unit 90 will be described with reference to FIGS. 4 is a front view of the game board unit 90, and FIG. 5 is an exploded perspective view of the game board unit 90.

  As shown in FIG. 5, the back block 160 includes a symbol display device 161 and a movable accessory device 162 that constitute an effect unit, and a base body 163 (see FIG. 3) on which the effect unit is mounted. By fixing the base body 163 to the game board 100, the game board 100 and the back block 160 are integrated. The game board 100 constituting the game board unit 90 is formed using a colorless and transparent synthetic resin material (specifically, a polycarbonate resin), and a part of the rear block 160 (a rendering unit such as the symbol display device 161) through the game board 100. ) Are visible (see broken lines in FIG. 4). In FIG. 5, illustrations of the rear block 160 other than the effect units are omitted.

<Game board 100>
Here, the game board 100 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 6 is a rear perspective view of the gaming board 100, and FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 4, an inner rail member 101 and an outer rail member 102 for guiding a game ball fired from the game ball firing mechanism 51 to an upper portion of the game board 100 are attached to the front surface of the game board 100. The rail members 101 and 102 have an arc shape, and a substantially circular area defined by the rail members 101 and 102 is the above-described game area 103. Almost the entire game area 103 is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the window opening 56 (through the window panel 57). The symbol display device 161 is arranged so that the display screen G is located substantially at the center of the game area 103, and the visibility of the display screen G is ensured through the game board 100.

  A plurality of large and small through holes penetrating in the front-rear direction are formed in a portion of the gaming board 100 where the game area 103 is formed, and each of the through holes has a general winning opening 113, a variable winning device 114, an operating opening 115. , A through gate 116 and a center frame 130 are provided.

  A supplementary explanation of the arrangement of the members will be described. The center frame 130 is provided substantially at the center of the game area 103 so as to surround the display screen G of the symbol display device 161 from above and below. An operation port 115 is disposed below the center frame 130, and a variable winning device 114 is disposed further below the operation port 115. Further, through gates 116 are arranged on both left and right sides of the center frame 130, and general winning openings 113 are arranged on both lower sides of the game area 103 (specifically, three winning openings 113 are arranged on the left side and one is arranged on the right side). ing). When a game ball enters the general winning opening 113, the variable winning device 114, and the operating opening 115, it is detected by a detection sensor (not shown). Based on the detection result, a predetermined number of balls are placed on the upper plate 61a (or lower plate 62a in some cases). Prize balls are paid out.

  In addition, a special figure display section 117 and a general figure display section 118 are provided on the upper right side of the game area 103, and an out port 119 is provided at a lower end of the game area 103. The game balls that have not entered the various winning ports and the like are guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through the out port 119. In the game area 103, a large number of nails 120, windmills 121, and the like are provided in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the game ball. Since the polycarbonate resin forming the game board 100 has relatively high elasticity, the game can be performed when a game ball collides with a nail 120 or the like driven into the surface or when the angle of the nail 120 is adjusted. The configuration is such that cracks and the like hardly occur in the board 100. In addition, the length of a screw for fixing the variable winning device 114 and the operating port 115 to the game board 100, and the length of a nail 120 driven into the game board 100 are larger than the thickness of the game board 100. Is also small, so that the screws and nails 120 are prevented from protruding to the back side of the game board 100.

  Here, the entering ball means that the game ball passes through a predetermined opening, and is not only in a mode of being discharged from the game area 103 after passing through the opening, but also in the game area 103 after passing through the opening. The aspect which is not exhausted from is also included. However, in the following description, in order to clearly distinguish the game ball from entering the out port 119, the ball is entered into the general winning port 113, the variable winning device 114, the operating port 115, or the through gate 116. , A prize.

  The gaming board 100 is provided with a special figure display section 117 in which LEDs of three colors of red, green and blue are incorporated. The special figure display section 117 is electrically connected to the main controller 81, and the emission colors are switched in a predetermined order, triggered by winning of the operation port 115. Specifically, triggered by a winning in the operating port 115, the red light is turned on, and when a predetermined time has elapsed in that state, the emission color is switched to green light. Then, when the predetermined time has elapsed while the green light is turned on, the emission color is switched to the blue light. After that, the emission color switching is repeatedly performed in the order of red, green, and blue until the emission color switching stop time comes. As a result, red, green, and blue are repeatedly displayed in this order on the special figure display section 117. When a jackpot is won, red or green is finally stopped and displayed, and when a jackpot is not won, blue is finally stopped and displayed.

  In the present embodiment, a plurality of types of jackpots having different degrees of advantage are set, and when a relatively advantageous jackpot is won, the jackpot is finally displayed in red and is displayed in a relatively disadvantageous jackpot. If the game has been won, the game is finally stopped and displayed in green.

  The variable prize device 114 is normally in a closed state in which game balls cannot be won, and is switched to an open state in which game balls can be won when a transition to the open / close execution mode is won in an internal lottery. . Incidentally, the open / close execution mode is a mode to which a shift is made when a jackpot is won. In the closed state, a prize is not impossible, but a prize may be less likely to occur than in the open state. As an opening mode of the variable winning device 114, the variable winning device 114 repeatedly repeats a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) or a predetermined number (for example, 10) of winnings as one round and a plurality of rounds (for example, 15 rounds) as an upper limit. Those that are open are common. The display of the result of the internal lottery on the special figure display unit 117 is continued until the internal lottery is further performed. That is, during the opening / closing execution mode, the display of the result that triggered the opening / closing execution mode is continued.

  It should be noted that the closed state of the variable winning device 114 does not necessarily have to be impossible to win, and may be in a state where winning is more difficult than in the open state. In consideration of such circumstances, the open state can be referred to as a "first state", and the closed state can be referred to as a "second state" in which it is more difficult to enter a ball than the first state.

  Also, the display mode in the special figure display unit 117 is not limited to the above mode. For example, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are variably displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of symbols are variably displayed, and a plurality of types of characters are variably displayed. A configuration to be displayed or a configuration to switch and display a plurality of colors may be adopted.

  The game board 100 is provided with a general-purpose display section 118 in which red and green two-color light emitting LED lamps are incorporated. This general-purpose display section 118 is electrically connected to the main control device 81, and the emission colors are switched in a predetermined order by a winning (passing) of a game ball to the through gate 116 as a trigger. Specifically, when the game ball wins the through gate 116, lighting of red light and lighting of green light are performed alternately. As a result, red and green are alternately displayed on the general-purpose display unit 118. Then, when the red color is stopped and displayed, the motorized accessory attached to the operating port 115 is opened for a predetermined time.

  The center frame 130 includes a roof frame 131 forming an upper part of the center frame 130 and a stage frame 140 forming a lower part of the center frame 130. The roof frame 131 and the stage frame 140 are formed of a transparent material such as an acrylic resin. The roof frame 131 is disposed above the display screen G, the stage frame 140 is disposed below the display screen G, and the display screen G is vertically sandwiched between the frames 131 and 140 when the gaming machine is viewed from the front.

  The roof frame 131 has a groove shape that is entirely open rearward, and is fixed to the game board 100 to close the open rearward portion, thereby forming a near-side ball passage 134. The front-side spherical passage 134 is formed on the left and right with an opening 135 formed in an upper portion of the roof frame 131 as an entrance. The roof frame 131 is opened downward, and the game ball that has passed through the front ball passage 134 falls downward. The upper surface of the roof frame 131 is formed so as to be inclined downward to the left and right sides, and a game ball flowing down the game area 103 enters the front-side ball passage 134 from the opening 135 of the roof frame 131 or the roof frame 131. Of the display screen G depending on the inclination of the display screen G, or flow down.

  Below the roof frame 131 in the game board 100, ball receiving portions 132 projecting forward are formed on the left and right. The ball receiving portion 132 plays a role of receiving, from below, game balls that are distributed left and right by the upper surface of the roof frame 131 and flow down. A through hole is formed in the game board 100 in the front-rear direction so as to communicate with the ball receiving section 132, and the game ball received by the ball receiving section 132 is led out to the rear side of the game board 100 by the through hole.

  As shown in FIG. 7, the stage frame 140 includes a front stage member 141 and a rear stage member 142, and both are assembled via a through hole formed in the game board 100. The front stage member 141 is open frontward and rearward, while the rear stage member 142 has a groove shape that is open forward. Open portions on both left and right sides of the rear stage member 142 are closed by the back surface of the game board 100, and a rear ball passage 143 is formed. The left and right upstream portions of the rear ball passage 143 communicate with the through holes from the ball receiving portion 132, respectively, and the game balls received by the ball receiving portion 132 are led out to the rear ball passage 143. You. The front stage member 141 and the rear stage member 142 form a stage 144 in which the game ball that has passed through the rear ball passage 143 rolls in the left-right direction.

  Here, the ball receiving portion 132 is disposed outside the roof frame 131 as viewed from the center of the game board 100 (see FIG. 4). In other words, the game ball drawn out from the front ball passage 134 of the roof frame 131 does not reach the ball receiving portion 132 even if it falls substantially vertically. On the other hand, a large number of nails 120 are planted below the stage 144, and the game balls drawn out from the near-side ball passage 134 bounce off the nails 120 planted below the stage 144, It is also possible to jump on the stage 144.

  A rear guide 145 is formed at the center of the stage 144, and a front guide 146 is formed so as to sandwich the rear guide 145. The game balls that have been sufficiently decelerated and reached the rear guide part 145 are guided by the guide part 147 formed on the rear stage member 142, and are discharged from the guide part 147 into the game area 103. In this case, the exit of the guiding portion 147 is located vertically above the working port 115, and no obstacle such as the nail 120 is disposed between the two. Therefore, the game ball that has passed through the guiding portion 147 can easily enter the operating port 115. On the other hand, game balls that have been sufficiently decelerated and reached the front guide 146 are discharged into the game area 103 as they are.

  The movement of the game balls in the center frame 130 will be briefly described. Part of the game balls distributed to the left and right by the roof frame 131 is received by the left or right ball receiving portion 132 and reaches the rear ball passage 143. . The game ball that has reached the far side ball path 143 passes through the far side ball path 143 and reaches the stage 144. Also, the game ball that has entered the front-side ball passage 134 from the opening 135 of the roof frame 131 passes through the front-side ball passage 134, falls on the front surface of the display screen G, and collides with the nail 120 to cause the stage 144 to enter. To reach. The game ball that has reached the stage 144 rolls on the stage 144 left and right. Then, as a result of the rolling, the game ball that has reached the rear guide portion 145 is guided toward the operating port 115 by passing through the guide portion 147. On the other hand, the game ball that has reached the front guide portion 146 is discharged into the game area 103 without being guided toward the operation port 115.

  In the above configuration, the game ball that has been launched into the game area 103 and has entered the general prize port 113, the variable prize device 114, and the operation port 115 passes through the through hole formed in the game board 100, and is located on the back side of the game board 100. It is led to. The variable winning device 114, the operating port 115, and the stage frame 140 of the center frame 130 project rearward from the back of the game board 100 (see FIG. 6), but as shown in the schematic diagram of FIG. A predetermined space is ensured between 100 and the effect unit (symbol display device 161 and movable accessory device 162), so that interference between the variable winning device 114 and the like projecting rearward and the effect unit is avoided. .

  Hereinafter, the effect units (symbol display device 161 and movable accessory device 162) mounted on the back block 160 will be described with reference to FIGS.

<Back block 160>
As shown in FIG. 8, the symbol display device 161 and the movable accessory device 162 are arranged side by side so that the movable accessory device 162 is on the front side and the symbol display device 161 is on the rear side. That is, the game board 100, the movable accessory device 162, and the symbol display device 161 are arranged in this order from the front of the pachinko machine 10. The symbol display device 161 is configured as a liquid crystal display device having a liquid crystal display, and the display content of the display screen G is controlled by a display control device described later. In the symbol display device 161, the variable display of the symbol is started based on the winning in the operation port 115. That is, when the variable display is performed on the special figure display unit 117, the variable display is performed on the symbol display device 161 accordingly.

  The symbol display device 161 is not limited to a liquid crystal display device, but may be another display device having a display screen such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or a CRT. It may be a vessel.

  As shown in FIG. 5, the symbol display device 161 is a so-called wide liquid crystal, and its display screen G has a horizontally long shape. The movable accessory device 162 has four movable accessories 170 to 173 arranged at four corners of the display screen G. That is, the movable accessory device 162 includes a first movable accessory 170 arranged at the upper right portion of the display screen G, a second movable accessory 171 arranged at the lower right portion of the display screen G, and an upper left corner of the display screen G. And a fourth movable role 173 disposed at the lower left of the display screen G.

  As shown in FIG. 9, each movable role 170 to 173 has a shielding position (shielding state, first position) overlapping the display screen G in the front-rear direction, and a non-shielding position (non-shielding) not overlapping the display screen G in the front-rear direction. State, the second position). Since the movable auditors 170 to 173 are formed of a colored opaque synthetic resin material, the movable auditors 170 to 173 are arranged at the shielding positions overlapping with the display screen G, so that the display contents of the display screen G behind them are reduced. It becomes invisible or difficult.

  The movable accessory device 162 is provided with driving units 170a to 173a in one-to-one correspondence with the movable accessory 170 to 173. The driving units 170a to 173a are electrically connected to an effect control device 82 described later, and operate the movable auditors 170 to 173 by being driven based on a drive signal from the effect control device 82. The effect control device 82 performs an effect by controlling the driving of each of the driving units 170a to 173a in accordance with the state of the game state, and changing the visible range of the display content of the display screen G behind.

  Note that the movable accessory device 162 only needs to be able to change the visible range on the display screen G. That is, it is only necessary that the display screen G and the movable auditors 170 to 173 can be moved to the first position where the overlapping area in the front-rear direction is large and the second position where the overlapping area is smaller.

  As described above, the movable accessory device 162 is disposed between the game board 100 and the symbol display device 161, and the area sandwiched between the game board 100 and the symbol display device 161 is the same as the operation area of the movable accessory items 170 to 173. Has become. As described above, the game board 100 is formed of a colorless and transparent member, and the visibility of the movable auditors 170 to 173 and the symbol display device 161 as the members behind the game board 100 is secured. Therefore, a through hole for ensuring visibility of the movable auditors 170 to 173 is not formed in a region overlapping with the movable auditors 170 to 173 in the game board 100 in the front-rear direction. Only the through hole for leading out the sphere is formed). In this case, no through hole for ensuring visibility is formed, and the game board 100 is always interposed between the game area 103 and the movable auditors 170 to 173. Thus, while suppressing the lowering of the visibility of the movable auditors 170 to 173, the game ball collides with the movable auditors 170 to 173, the trajectory of the game ball flowing down changes, or the movable auditors 170 to 173 change. The occurrence of inconvenience such as the operation of 173 being obstructed by the game ball is avoided.

  In particular, in a gaming machine such as the pachinko machine 10 in which a player can obtain a privilege by entering a game ball flowing down the game area into a predetermined opening, irregularities may occur depending on the state of the game. If the trajectory of the flowing ball changes due to the collision of a gaming ball with a character or the like performing a complicated operation, the player may have a distrust of the game. Therefore, in general, in the case of a configuration having an accessory or the like that performs an irregular operation, a configuration that operates outside the game area on the front face of the game board, and a through hole provided in front of the liquid crystal screen in the game board and In general, a configuration is adopted in which a center frame is incorporated in the through-hole to restrict the invasion of game balls into a region inside the center frame, and the accessory and the like are operated in the inside region. In this case, in the former case, since the size of the gaming machine is limited, the game area becomes narrower when trying to secure the operation area of the accessory, and conversely, when the game area is widened, it becomes smaller. There may be a problem that an operation area of an object or the like becomes narrow. In the latter case, as the size of the liquid crystal screen increases in recent years, the center frame also tends to increase in size, and as a result, a problem may occur in which a game area in which game balls can flow down becomes narrow. On the other hand, by adopting a configuration like the present pachinko machine 10, it is possible to avoid collision between the game ball and the movable auditors 170 to 173 regardless of how the movable auditors 170 to 173 operate. In addition, since the game ball can flow down in the region of the game area 103 that overlaps with the operation area of the movable auditoriums 170 to 173 in the front-rear direction, the game area is not pressed. As a result, according to the pachinko machine 10, the performance function by the action of the accessory is realized while the moving range of the game ball is sufficiently secured.

  Next, the configuration of the back side of the gaming machine main body 12 will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 3, on the back of the inner frame 13 (specifically, the base body 163 of the game board unit 90), there are provided a main control device 81 for controlling the main control of the game, and a voice, a lamp display and a symbol display device 161. An effect control device 82 for controlling the display control device is mounted.

  The substrate box 71a of the main control device 81 is provided with various trace means for leaving a trace of its opening. As the trace means, a plurality of case bodies constituting the substrate box 71a are inseparably connected and a connection part (caulking part) which requires destruction of a predetermined portion at the time of separation, or an adhesive layer is applied to an object to be peeled when peeled off. A configuration is adopted in which a sealing seal that leaves a trace of being peeled off by being left is straddled across the boundary between a plurality of case bodies.

  The back pack unit 15 is arranged so as to cover the main control device 81 and the effect control device 82 from the rear side of the inner frame 13. The back pack unit 15 includes a back pack 73 formed of a transparent synthetic resin, and a payout mechanism 74 and a control device assembling unit 75 are attached to the back pack 73.

  The payout mechanism 74 includes a tank 76 to which game balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall are sequentially replenished, and a payout device 96 for paying out the game balls stored in the tank 76. The game balls paid out from the payout device 96 are discharged to the upper plate 61a or the lower plate 62a through a payout passage provided on the downstream side of the payout device 96. The dispensing mechanism 74 is supplied with a main power of, for example, 24 volts AC, and is mounted with a back pack substrate having a power switch for performing ON and OFF operations of the power.

  The control device assembling unit 75 includes a payout control device 97 having a function of controlling the payout device 96, a predetermined power required by various control devices and the like, generated and output, and a game associated with the operation of the firing handle 55 by the player. And a power supply / launch control device 98 for controlling the launch of the sphere. The payout control device 97 and the power supply / firing control device 98 are arranged one on top of the other so that the payout control device 97 is located behind the pachinko machine 10.

<Electrical configuration of pachinko machine 10>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to the block diagram of FIG.

  An MPU 202 is mounted on a main control board 201 provided in the main control device 81. The MPU 202 is a ROM 203 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 202 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data and the like when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 203. This is an element in which the RAM 204, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, various counter circuits as a random number generator, and the like are built. Note that a configuration may be adopted in which some of the functions of the MPU 202, such as the function of the ROM 203 and the function of the RAM 204, are provided as separate elements.

  The MPU 202 is provided with an input port and an output port. On the input side of the MPU 202, a power failure monitoring board 205 provided in the main control device 81, a payout control device 97, various detection sensors 211a to 211d, and the like are connected. In this case, the power supply / emission control device 98 is connected to the power failure monitoring board 205, and power is supplied to the MPU 202 via the power failure monitoring board 205. In addition, as a part of the various detection sensors 211a to 211d, a plurality of prize-winning ball units (payout-corresponding ball units) such as a general prize port 113, a variable prize apparatus 114, an operation port 115, and a through gate 116 are provided. The detection sensor is connected, and the MPU 202 of the main control device 81 performs a winning determination (ball entry determination) for each ball entry unit. In addition, the MPU 202 executes a jackpot occurrence lottery based on a winning in the operating port 115 and executes a support occurrence lottery based on a winning in the through gate 116.

  To the output side of the MPU 202, a power failure monitoring board 205, a payout control device 97, and an effect control device 82 are connected. For example, a prize ball command is output to the payout control device 97 based on the result of the prize determination to the prize-corresponding ball entry portion. In this case, when the award ball command is output, the command information storage area 225 of the ROM 203 is referred to. When a winning in the general winning opening 113 is specified, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of ten game balls is output. When a winning in the variable winning device 114 is specified, fifteen balls are specified. A prize ball command corresponding to the payout of the game ball is output, and when a winning in the operating port 115 is specified, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of three game balls is output.

  Various commands such as a variation command, a type command, a variation end command, an opening command, and an ending command are output to the effect control device 82. In this case, when outputting these various commands, the command information storage area 225 of the ROM 203 is referred to. Details of these various commands will be described later. Each of the commands is configured as information of a predetermined number of bytes, and includes various types of information as the information of the predetermined number of bytes.

  Also, on the output side of the MPU 202, a variable winning drive unit 114a for opening and closing the opening and closing door of the variable winning device 114, an electric accessory driving unit 115a for opening and closing the electric accessory of the operating port 115, a special figure display unit 117, The general-purpose display unit 118 is connected. The main control board 201 is provided with various driver circuits, and the MPU 202 executes drive control of various drive units through the driver circuits.

  That is, in the open / close execution mode, the drive control of the variable winning drive unit 114a is executed in the MPU 202 such that the variable winning device 114 is opened / closed. Further, when the open state of the electric accessory in the operating port 115 is won, the drive control of the electric accessory drive unit 115a is executed in the MPU 202 so that the electric accessory is opened and closed. Further, the display control of the special figure display unit 117 and the general figure display unit 118 described above is executed by the MPU 202.

  The power failure monitoring board 205 relays between the main control board 201 and the power supply / emission control device 98, and monitors a DC stable 24 volt voltage which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply / emission control device 98. The payout control device 97 controls the payout of a prize ball and a loaned ball by the payout device 96 based on the prize ball command input from the main control device 81.

  The power supply / emission control device 98 is connected to, for example, a commercial power supply (external power supply) in a game arcade or the like. Then, based on the external power supplied from the commercial power supply, the operating power required for each of the main control board 201 and the payout control device 97 is generated, and the generated operating power is supplied through a predetermined power path. I do. The power supply / launch control device 98 is responsible for controlling the launch of the game ball launching mechanism 51, and the game ball launching mechanism 51 is driven when predetermined launch conditions are met.

  The effect control device 82 controls the drive of the light emitting unit 58 and the speaker unit 59 provided on the front door frame 14 and controls the display control device 212 based on various commands input from the main control device 81. .

  The display control device 212 executes display control of the symbol display device 161 based on the command input from the effect control device 82. In this case, the effect control device 82 determines the type of the combination of the symbol change display pattern and the symbol to be finally stopped and displayed on the symbol display device 161 based on the various commands input from the main control device 81, A lottery is performed for the presence or absence of the reach and the content of the reach effect.

  Here, the contents related to the change display of the symbol of each game round will be described with reference to the schematic diagrams of FIG. 11 and FIG.

  The display control device 212 is provided with a character ROM. The character ROM includes nine types of main symbol data (see FIGS. 11 (a) to 11 (i)) with numbers “1” to “9” and sub-design data without numbers. (See FIG. 11 (j)) are stored in advance.

  As shown in FIG. 12 (a), on the display screen G of the symbol display device 161, three symbol rows Z1, Z2, Z3 of an upper row, a middle row, and a lower row are set. Each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is configured by arranging a main symbol and a sub symbol in a predetermined order. Then, on the display screen G, the symbols in each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 are variably displayed so as to scroll in a predetermined direction (specifically, from right to left) with a periodicity.

  In the upper symbol row Z1, nine types of main symbols "1" to "9" are arranged in descending numerical order, and one sub symbol is arranged between each main symbol. In the lower symbol row Z3, nine types of main symbols "1" to "9" are arranged in ascending numerical order, and one sub symbol is arranged between each main symbol. That is, the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 are composed of 18 symbols. On the other hand, in the middle symbol row Z2, nine types of main symbols “1” to “9” are arranged in ascending numerical order, and the main symbol “9” and the main symbol “1” are arranged. , A main symbol of “4” is additionally arranged, and one sub symbol is arranged between each of the main symbols. That is, only the middle symbol row Z2 is composed of 20 symbols with 10 main symbols arranged.

  The display screen G shown in the present embodiment has almost the entire area thereof as a variable display area of Z1 to Z3 in which the symbols are displayed, and the variable display area is a target to be shielded by the movable accessory device 162 as shown in FIG. Area (hereinafter referred to as a sub-display area Rs) and an area not to be shielded (a main display area Rm). The left and right sides of the main display area Rm in the variable display direction (left and right directions) are the sub display areas Rs. Specifically, the center 3/5 of the display screen G is the main display area Rm, and the other (right) (1/5 and left 1/5) are set as the sub-display area Rs.

  Supplementary explanation of the relationship between the display screen G and each of the movable auditors 170 to 173 is as follows. In a situation where each of the movable auditors 170 to 173 is arranged at the shielding position, the main display area Rm is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10, The display area Rs is difficult or unrecognizable from the front of the pachinko machine 10. On the other hand, in a situation where the movable auditors 170 to 173 are arranged at the non-shielding position, both the main display area Rm and the sub-display area Rs can be viewed from the front of the gaming machine.

  In addition, since each of the movable auditors 170 to 173 is individually moved to the shielding position and the non-shielding position, the left and right sub-display areas Rs can be individually switched to the shielding state / non-shielding state. Hereinafter, for convenience of explanation, the right sub-display area Rs is distinguished as the right sub-display area Rs1, and the left sub-display area Rs is distinguished as the left sub-display area Rs2.

  As shown in FIG. 12B, on the display screen G, five symbols are stopped and displayed for each symbol row, and as a result, a total of 15 symbols of 3 × 5 are stopped and displayed. It has become. Of these, three symbols are stopped and displayed in the main display area Rm for each symbol row, and a total of nine 3 × 3 symbols are stopped and displayed. In addition, a total of six 1 × 3 × 2 symbols are stopped and displayed in the left and right sub display areas Rs1 and Rs2. In the pachinko machine 10, five effective lines and six non-effective lines are set in accordance with the 15 symbols stopped and displayed on the display screen G.

  Specifically, in the main display region Rm, five effective lines, that is, a left line L1, a middle line L2, a right line L3, a right down line L4, and a right up line L5 are set. Then, the variable display is stopped in the order of the upper symbol row Z1, the lower symbol row Z3, and the middle symbol row Z2, and all the symbol rows Z1 are formed in a state in which a combination of symbols having the same numeral assigned to any of the activated lines is formed. When the variable display of ~ Z3 is finished, the big hit movie is displayed as the occurrence of the normal big hit result or the positive change big hit result.

  The non-effective lines include non-effective lines L6 and L9 set in the sub-display area Rs, and non-effective lines L7, L8, L10 and L11 set so as to straddle the sub-display area Rs and the main display area Rm. It is constituted by. Specifically, a right non-effective line L6 is set in the right sub display area Rs1, and a right lower right line L7 and a right upper line L8 extend across the right sub display area Rs1 and the main display area Rm. Is set. Further, a left non-effective line L9 is set in the left sub display area Rs2, and a left lower right line L10 and a left upper line L11 are set across the left sub display area Rs2 and the main display area Rm. Have been. These non-effective lines L6 to L11 are lines used in the production of the pachinko machine 10, and the game result is reported only by a combination of symbols stopped and displayed on the above-mentioned effective lines L1 to L5 (main display area Rm). You.

  The positional relationship with each of the movable auditors 170 to 173 will be described. In a situation where the upper right first movable auditory 170 is arranged at the shielding position, a symbol stopped and displayed on the upper stage of the right non-effective line L6, A part of the symbol stopped and displayed in the middle stage is covered by the first movable role 170, so that the visual confirmation of the symbol is hindered. Further, in a situation where the lower left second movable object 171 is disposed at the shielding position, the symbol stopped and displayed at the lower stage of the right inactive line L6 and a part of the symbol stopped and displayed at the middle stage are displayed in the second position. 2 It is covered with the movable object 171, and the visual confirmation of the symbols is hindered.

  That is, in the right sub-display area Rs1, the symbol stopped and displayed at the upper stage becomes visible when the first movable role 170 moves from the shield position to the non-shield position, and the symbol stopped and displayed at the lower stage is the second movable member. When the accessory 171 moves from the shielding position to the non-shielding position, it becomes visible. Further, the symbols stopped and displayed in the middle stage can be visually recognized as a whole by moving the first movable auditors 170 and the second movable auditors 171 from the shielding position to the non-shielding position.

  In the left sub-display area Rs2 as well, the positional relationship between the symbols stopped and displayed in the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 and the movable movable objects 172 and 173 is the same. The upper left third movable character 172 moves from the shielding position to the non-shielding position and becomes visible, and the symbol stopped and displayed at the lower stage moves the lower left fourth movable character 173 from the shielding position to the non-shielding position. It becomes visible. Further, the symbols stopped and displayed in the middle stage can be visually recognized as a whole by moving the third movable auditors 172 and the fourth movable auditors 173 from the shielding position to the non-shielding position.

  Explaining the relationship between the non-effective lines L6 to L11 and the movable roles 170 to 173, the right non-effective line L6 indicates that the first movable role 170 and the second movable role 171 move from the shielding position to the non-shielding position. Will be visible. The right lowering line L7 becomes visible when the second movable role 171 moves from the blocking position to the non-blocking position, and the right rising line L8 moves the first movable role 170 from the blocking position to the non-blocking position. It becomes visible by moving. The left non-effective line L9 becomes visible when the third movable role 172 and the fourth movable role 173 move from the shielding position to the non-shielding position. The left lower right line L10 becomes visible when the third movable role 172 moves from the blocking position to the non-blocking position, and the left right rising line L11 moves the fourth movable role 173 from the blocking position to the non-blocking position. It becomes visible by moving.

  In view of the fact that the variable display of each symbol row is stopped as described above, the upper symbol row Z1 is the first symbol row (or the first symbol row), and the lower symbol row Z3 is the second symbol row (or the second symbol row). The two symbol rows and the middle symbol row Z2 can be referred to as a third symbol row (or a third symbol row).

  Of the above main symbols, the main symbols with odd numbers (1, 3, 5, 7, 9) correspond to “specific symbols”, and when a probability-variable jackpot result occurs, the same specific symbol is used. The combination is stopped and displayed. The main symbols with even numbers (2, 4, 6, 8) correspond to “non-specific symbols”, and when a jackpot result usually occurs, the same combination of non-specific symbols is stopped and displayed. You.

  In addition, the mode of the variable display of the symbol in the symbol display device 161 is not limited to the above-mentioned one, and is arbitrary. The number of symbol columns, the direction of the variable display of the symbol in the symbol column, the number of symbols in each symbol column, and the like. Can be changed as appropriate. For example, a plurality of symbol rows may be set so as to be arranged side by side, and the direction of symbol change display in the symbol row may be set to the vertical direction. In this case, the arrangement of the movable characters 170 to 173 may be changed in accordance with the number of symbol rows and the direction in which the symbols change.

<About various counters>
Next, an electrical configuration for performing various lotteries in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81 will be described with reference to FIG.

  The MPU 202 uses a variety of counter information in the game to perform a jackpot occurrence lottery, setting of the display of the special figure display unit 117, setting of the symbol display of the symbol display device 161, setting of the display of the general symbol display unit 118, and the like. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 13, a jackpot random number counter C1 used for the lottery of the jackpot occurrence, a jackpot type counter C2 used for determining the jackpot type, and when the symbol display device 161 deviates and fluctuates. , A reach random number counter C3 used for a lottery generation lottery, a random number initial value counter CINI used for setting an initial value of a jackpot random number counter C1, and a variation type for determining a display continuation time in the special figure display unit 117 and the symbol display device 161. And a counter CS. Further, an electric accessory opening counter C4 used for a lottery to determine whether or not the electric accessory of the operating port 115 is in the electric open state (support state) is used. The counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 are provided in various counter areas 234 of the RAM 204.

  Each of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time it is updated, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at short time intervals, and the updated value is appropriately stored in a lottery counter buffer 231 set in a predetermined area of the RAM 204. Of these, in the lottery counter buffer 231, information corresponding to the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 is provided as acquisition information storage means in the RAM 204 when a winning in the operating port 115 occurs. Is stored in the reserved ball storage area 232.

  The reserved ball storage area 232 includes a reserved area RE and an execution area AE. The holding area RE includes a first holding area RE1, a second holding area RE2, a third holding area RE3, and a fourth holding area RE4. In accordance with a winning history to the operating port 115, a lottery counter buffer is provided. A combination of the stored numerical values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 is stored in one of the holding areas RE1 to RE4 as holding information.

  In this case, the first holding area RE1 to the fourth holding area RE4 include a first holding area RE1 → a second holding area RE2 → a third holding area when a winning in the operating port 115 occurs continuously plural times. Each numerical information is stored in chronological order in the order of RE3 → fourth reservation area RE4. By providing the four holding areas RE1 to RE4 in this way, up to four winning histories of game balls to the operating port 115 are held and stored. Further, the holding area RE includes a number-of-holds storage area NA, and information for specifying the number of holdings of the winning histories to the operation port 115 is stored in the number-of-holds storage area NA. .

  It should be noted that the number of items that can be held and stored is not limited to four, but may be any number, such as two, three, five or more, or a single number.

  The execution area AE is an area for moving each numerical information stored in the first holding area RE1 of the holding area RE when starting the variable display of the special figure display unit 117. At this time, a determination as to whether or not a hit is made is made based on various numerical information stored in the execution area AE.

  Each of the above counters will be described in detail.

  First, the electric accessory opening counter C4 will be described. The electric accessory opening counter C4 is configured to, for example, be incremented by one in the range of 0 to 250 and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The electric accessory opening counter C4 is updated periodically, and is stored in the electric utility holding area 233 of the RAM 204 at the timing when the game ball wins the through gate 116. Then, at a predetermined timing, a lottery is performed based on the stored value of the electric accessory opening counter C4 to determine whether or not to control the electric accessory of the operating port 115 to the electric-compartment open state (support state).

  Here, in the pachinko machine 10, a plurality of types of support modes are set so that the modes of support by the electric accessory of the operating port 115 are different from each other. In detail, in the support mode, when the game ball is continuously fired in the same manner with respect to the game area 103, the electric accessory of the operating port 115 is opened per unit time when compared. The low-frequency support mode (or the low-frequency guide state) and the high-frequency support mode (or the high-frequency guide state) are set so that the frequency becomes relatively high and low.

  In the low-frequency support mode and the high-frequency support mode, the probability of winning in the electric-power-opening state in the motor-powered object opening lottery using the electric-powered object opening counter C4 is the same (for example, both are 4/5). In the high-frequency support mode, the number of times the electric accessory of the operation port 115 is opened when the electrification is released is set to be greater than in the low-frequency support mode. It is set long. In this case, in the high-frequency support mode, in the case where the electric utility is released and the electric accessory of the operating port 115 is opened a plurality of times, the next open state is started after the end of one open state. Is set shorter than one open time. Furthermore, in the high-frequency support mode, a minimum securing time (ie, that is, a minimum securing time after the next electric-powered-object opening lottery is performed after one electric-powered-object opening lottery is performed than in the low-frequency support mode) One display continuation time in the general-purpose display unit 118) is set short.

  As described above, in the high frequency support mode, there is a higher probability that a winning in the operation port 115 will occur than in the low frequency support mode. When a prize is generated in the operating port 115, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out. Therefore, in the high-frequency support mode, the player plays a game while suppressing the consumption (investment) of the ball. be able to.

  In addition, the configuration for increasing the frequency of the electric utility opening state per unit time in the high frequency support mode compared to the low frequency support mode is not limited to the above-described configuration. It is good also as a structure which makes the probability of electrification open state winning high in. Further, a securing time to be secured after one electric-power-use opening lottery is performed after the next electric-power-use opening lottery is performed (for example, in the general-purpose display section 118 based on a prize to the through gate 116). In a configuration in which a plurality of types of variable display to be executed are prepared, a setting is made such that a shorter securing time is more easily selected or the average securing time is shorter in the high frequency support mode than in the low frequency support mode. May be. Further, increasing the number of times of opening, lengthening the opening time, and shortening the securing time secured after one electric-power-operated goods opening lottery is performed after the one electric-powered goods opening lottery is performed. Even if the advantage of the high frequency support mode with respect to the low frequency support mode is increased by applying any one condition or any combination of the conditions of shortening the average time of the securing time and increasing the winning probability, Good.

  Next, the jackpot random number counter C1 will be described. The jackpot random number counter C1 is configured to be added one by one in order within a range of, for example, 0 to 599, and to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. In particular, when the jackpot random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the jackpot random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 599). The jackpot random number counter C1 is updated periodically, and is stored in the reserved ball storage area 232 of the RAM 204 at the timing when the game ball wins the operation port 115.

  The value of the random number for winning the jackpot is stored as a hit / fail table (hit / hit information group) in a hit / hit table storage area 221 as a hit / hit information group storage means in the ROM 203. Here, the contents of the success / failure table will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 14, as the hit / fail table, the hit / fail table for the low-probability mode in FIG. 14A (low-pass probability information group) and the hit / fail table for the high-probability mode in FIG. Probability information group for probability). That is, in the pachinko machine 10, a low-probability mode (low-probability state) and a high-probability mode (high-probability state) are set as lottery modes in the winning / rejecting lottery means.

  In the gaming state in which the winning / rejecting table for the low probability mode is referred to at the time of the lottery, as shown in FIG. 14A, the number of random numbers for winning the jackpot is two. On the other hand, in the gaming state in which the winning / failing table for the high-probability mode is referred to in the lottery, there are 21 random winning values for the jackpot. In this case, the value group of the jackpot random number counter C1 that wins the jackpot in the situation of the low probability mode is included in the value group of the jackpot random number counter C1 that wins the jackpot in the situation of the high probability mode. If the winning probability is higher in the high-probability mode than in the low-probability mode, the number and value of the random numbers to be won are arbitrary.

  The jackpot type counter C2 is configured to be incremented by one in the order of 0 to 29, and to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 29). The jackpot type counter C2 is updated periodically, and is stored in the holding area RE of the holding ball storage area 232 of the RAM 204 at the timing when the game ball wins the operation port 115.

  The distribution destination of the game result to the jackpot type counter C2 is stored as a distribution table (distribution information group) in a distribution table storage area 222 in the ROM 203 as distribution information group storage means. In the distribution table, as shown in FIG. 14 (b), a normal jackpot result (low-probability-specific special game result) and a probable-change big-hit result (high-probability-specific special game result) are set as distribution destinations of the game result. ing.

  The normal jackpot result is a jackpot result in which, after the opening / closing execution mode ends, the success / failure lottery mode becomes the low probability mode and the support mode becomes the high frequency support mode. However, the high frequency support mode shifts to the low frequency support mode when the number of games reaches the end reference number (specifically, 100 times) after the shift. In other words, the normal jackpot result is a jackpot result that shifts the game state to the normal jackpot state (low-probability-compatible special game state).

  The probability change jackpot result is a jackpot result in which, after the end of the opening / closing execution mode, the success / failure lottery mode becomes the high probability mode and the support mode becomes the high frequency support mode. The high-frequency support mode is continued until the lottery result in the winning / non-winning lottery becomes a jackpot state win and the state shifts to the jackpot state. In other words, the probability-change jackpot result is a jackpot result that shifts the gaming state to the probability-variable jackpot state (high-probability-compatible special game state).

  The normal gaming state in relation to the above gaming states refers to a state in which the winning / rejecting lottery mode is a low probability mode and the support mode is a low frequency support mode.

  In the distribution table, among the values of the jackpot type counter C2 of “0 to 29”, “0 to 9” corresponds to the normal jackpot result, and “10 to 29” corresponds to the probable variable jackpot result.

  The reach random number counter C3 is configured to be incremented by one in order within a range of, for example, 0 to 238, and to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 238). The reach random number counter C3 is updated periodically, and is stored in the reserved ball storage area 232 of the RAM 204 at the timing when the game ball enters the operating port 115. More specifically, the game ball is stored in the reserve area RE of the RAM 204 at the timing when the game ball wins the operation port 115. Then, it is determined whether or not to generate reach based on the reach table stored in the reach table storage area of the ROM 203. However, in the game cycle in which the mode shifts to the open / close execution mode, the MPU 202 determines the occurrence of reach regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3. The number of the reach random number counter C3 corresponding to the occurrence of the reach display is the same in each game state, but may be individually set according to the game state. For example, a configuration in which the number of reach random number counters C3 corresponding to the occurrence of the reach display is set to be greater when the support mode is the high-frequency support mode than when the support mode is the low-frequency support mode.

  Here, the reach display (reach state) includes a symbol display device 161 capable of performing a variable display (or variable display) of a symbol (pattern). In the gaming machine in which the stop display result after the fluctuation display is the special display result, the stop display result is derived display after the fluctuation display (or variable display) of the symbol (pattern) is started on the display screen G of the symbol display device 161. This is a display state for causing the player to think that the special display result is likely to be a variable display state before the special display result.

  In other words, by stopping and displaying the symbols for some of the symbol columns among the plurality of symbol columns displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 161, the reach symbol for which the combination of the jackpot symbols may be established is established. This is a display state in which a combination is displayed, and in that state, the symbols are variably displayed in the remaining symbol rows.

  More specifically, as a pre-stage for terminating the variable display of symbols, a reach symbol with a possibility of a winning combination being formed on a preset effective line in a display screen G of the symbol display device 161 is set. The reach line is formed by stopping and displaying the combination, and the symbol is changed and displayed by the last stop symbol row in a state where the reach line is formed.

  A display mode at the time of the reach display will be described with reference to FIG. In the case of the reach display, the symbol variation display is ended (stop display) in the upper symbol row Z1 first, and the symbol variation display is terminated (stop display) in the lower symbol row Z3. In this state, a reach symbol is formed by stopping and displaying a main symbol having the same number attached to any of the activated lines L1 to L5. Then, in the state where the reach line is formed, reach display is performed by performing variable display of the symbols in the middle symbol row Z2. When shifting to the opening / closing execution mode, the main symbol having the same number as the main symbol forming the reach line is stopped and displayed on the reach line so that the symbol in the middle symbol row Z2 is displayed. Is terminated.

  In the present embodiment, the reach display is not performed on the non-effective lines L6 to L11. However, the reach display may be performed also on the non-effective lines L6 to L11.

  In the reach display, in the state where the combination of reach symbols is displayed as described above, a variation display of the symbols is performed in the remaining symbol rows, and a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image on the background screen thereof. The display effect is achieved by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image on substantially the entire display screen G or substantially the entire main display area Rm after reducing or hiding the combination of the effect and the reach symbol combination. Are included. Further, when the reach display is performed or before the reach display, the determination as to whether or not to perform a preview display using a predetermined image such as a predetermined character is performed using a reach random number counter C3 or another counter. You may.

  The fluctuation type counter CS is configured to be incremented by one in order within a range of, for example, 0 to 198, and to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). The variation type counter CS is used by the MPU 202 to determine the variation display time on the special figure display unit 117 and the variation display time of the symbol on the symbol display device 161. The fluctuation type counter CS is updated once each time a normal process described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the normal process. Then, the buffer value of the variation type counter CS is obtained when the symbol display device 161 determines the variation pattern at the time of starting the variation of the symbol.

  When determining the variable display time in the symbol display device 161, the buffer value of the reach random number counter C3 and the variable type counter CS, and the variable display time table storage area 223 of the ROM 203 are referred to. Further, in the MPU 202, the stop result in the special figure display unit 117 is determined using the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE. The stop result table storage area 224 is used.

<Regarding Various Processes Executed by Main Controller 81>
Next, a timer interrupt process and a normal process executed by the MPU 202 in the main control device 81 to advance a game in each game round will be described. In the MPU 202, in addition to the timer interrupt process and the normal process, a main process started upon power-on and an NMI interrupt process started by input of a power failure signal to an NMI terminal (non-maskable terminal) are executed. However, description of these processes is omitted.

<Timer interrupt processing>
First, the timer interrupt processing will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. This process is started by the MPU 202 periodically (for example, at a cycle of 2 msec).

  In step S101, reading processing of various winning detection sensors is executed. That is, the state of the various winning detection sensors connected to the main controller 81 is read, and the state of the winning detection sensor is determined to store the detection information (winning detection information).

  Then, in step S102, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in a corresponding buffer area of the RAM 204. In the following step S103, the big hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3 and the electric accessory opening counter C4 are updated. Specifically, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessory opening counter C4 are each incremented by one, and are cleared to 0 when their counter values reach the maximum value. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 204.

  After that, in step S104, a prize-winning process for an operating port accompanying a prize to the operating port 115 is executed, and then, in step S105, a prize-for-through processing for a prize to enter a through gate 116 is executed. The interrupt processing ends. In the prize-for-through processing, when a prize has been generated in the through gate 116, the number of stored bonuses stored in the electrical winning storage area 233 is less than the upper limit (for example, “4”). On the condition that this is the case, the value of the electric accessory opening counter C4 updated in step S103 is stored in the electric utility holding area 233.

  Here, the winning process for the operating port in step S104 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

  In the winning processing for the operating port, first, in step S201, it is determined whether or not the game ball has won the operating port 115. If the game ball has not won the operating port 115, the main winning process is terminated. When the game ball has won the operating port 115, in step S202, the value stored in the reserved number storage area NA of the reserved ball storage area 232 is read out, and the start stored in the reserved area RE is started. It is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls N is less than an upper limit value (“4” in the present embodiment).

  If the number N of reserve start balls is equal to or more than the upper limit value, the main prize processing is terminated. If the number N of reserve start balls is less than the upper limit, the process proceeds to step S203, and the number N of reserve start balls is incremented (added) by one. In the following step S204, each value (each numerical information) of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3 and the variation type counter CS updated in the previous step S103 is stored in the free holding area RE of the holding area RE. It is stored in the first reserved area of RE1 to RE4, that is, the reserved area corresponding to the reserved storage number incremented by one in step S203.

  In a succeeding step S205, a confirmation process for a reservation notice for executing an effect based on a winning of the game ball in the operating port 115 is executed. Then, in step S206, processing for setting a hold command for causing the effect control device 82, which is the sub-side control device, to recognize that the game ball has won the operating port 115 is executed, and then the winning for the main operating port is performed. The process ends.

<Normal processing>
Next, the flow of the normal processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The normal process is a process that is started after a main process started upon power-on is executed. In the normal process, main processes of a game are executed. As an outline, each process of steps S301 to S306 is executed as a periodic process with a period of 4 msec, and the counter updating process of steps S308 and S309 is executed in the remaining time.

  In the normal processing, in step S301, output data such as a command set in the timer interrupt processing or the previous normal processing is transmitted to each control device on the sub side. Specifically, it determines the presence or absence of a prize ball command, and if the prize ball command is set, transmits it to the payout control device 97. In addition, when an effect command such as a change command, a type command, a change end command, and various hold commands is set, the command is transmitted to the effect control device 82.

  Next, in step S302, the variation type counter CS is updated. Specifically, the variation type counter CS is incremented by one, and the counter value is cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the updated value of the variation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 204.

  In a succeeding step S303, various signals from the payout control device 97 connected to the MPU 202 are read. Thereafter, in step S304, a game time control process for controlling a game in each game time is executed. In this game round control processing, a jackpot determination, setting of symbol variable display by the symbol display device 161, display control of the special figure display unit 117, and the like are performed. The details of the game times control process will be described later.

  Thereafter, in step S305, a game state transition process for transitioning the game state is executed. Although the details will be described later, the game state shifts to the open / close execution mode, the high probability mode, the high frequency support mode, and the like by the game state shift processing.

  In step S306, a power support process for controlling the driving of the power accessory provided in the operation port 115 is executed. In the electric role support processing, it is determined whether or not the electric accessory in the operating port 115 is to be opened using the numerical information acquired from the electric accessory opening counter C4 stored in the electric role holding area 233 of the RAM 204. In addition to performing the election opening lottery, when the election opening state is won, the opening / closing process of the electrification object of the operating port 115 is executed. In addition, the display control of the general-purpose display unit 118 is performed so as to teach the lottery result of the election opening lottery.

  As described above, the low-frequency support mode and the high-frequency support mode are set as the modes of support of the operating port 115 by the electric accessory, and in the game state transition process in step S305, the mode is switched to one of the support modes. The transition takes place. In this case, the high frequency support mode is set when the high frequency support flag is stored in the RAM 204, and the low frequency support mode is set when the flag is not stored.

  In the power-use support process in step S306, it is determined whether or not the high-frequency support flag is stored in the RAM 204 to determine whether or not the mode is the high-frequency support mode. Then, in the case of the high-frequency support mode, the number of times the electric accessory of the operating port 115 is opened when the electrification is in the open state is set more than in the case of the low-frequency support mode, Set one open time longer. In the case of the high-frequency support mode, when the electric-power-released state is won and the electric-powered accessory of the operation port 115 is opened a plurality of times, the next open state after one open-state is completed. The closing time before the start is set to be shorter than one opening time.

  Incidentally, when the mode is shifted to the open / close execution mode, the support mode is forcibly set to the low frequency support mode even if the high frequency support flag is stored in the RAM 204.

  In the following step S307, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next normal processing has come, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in the present embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the previous normal processing. Then, the update of the random number initial value counter CINI and the variation type counter CS is repeatedly executed within the remaining time until the next execution timing of the normal processing (steps S308 and S309). That is, in step S308, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in a corresponding buffer area of the RAM 204. In step S309, the variation type counter CS is updated. Specifically, the variation type counter CS is incremented by one, and is cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the updated value of the variation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 204.

  Here, since the execution time of each processing of steps S301 to S306 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal processing is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly executing the update of the random number initial value counter CINI using the remaining time, the random number initial value counter CINI (that is, the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1) can be updated at random, and similarly, The fluctuation type counter CS can also be updated at random.

<Game round control process>
Next, the game turn control processing in step S304 will be described with reference to the flowcharts in FIGS.

  As shown in the flowchart of FIG. 18, in the game turn control process, it is first determined in step S401 whether or not the vehicle is in the open / close execution mode. When the opening / closing execution mode is in progress, the game play is executed without executing any of the processing after step S402, that is, the game start processing in steps S403 to S405 and the game turn progress processing in steps S406 to S409. The control processing ends.

  If it is not in the open / close execution mode, it is determined in step S402 whether the special figure display unit 117 is performing variable display. If the special figure display unit 117 is not performing the variable display, the process proceeds to the game times start processing of steps S403 to S405. In the game start process, first, in step S403, it is determined whether or not the number N of pending start balls is “0”. The case where the number N of start-reserved balls is “0” means that the reserved information is not stored in the reserved ball storage area 232. Therefore, the present game time control process is terminated.

  If the number N of reserved balls to be started is not “0”, a data setting process for setting data stored in the reserved area RE of the reserved ball storage area 232 for variable display is executed in step S404.

  In the data setting process, first, the number N of the reserved starting balls is subtracted by one. Further, the data stored in the first holding area RE1 of the holding area RE in the holding ball storage area 232 is moved to the execution area AE. Thereafter, a process of shifting the data stored in each of the holding areas RE1 to RE4 of the holding area RE is executed.

  This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting data stored in the first to fourth reserved areas RE1 to RE4 to the lower area side. Thereby, the data in the first reserved area RE1 is cleared, and the second reserved area RE2 → the first reserved area RE1, the third reserved area RE3 → the second reserved area RE2, the fourth reserved area RE4 → the third reserved area RE3, and the like. Data in each area is shifted accordingly.

  Further, in the data setting process, a shift command (shift occurrence information), which is information for causing the effect control device 82 as the sub-side control device to recognize that the data in the holding area has been shifted, is set. The shift command is transmitted to the effect control device 82 in the external output process of the normal process (step S301). The effect control device 82 executes a process corresponding to the decrease in the number of holdings based on the received shift command.

  After executing the data setting process, after performing the variation start process for starting the variation display on the special figure display unit 117 and the variation display on the symbol display device 161 in step S405, the game round control process ends. .

  Here, the fluctuation start processing will be described. In the variation start process, as shown in FIG. 19, first, in step S501, a success / failure determination process for determining whether or not the hold information corresponding to the current variation start process corresponds to the jackpot win. Specifically, it acquires the information for the jackpot determination from the information stored in the execution area AE, that is, the information obtained from the information updated by the jackpot random number counter C1. Then, when the winning / rejecting lottery mode is the low probability mode, by referring to the low / probability mode winning / rejecting table in the ROM 203, it is specified whether or not the information grasped is included in the information corresponding to the big hit winning. If the lottery mode is the high-probability mode, it refers to the high-probability mode win / fail table in the ROM 203 to specify whether the grasped information is included in the information corresponding to the jackpot win.

  In a succeeding step S502, it is determined whether or not the result of the success / failure determination processing in the step S501 is a result corresponding to the jackpot winning. If the result corresponds to the jackpot, the type determination process is executed in step S503.

  In the type determination processing, information for type determination, that is, information acquired from information updated by the jackpot type counter C2 among information stored in the execution area AE is grasped. Further, by referring to the distribution table in the ROM 203, it is specified whether or not the information for the type determination that has been grasped is included in the information corresponding to the probability change jackpot result.

  In a succeeding step S504, it is determined whether or not the type of the current jackpot winning is a probable change jackpot result based on the information specified in the type determining process in the step S503. If it is a probability variable jackpot result, a stop result setting process for a probability variable jackpot is executed in step S505. If it is not a probability variable jackpot result, a stop result setting process for a normal jackpot is executed in step S506. If it is determined in step S502 that a jackpot has not been won, a stop result setting process for an out-of-office is executed in step S507.

  In each of the stop result setting processes in steps S505 to S507, information on a pattern form to be finally stopped and displayed on the special figure display unit 117 is specified from information stored in the ROM 203 in advance, and the specified information is stored in the RAM 204. To memorize. In step S505 and step S506, information for specifying by the MPU 202 that the result of the success / failure determination of the current game round is the probability change jackpot result or the normal jackpot result is stored in the other flag storage area 235 of the RAM 204 ( The information of "1" is stored in the corresponding area). More specifically, in step S505, a probable variable jackpot flag is stored, and in step S506, a normal jackpot flag is stored.

  After executing any one of steps S505 to S507, a variable display time setting process is executed in step S508.

  In the process of setting the fluctuation display time, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS stored in the fluctuation type counter buffer in the lottery counter buffer 231 of the RAM 204 is acquired. In addition, it is determined whether or not reach display occurs on the symbol display device 161 in the current game round. Specifically, when the game times related to the start of the current fluctuation are any of the jackpot results, it is determined that the reach display is generated. Also, regardless of the jackpot result, if the numerical information related to the reach random number counter C3 stored in the execution area AE is numerical information corresponding to the occurrence of the reach, it is determined that the reach display is generated. .

  When it is determined that the reach display occurs, the variable display time table corresponding to the value of the current fluctuation type counter CS is acquired by referring to the reach generation variable display time table stored in the ROM 203, and the fluctuation display time information is obtained. The display time information is stored in the variable display time counter provided in the various counter areas 234 of the RAM 204. On the other hand, when it is determined that the reach display does not occur, the fluctuation display time information corresponding to the value of the current fluctuation type counter CS is acquired by referring to the reach non-occurrence fluctuation display time table stored in the ROM 203. Then, the variable display time information is stored in the variable display time counter. Incidentally, the variable display time that can be obtained with reference to the reach non-occurrence variable display time table is different from the variable display time that can be obtained with reference to the reach generation variable display time table.

  Here, the reach display is provided with a normal reach display and a super reach display having different variable display modes. In the reach display variable display time table, the variable display time information corresponding to each of the normal reach display and the super reach display is set, and by referring to the table, the variable display time information corresponding to each reach display is obtained. Is obtained. For determining the type of the reach display, a table is provided in which the type of the reach display corresponds to the value of the variation type counter CS, and by referring to the table, the value of the current variation type counter CS is determined. The corresponding reach display is determined.

  The variable display time information when no reach occurs is set such that the larger the number of start-reserved balls N, the shorter the variable display time. In addition, in the situation where the support mode is the high frequency support mode, the reach time is set so that a shorter variable display time is selected compared to the case where the number of hold information is the same as in the case where the support mode is the low frequency support mode. An occurrence fluctuation display time table is set. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a configuration may be employed in which the variable display time does not change in accordance with the number N of holding balls to be started or the support mode, and the above relationship may be reversed. Further, the above-described configuration may be applied to a variable display time when a reach occurs. Further, a variable display time table may be individually set for each of the jackpot results, the case of the out-of-reach reach, and the case of the out-of-reach non-occurrence result. In this case, distribution of the variable display time according to each game result is performed.

  The variable display time information when no reach occurs is set so that the variable display time is shorter than the variable display time when the reach occurs. Further, the variable display time information in the normal reach display is set so that the variable display time is shorter than the variable display time in the super reach display. In other words, the above-described variable display time information is set so that the variable display time becomes longer in the order of non-reach occurrence <normal reach display <super reach display.

  As described above, the variable display time of each game is determined by using the presence or absence of reach, the type of reach display, the number of hold information, and the value of the variable type counter CS as parameters. However, the variable display time of each game time is a parameter of the content of the other hold information, specifically, the information for the jackpot determination, the information for the type determination, and the information for the reach determination included in the other hold information as parameters. Determined without having to do so.

  After executing the process of setting the variable display time in step S508, a variable command and a type command are set in step S509. The fluctuation command includes information on the fluctuation display time. Here, as described above, the variable display time acquired with reference to the reach non-occurrence variable display time table is different from the display continuation time acquired with reference to the reach occurrence variable display time table. Even if the information for the presence or absence of the occurrence of the reach is not included in the use command, the effect control device 82 as the sub-side control device can specify the presence or absence of the occurrence of the reach from the information of the variable display time. Note that the fluctuation command may include information directly indicating whether or not the reach has occurred.

  The type command includes information on the game result. In other words, the type command includes the information on the normal jackpot result, the information on the probable change jackpot result, or the information on the off result as the game result information.

  The variation command and the type command set in step S509 are transmitted to the effect control device 82 in step S301 in the normal processing (FIG. 17). After executing the processing of step S509, the display of the pattern is started to be changed in the special figure display unit 117 in step S510, and then the change start processing is ended.

  Returning to the description of the game time control process (FIG. 18), when the special figure display unit 117 is performing variable display, the game time progressing process of steps S406 to S409 is executed. In the game time progress processing, first, in step S406, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation display time of the current game time has elapsed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the variable display time information stored in the variable display time counter area of the RAM 204 has become “0”. As described above, the value of the variable display time information is stored in the variable display time setting process (step S508). The value of the stored variable display time information is decremented (subtracted) by one each time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 15) is started.

  If the variable display time has not elapsed, a variable display process is executed in step S407. In the variable display process, the display mode in the special figure display unit 117 is changed. Thereafter, the game round control process ends.

  If the fluctuation display time has elapsed, a fluctuation end process is executed in step S408. In the fluctuation end processing, the information stored in the RAM 204 in any one of the above-described steps S505 to S507 is specified, and the special pattern display unit 117 displays a picture pattern corresponding to the information. The display of the figure display unit 117 is controlled.

  In a succeeding step S409, a fluctuation end command is set. Thereafter, the game round control process ends. The change end command set in step S409 is transmitted to effect control device 82 in step S301 in the normal processing (FIG. 17). By receiving the received fluctuation end command, the effect control device 82 confirms (final stop display) the final stop symbol combination corresponding to the result of the game in the fluctuation display by the symbol display device 161.

<Game state transition processing>
Next, the game state transition processing in step S305 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. In the game state transition processing, first, in step S601, it is determined whether or not the vehicle is in the open / close execution mode. If the opening / closing execution mode is not in progress, the process proceeds to step S602, and it is determined whether or not the timing at which the variation display of the pattern on the special figure display unit 117 for one game time has ended is completed. If it is not the timing when the variable display has ended, the present game state transition processing is ended as it is.

  If it is the timing at which the variable display has ended, in step S603, it is determined whether or not the game result of the current game round corresponds to the shift to the opening / closing execution mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not any of the normal jackpot flag and the probable variable jackpot flag are stored in the RAM 204. If none of the above flags is stored, the game state transition processing ends.

  If any of the above flags is stored, “15” is stored in the round counter area RC provided in the various counter areas 234 of the RAM 204 in step S604. The round counter area RC is a counter area for counting the number of times the variable winning device 114 has been opened. Thereafter, the present game state transition processing ends.

  On the other hand, when the mode is not the open / close execution mode, an affirmative determination is made in step S601, and the process proceeds to step S605. In step S605, a special winning opening opening / closing process is executed. In the special winning opening opening / closing process, when the variable winning device 114 is closed, the variable winning driving unit 114a is driven on condition that the round counter area RC is equal to or greater than “1”. The device 114 is opened. When the variable prize device 114 is being opened, the variable prize drive is performed on the condition that a predetermined time has elapsed from the opening of the variable prize device 114 or that a predetermined number of game balls have been won. The driving state of the section 114a is stopped, and the variable winning device 114 is closed.

  In a succeeding step S606, it is determined whether or not the value of the round counter area RC is “0”. When the value of the round counter area RC is not “0”, the present game state transition processing is ended as it is. If the value of the round counter area RC is “0”, a transition process at the end of the open / close execution mode is performed in step S607.

  In the transition processing at the end of the opening / closing execution mode, when the probability change jackpot flag is stored in the RAM 204, the success / failure lottery mode is set to the high probability mode and the support mode is set to the high frequency support mode. Note that the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode are maintained at least until the next time a jackpot is won. When the normal jackpot flag is stored in the RAM 204, the winning / rejection lottery mode is set to the low probability mode and the support mode is set to the high frequency support mode. However, the high frequency support mode is ended when the number of game times has continued 100 times, and thereafter, the game mode shifts to the normal game state in which the winning / rejecting lottery mode is the low probability mode and the support mode is the low frequency support mode.

  Thereafter, in step S608, after executing the end processing of the opening / closing execution mode, the game state transition processing ends. In the end processing of the open / close execution mode, the stored flag is deleted from the normal jackpot flag or the probable variable jackpot flag.

<Electrical Configuration of Effect Control Apparatus 82 and Display Control Apparatus 212>
Next, with reference to the block diagram of FIG. 21, the electrical configuration of the effect control device 82 and the display control device 212 will be supplementarily described.

  The MPU 242 is mounted on the effect control board 241 provided in the effect control device 82. The MPU 242 includes a ROM 243 storing various control programs executed by the MPU 242 and fixed value data, a RAM 244 serving as a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 243, It is an element having a built-in interrupt circuit, timer circuit, data input / output circuit, and the like. Note that it is not essential that the ROM 243 and the RAM 244 be integrated into one chip with respect to the MPU 242, and that each of them may be individually integrated into a chip.

  The MPU 242 is provided with an input port and an output port. A main controller 81 is connected to the input side of the MPU 242. From the main controller 81, a hold display control command (hold display control information) such as various hold commands and shift commands is received. In addition, it receives game time control commands (game time control information) such as a change command, a type command, and a change end command. In addition, an opening / closing execution mode command (opening / closing execution mode information) such as an opening command and an ending command is received.

  As described above, the light emitting unit 58 and the speaker unit 59 provided on the front door frame 14 are connected to the output side of the MPU 242, and the display control unit 212 is connected to the output side. Further, driving units 170a to 173a for the movable auditors 170 to 173 of the movable auditors unit 162 are connected to the output side of the MPU 242, respectively. The MPU 242 of the effect control device 82 determines the variation display pattern (effect pattern) of each game and the stop result of the symbol based on various commands received from the main control device 81, and determines the light emitting unit 58, the speaker unit 59, and the drive The control unit 170 controls the driving of the units 170a to 173a and transmits the determined content to the display control device 212 as a command.

  The display control unit 212 includes a display control board 251 on which an MPU 252, a video display processor (VDP) 255, a character ROM 256, and a video RAM 257 are mounted, each of which is an element in which a program ROM 253 and a work RAM 254 are combined into a chip. It has. Note that it is not essential that the program ROM 253 and the work RAM 254 be integrated into one chip for the MPU 252, and each may be configured as an individual chip.

  The MPU 252 of the display control device 212 executes a drawing process on the video RAM 257 in the VDP 255 based on receiving a command from the main control device 81 via the effect control device 82, thereby displaying the symbol on the symbol display device 161. Various images are displayed on the screen G.

  The VDP 255 is a kind of drawing circuit that directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display unit driver incorporated in the symbol display device 161. The VDP 255 is called an “rendering chip” because it is formed as an IC chip, and its substance can be called a microcomputer chip having firmware dedicated for rendering processing. The VDP 255 adjusts the respective timings of the MPU 252, the video RAM 257, and the like to intervene in the reading and writing of data, and reads out the image data to be stored in the video RAM 257 from the character ROM 256 at a predetermined timing and displays it on the symbol display device 161.

  The character ROM 256 plays a role as an image data library for storing character data such as symbols displayed on the symbol display device 161. The character ROM 256 holds bitmap format image data of various display symbols, a color pallet table which is referred to when determining the expression color of each bit of the bitmap image, and the like.

  Note that a plurality of character ROMs 256 may be provided, and image data and the like may be stored in each of the character ROMs 256. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which JPEG format image data for a background image stored in the program ROM 253 is stored in the character ROM 256.

  The video RAM 257 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the symbol display device 161, and the display content of the symbol display device 161 is changed by rewriting the content of the video RAM 257.

<Explanation about the production of each game times>
Here, an outline of a game effect (interlocking effect) using the movable auditors 170 to 173 and the display screen G will be described.

  First, the fluctuation display of the game times will be described with reference to FIG.

  When the game round is started, first, high-speed fluctuation display is started for all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. In this case, it is difficult or impossible to recognize which symbol is displayed in a variable manner. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 22 (a), the variation display mode of the upper symbol row Z1 is switched from the high-speed variation display to the low-speed variation display in which the player can recognize the symbol displayed in the variation display. Then, as shown in FIG. 22 (b), the change display of the upper symbol row Z1 ends, and the change display mode of the lower symbol row Z3 switches from the high-speed change display to the low-speed change display. Then, as shown in FIG. 22C, the variable display of the lower symbol row Z3 ends.

  After the fluctuation of all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, a standby time (standby period) for maintaining the stop display and waiting for a predetermined period is provided (for example, 2 sec), and the current game is performed in the standby time. The final display for clearly displaying the result of the game to the player is performed. Then, when the waiting time elapses in a state in which the symbol (specific symbol or non-specific symbol) combination corresponding to the jackpot result is stopped and displayed on any of the activated lines L1 to L5, a jackpot result is generated, and then the opening and closing are executed. Move to mode.

  In this case, for example, even if the waiting period elapses in a state where the symbol combination corresponding to the jackpot result is stopped and displayed on the non-effective lines L6 to L11, the jackpot result does not occur. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, during this waiting period, the symbol combination corresponding to the jackpot result stopped and displayed on the non-effective lines L6 to L11 moves to the effective lines L1 to L5 and finally ends. A re-fluctuation effect that leads to the occurrence of a jackpot result is set. Hereinafter, the flow of the fluctuation effect will be exemplified with reference to the schematic diagrams of FIGS. 23 and 24, for convenience of explanation, a portion which is actually shielded by the movable auditors 170 to 173 so as to be invisible is shown in a pseudo-transmissive state.

  As shown in FIG. 23A, as a line formed only by symbols stopped in the sub display area Rs, for example, each symbol row Z1 is displayed in a state where a combination of specific symbols is stopped and displayed on the right non-effective line L6. It is assumed that the variable display of Z3 has been completed. In this case, during the standby time, as shown in FIG. 23B, first, the first movable role 170 and the second movable role 171 that block the right non-effective line L6 move from the blocking position to the non-blocking position. The drive units 170a and 171a are thus driven and controlled, and all the combinations of specific symbols on the right non-effective line L6 that have been shielded can be visually recognized. Then, as shown in FIG. 23 (c), the combination of the specific symbols moves to the active line (the middle line L2 in the figure), and the first movable auditors 170 and the second movable auditors 171 move to the non-shielding position. To the shielding position. Thereafter, it is clearly indicated that the jackpot result has been obtained by the elapse of the standby time, and the mode shifts to the open / close execution mode.

  Further, even when the combination of the specific symbols is stopped on the non-effective line extending over both the main display area Rm and the sub display area Rs, the re-fluctuation effect may be performed. For example, as shown in FIG. 24A, it is assumed that a combination of specific symbols is stopped and displayed on the left lower right line L10 as a second non-effective line, and the variable display of each symbol row Z1 to Z3 is completed. In this case, during the standby time, as shown in FIG. 24B, first, the third movable role 172 that shields the sub-display area Rs (the left sub-display area Rs2) of the left-downward right line L10 does not move from the shielding position. The drive unit 172a is driven and controlled to move to the shielding position, and all the combinations of the specific symbols in the shielded left lower right line L10 become visible. Then, as shown in FIG. 24 (c), the combination of the specific symbols moves on the active line (the lower right line L4 in the figure), and the third movable role 172 moves from the non-shielding position to the shielding position. . Thereafter, it is clearly indicated that the jackpot result has been obtained by the elapse of the standby time, and the mode shifts to the open / close execution mode.

  In the pachinko machine 10, in a part of the case where the jackpot result occurs, the combination of the symbols corresponding to the jackpot result is temporarily stopped on the inactive line, and then the re-variation effect is performed. I have. In other words, the above-described re-fluctuation effect occurs with a predetermined probability when the combination of symbols corresponding to the jackpot result stops on the non-effective line. As shown in FIGS. 23 and 24, a part of the symbol stopped in the sub display area Rs protrudes from the movable auditors 170 to 173, and the protruding part is allowed to be viewed from the front of the gaming machine. . For this reason, by paying attention to the protruding portion, the player can recognize when the symbol combination corresponding to the jackpot result is stopped and displayed on the inactive line.

  The player expects that the above-described re-fluctuation effect will be performed after the stop display is performed (after the fluctuation display of each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 is completed) and the standby time elapses. By performing such a display effect, even if the combination of the symbols corresponding to the jackpot result does not stop on the activated line, the game finally ends (until the standby time elapses). It is possible to maintain a sense of expectation that a jackpot may have been won, and it is possible to appropriately secure attention to the game.

  In the present pachinko machine 10, a reservation notice indicating the contents of the reservation information stored in the reservation ball storage area 232 is performed with a predetermined probability at a timing before the game round related to the reservation information is started. It has a configuration. Therefore, the flow of the suspension notice will be exemplified below with reference to the schematic diagrams of FIGS. 25 and 26. In FIG. 26, for the sake of convenience of explanation, a portion that is actually shielded by the movable auditors 170 to 173 so as to be invisible is shown in a simulated state.

  The suspension notice is performed using a stop result (combination of stop symbols) in the game times before the game time of the suspension information targeted for the suspension notice is started. Specifically, as a stop result of the game times before the game times related to the hold information that is the target of the hold notice, without forming a combination of symbols corresponding to the jackpot results on the activated line, and By stopping and displaying the same symbol in all symbol columns Z1 to Z3, the content of the hold information that is the target of the hold announcement is indicated.

  For example, if the hold information that is the target of the hold announcement is the probability change jackpot result, as shown in FIG. 25 (a), the game times earlier than the game times related to the hold information that is the target of the hold advance notice , A display effect for hold notice is executed. Specifically, without stopping the combination of the specific symbols on the activated line, the same specific symbol is stopped and displayed in all the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 (the stop is displayed in the main display area Rm). To end. After that, as shown in FIG. 25 (b), in the game times related to the hold information that is the target of the hold announcement, the combination of specific symbols is stopped and displayed on the activated line, and the result of the probability change jackpot is obtained. Is specified.

  If the hold information subject to the hold notice is a normal jackpot result, as shown in FIG. 25 (c), a game prior to the game times related to the hold information subject to the hold notice is held. At each time, a display effect for a hold notice is executed. Specifically, without stopping the combination of the non-specific symbols on the active line, the same non-specific symbol is stopped and displayed in all the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 (the stop display is performed in the main display region Rm). ) End the game round. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 25 (d), a combination of non-specific symbols is stopped and displayed on the activated line in the game times related to the hold information targeted for the hold announcement, so that a normal jackpot result is obtained. Is clearly indicated.

  The suspension notice may be performed using not only the main display region Rm but also both the main display region Rm and the sub display region Rs. That is, as shown in FIG. 26A, for example, the same symbol is stopped and displayed in the main display area Rm in the middle symbol row Z2 and the lower symbol row Z3, and the sub-display area Rs (FIG. In this case, the symbol corresponding to the upper left display area Rs2) is stopped and displayed. Then, in the standby time, as shown in FIG. 26 (b), by moving the third movable role 172 from the shielding position to the non-shielding position, the same symbol can be visually recognized, and then the third movable role The game 172 is ended by moving the object 172 to the shielding position. After that, as shown in FIG. 26 (c), in the game times related to the hold information that is the target of the hold notice, the combination of the specific symbols is stopped and displayed on the activated line, so that the result of the probability change jackpot is obtained. Specified.

  In the reservation notice shown in FIGS. 26A to 26C, a case where only one of the left and right sub-display areas Rs (sub-display area Rs2) is used is exemplified. In some cases, the suspension notice is given using the display areas Rs1 and Rs2, and the suspension notice is various. Hereinafter, with reference to FIGS. 26D to 26F, an example of the suspension notice using the left and right sub-display areas Rs1 and Rs2 will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 26D, the same symbol is stopped and displayed in the right sub-display region Rs1, the left sub-display region Rs2, and the main display region Rm (in the figure, the left sub-display region Rs2 in the upper symbol column Z1 and The same symbol is stopped and displayed in the right sub-display area Rs1 in the middle symbol row Z2 and the main display area Rm in the lower symbol row Z3). In the standby time, as shown in FIG. 26 (e), the first movable role 170, the second movable role 171 and the third movable role 172 are moved from the shielding position to the non-shielding position, so that the same is achieved. Then, the third movable role 172 is moved to the shielding position to end the game round. Then, as shown in FIG. 26 (f), in the game times related to the hold information that is the target of the hold notice, the combination of specific symbols is stopped and displayed on the activated line, thereby indicating that the result of the probability change jackpot has been achieved. Specified.

  In this way, in the suspension notice, not only the main display area Rm in which the activated lines L1 to L5 are set but also the pattern stopped and displayed in the sub-display area Rs to be shielded by the movable auditors 170 to 173 are used. And the production is performed. On the other hand, even when the same symbol is stopped and displayed in the main display region Rm and the sub-display region Rs, if the corresponding movable auditorium moves and the symbol is not visible, The pending notice will not be valid (it will simply be a gap). In other words, for the suspension notice using the sub-display area Rs, the corresponding movable auditorium moves from the shielding position to the non-shielding position, and the entire design to be shielded becomes visible. It is set as an execution condition.

  Similarly, in the above-described re-fluctuation effect, even if the symbol combination corresponding to the jackpot result is stopped and displayed on the non-effective line, the corresponding movable role must move from the shielding position to the non-shielding position. If it were just an outlier, it would not be a big hit. Therefore, even in the re-fluctuation effect, the moving condition of the corresponding movable auditorium from the shielding position to the non-shielding position is set as an execution condition of the re-fluctuation effect.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, as described above, the display content on the display screen G and the movement of the movable auditors 170 to 173 are interlocked to perform the re-fluctuation effect and the suspension notice effect. For this reason, when the symbols are stopped and displayed on the display screen G, the subsequent deployment largely depends on whether or not the corresponding movable auditors 170 to 173 move from the shielding position to the non-shielding position. Become. In view of such circumstances, in the present embodiment, as an effect that causes the player to expect the movement of the movable auditors 170 to 173 to the non-shielding position, one of the movable auditors 170 to 173 corresponding to the above-described effect. A vibration effect (vibrating up and down) is set. Hereinafter, the flow of the fanning effect will be described with reference to the schematic diagram of FIG. In addition, since the flirting production is roughly divided into the flirting production related to the re-fluctuation production and the prilling production related to the pending announcement production, we first explain about the revelation production relating to the fluctuation production production, and then to the reservation announcement production. A description will be given of such a stir effect. In the example shown in FIG. 27, FIGS. 27 (a) to 27 (d) correspond to the pending announcement effect, and FIGS. 27 (e) to 27 (h) correspond to the re-change effect.

<Fan production>
As shown in FIG. 27 (a), for example, if a symbol combination corresponding to the jackpot result is stopped and displayed on the left lower right line L10 as an inactive line, as shown in FIG. 27 (b), the corresponding movable character The effect is as if the third movable role 172 vibrates up and down and moves from the shielding position to the non-shielding position. Then, as shown in FIG. 27 (c), if the third movable role 172 moves to the non-shielding position, a symbol change corresponding to the jackpot result is moved to the pay line, and then the symbol combination corresponding to the jackpot result is moved to the payout result. Occurs. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 27 (d), if the standby time elapses while the third movable auditory component 172 does not move to the non-shielding position and remains at the shielding position, the re-fluctuation effect does not occur, and a mere stray eye is produced. Become.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 27E, when the same symbol is stopped and displayed by a predetermined number over the main display area Rm and the sub-display area Rs (in the figure, the middle and lower left lines L1 of the main display area Rm are displayed). In the upper left display area Rs2, the same symbol is stopped and displayed), as shown in FIG. 27 (f), the third movable role 172 vibrates in the same manner as the corresponding movable role as described above. Direction is performed. Then, as shown in FIG. 27 (g), if the third movable auditory substance 172 moves to the non-shielding position, the reservation notice is established, and as shown in FIG. If the standby time elapses without moving to the non-shielding position and remaining at the shielding position, the reservation notice will not be given but a mere gap. Hereinafter, processes performed by various control devices to perform these effects will be described.

<Processing related to various effects>
The processing related to various effects will be described first focusing on the processing related to the re-fluctuation effect, and then the processing related to the suspension notice will be described.

<Variable display control processing performed by effect control device 82>
First, the variable display control processing executed by the MPU 242 of the effect control device 82 will be described below. The variable display control process is started at a predetermined cycle (for example, every 2 msec). In the variation display control process, when the variation command transmitted from the main control device 81 is received, the symbol display device 161 starts the variation display of a symbol for one game, and the main control device 81 When the transmitted variation end command has been received, a process of causing the symbol variation display to be finally stopped is executed. In the variable display control process, a process for appropriately modifying the variable display pattern is performed in accordance with the setting for performing the suspension notice.

  In the variation display control process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 28, it is determined in step S701 whether or not the game is being played, that is, whether or not the symbol display for one game is being displayed in the symbol display device 161. Is determined. If the symbols for one game have not been changed, it is determined in step S702 whether or not the change command transmitted from the main control device 81 has been received. If the variation command has not been received, the variation display control process is terminated. If the variation command has been received, the variation display control process is terminated after executing the variation start process in step S703.

  On the other hand, when the symbols for one game are displayed in a fluctuating manner, it is determined in step S704 whether the fluctuating end command transmitted from the main control device 81 has been received. If the fluctuation end command has not been received, the fluctuation display control processing is terminated after executing the fluctuation processing in step S705. If the fluctuation end command has been received, the fluctuation display control processing is ended after executing the fluctuation end processing in step S706.

  Hereinafter, the fluctuation start processing in step S703, the fluctuation processing in step S705, and the fluctuation end processing in step S706 will be described in detail.

<Process for starting fluctuation>
First, the fluctuation start processing in step S703 will be described. The change start process is a process for starting an effect for a game round based on receiving a change command transmitted from the main control device 81. In the fluctuation start processing, in addition to the presence / absence of the reach display as the effect for the game round, a re-fluctuation effect and a hold notice effect are set. Here, first, a process regarding the setting of the reach display and the setting of the re-fluctuation effect will be described, and then a process regarding the setting of the hold announcement effect will be described.

  As shown in the flowchart of FIG. 29, in step S801, the fluctuation command received this time is read, and information on whether or not a reach has occurred and information on the fluctuation display time are specified from the command. Further, as described above, when transmitting the variation command, main controller 81 also transmits the type command. Therefore, in step S801, the type command received together with the fluctuation command received this time is read, and game result information such as information on a probability variable jackpot result, information on a normal jackpot result, or information on a missed result is identified from the command. . Then, in step S801, from the specified information, information on whether or not a jackpot has been won, information on the jackpot type if the jackpot has been won, information on whether or not reach has occurred if the jackpot has not been won, and the variable display time And stores the obtained information in the register of the MPU 252.

  In a succeeding step S802, it is determined based on the information grasped in the step S801 whether or not the game result of the game to be started this time is a game result corresponding to the jackpot result. If it is a jackpot result, that is, if it is a probable variable jackpot result or a normal jackpot result, in a succeeding step S803, a jackpot effect setting process is executed.

  In the effect setting process for the big hit, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 30, first, in step S901, a stop result determination process for the big hit is executed. In the stop result determination process, if the result is a probable change jackpot result, the stop result in which the same combination of specific symbols (main symbols with odd numbers) is established on one activated line L1 to L5 is determined as the current stop. Determine as a result. In the case of a normal jackpot result, a stop result in which a combination of the same non-specific symbol (a main symbol with an even number) is established on one activated line L1 to L5 is determined as the current stop result. . The type of the main symbol and the activated lines L1 to L5 that are stopped and displayed when the jackpot results are determined randomly by lottery or the like.

  As shown in FIG. 31A, the final stop line table stored in the various table areas 243a of the ROM 243 stores the effective lines L1 to L5 and the address information, and the final stop line determined in step S901. The line is stored as address information in a final stop line address storage area 244c provided in the RAM 244. In step S901, processing for storing information on the determined stop result in the stop result address storage area 244d is executed. In the following description, the address information of the stop result determined in the various stop result determination processes is stored in the stop result address storage area 244d of the RAM 244, so the description is used.

  As described above, the reach display is performed in the game time in which the jackpot result occurs, and the variable display time is set longer in the super reach display than in the normal reach display. Therefore, in the subsequent step S902, it is determined whether or not the variable display time is the variable display time corresponding to the normal reach display by referring to the variable display time of the game to be executed this time.

  If it is determined in step S902 that the display time is a variable display time corresponding to super reach display instead of normal reach display, after performing super reach effect pattern determination processing in step S903, the main jackpot effect setting process is performed. To end.

  In the super-reach effect pattern determination processing, the super-reach effect table stored in the various table areas 243a of the ROM 243 is acquired, and the fluctuation display time of the fluctuation command received this time and the game result in the type command are obtained. Determine the effect pattern of the corresponding super reach display. In step S903, a process of storing the address information of the determined effect pattern in the pattern address storage area 244e of the RAM 244 is executed. In the following description, in the various effect pattern determination processes, the effect table corresponding to the variable display time and the game result is obtained by acquiring the corresponding effect table from the ROM 243, and the address of the effect pattern determined in the various effect pattern determination processes. Since the information is stored in the pattern address storage area 244e of the RAM 244, the description is referred to.

  If it is the variable display time corresponding to the normal reach display in step S902, the process proceeds to step S904. In step S904, a re-rendering effect lottery process is performed to determine whether or not the re-rendering effect is to be performed. In this processing, whether to acquire the re-variation effect lottery table stored in the various table areas 243a of the ROM 243 and the re-variation effect counter provided in the various counter areas 244a of the RAM 244 and execute the re-variation effect. A lottery is performed. Then, in the subsequent step S905, it is determined whether or not the re-rendering effect lottery has been won based on the processing result of step S904. By the way, in the present embodiment, the probability of winning in the re-fluctuation effect lottery process is 70%, and more than half of the game times for which the normal reach display which is the jackpot result is selected is changed to the re-fluctuation effect. Is done.

  If it has not been won in the re-rendering effect lottery, the process advances to step S906 to execute an effect pattern determination process for normal reach. After executing the processing of step S906, the effect setting processing for the jackpot is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined that the re-rendering effect lottery has been won, the process proceeds to step S907. In step S907, a process of rewriting the information stored in the register in step S801 from the game time in which the reach has occurred to the game time in which a re-change effect is performed is executed.

  In the following step S908, a process of determining an effect pattern for a re-variation effect is executed, and in step S909, a process of determining a temporary stop line in the re-change effect is executed. In this process, it is determined which of the non-effective lines L6 to L11 is to temporarily stop the symbol combination corresponding to the stop result determined in step S901. In other words, it is determined which of the non-effective lines L6 to L11 is to be used to execute the re-change effect. In this case, the valid line as the final stop line determined in step S901 and the non-effective line as the temporary stop line determined in step S909 are determined to be parallel.

  As shown in FIG. 31B, in the re-variation table stored in the various table areas 243a of the ROM 243, the address information of the non-effective lines L6 to 11 parallel to the effective lines L1 to L5 is stored. It is remembered. In step S909, the temporary stop line is determined with reference to the address information of the last stop line stored in step S901, and the address information of the temporary stop line is stored in the temporary stop line storage area 244f of the RAM 244. In this way, by making the re-fluctuation effect an effect of moving the symbol combination stopped at the temporary stop line in parallel, a smooth effect without changing the positional relationship between the symbols constituting the symbol combination is achieved. can do.

  Note that the relationship between the temporary stop line and the final stop line does not necessarily need to be parallel, and a configuration including one that is not parallel can be adopted. In this case, in the re-fluctuation effect between the non-parallel lines, the symbols in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 do not move in parallel, and each symbol is again adjusted so as to become a symbol combination corresponding to the jackpot result in the final stop line. The columns Z1 to Z3 need to be variably displayed. Therefore, using a configuration in which each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is variably displayed, for example, after the symbol combination corresponding to the normal jackpot result temporarily stops at the non-effective line, when the symbol combination returns to the final stop line, the positive variable jackpot result is obtained. A display effect (a so-called promotion effect) in which the final stop is performed on the payline as a symbol combination corresponding to (i).

  After the processing of step S909 is performed, in step S910, a process of storing a flirt effect flag in the various flag storage areas 244b of the RAM 244 is performed, and in step S911, an open flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 244b of the RAM 244. Execute the process. The fanning effect flag is a flag for the MPU 242 to grasp that the fanning effect should be executed in the current game round. The open flag is a flag for the MPU 242 to recognize that any one of the movable auditors 170 to 173 should be controlled to open and close in the current game.

  Then, in step S912, based on the processing result of step S909, the process of storing the movable accessory to be drive-controlled in the accessory storage area 244g provided in the RAM 244 is executed, and then the effect setting for the jackpot is performed. The process ends. As shown in FIG. 31 (b), the re-variation table stores information on movable movable objects to be drive-controlled in association with the temporary stop line. In step S912, the temporary stop line stored in step S909 is stored. With reference to the address information, the information of the movable accessory to be driven is stored.

  In this way, by storing the final stop line, the temporary stop line, and the movable character to be drive-controlled in association with the re-change effect, the effect on the display screen G and the movable character 170 to 173 are displayed. Even when the effect is performed simultaneously, it is possible to suppress the complexity of the processing configuration and the increase in required storage capacity.

  Returning to the description of the fluctuation start processing (FIG. 29), if it is determined in step S802 that the result is not a jackpot result, the flow proceeds to step S803. In step S803, it is determined whether or not reach occurs in the current game round. If a reach occurs, the process advances to step S805 to execute an effect setting process for generating a reach.

  In the effect setting processing for reach generation, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 32, first, in step S1001, it is determined whether or not the reach display generated in the current game round is the normal reach display. If the display is the super reach display instead of the normal reach display, the process advances to step S1002 to execute a stop result determination process for the super reach. The processing in step S1002 is substantially the same as the processing in step S901. However, in the case of the process performed in step S1002, which corresponds to the out-of-reach, the stop symbol is determined so as not to be a symbol combination corresponding to the jackpot result. That is, the stop result in which the combination of the off-reach symbols is established on one of the activated lines L1 to L5 is determined as the current stop result. In this case, the combination type of the out-of-reach reach symbols and the effective lines L1 to L5 are randomly determined by lottery or the like. In this determination, the same symbol combination is not established on any of the activated lines L1 to L5, and the symbol in the middle symbol row Z2 that is the same as the symbol forming the reach line is set with respect to the reach line. The stop result on the active line is determined so that the final stop is performed at the stop position shifted by one line before or one line after. In step S1002, a process of storing information on the determined stop result in the stop result address storage area 244d is executed.

  In a succeeding step S1003, an effect pattern determination process for super reach is executed. In this case, similarly to step S903, by referring to the super-reach effect table stored in the various table areas 243a of the ROM 243, the super-reach display effect corresponding to the variation command and the type command received this time is displayed. Determine the content of After executing the processing of step S1003, the effect setting processing for generating reach is ended.

  Returning to the description of step S1001, if it is determined in step S1001 that the display is the normal reach display, the process proceeds to step S1004. In step S1004, it is determined whether the notice condition satisfaction flag is stored. The advance notice condition establishment flag is a flag stored in the various flag storage area 244b of the RAM 244 when the advance notice condition is established in the process for hold notice described later. If the notice condition satisfaction flag is stored, the process for holding notice of steps S1005 to S1011 is executed, and then the effect setting process for generating reach is ended. The processing for the hold notice will be described later in detail. In this processing, the stop result and the effect pattern of the hold notice in the game times of the variable display time corresponding to the normal reach display are determined.

  If it is determined in step S1004 that the notice condition satisfaction flag is not stored, the process proceeds to step S1012. In step S1012, the non-valid effect is not performed (although the result is not a jackpot result), but an invalid combination effect that stops the symbol combination corresponding to the jackpot result on the non-effective lines L6 to L11 is invalid. A matching effect lottery process is executed. In the non-effective aligned effect lottery process, the non-effective aligned effect table stored in the various table areas 243a of the ROM 243 and the values obtained from the ineffective aligned effect counters of the various counter areas 244a of the RAM 244 are referred to as invalid. It is determined whether a uniform effect is to be generated.

  In a succeeding step S1013, it is determined whether or not to generate an ineffective matching effect based on the processing result of the step S1012. In the case of generating an ineffective aligned effect, the process proceeds to step S1014, and a process of rewriting the information stored in the register in step S801 from the game time in which the reach has occurred to information as a game time for performing an ineffective aligned effect is executed. .

  After executing the rewriting process in step S1014, the process advances to step S1015 to execute a stop result determination process for ineffective alignment. In this processing, it is determined which of the non-effective lines L6 to L11 is to stop the symbol combination corresponding to the jackpot result. In this case, the symbol combination corresponding to the jackpot result to be stopped on the inactive lines L6 to L11 and the inactive lines L6 to L11 to be stopped are randomly determined by lottery or the like. As shown in FIG. 33, in the stop result table for the non-effectively aligned effect stored in the various table areas 243a of the ROM 243, the stop information in the ineffectively aligned effect is based on the stop symbol of the middle line L2 which is an effective line. Address information is stored.

  In the schematic diagram of FIG. 33, the sub-designs arranged between the main symbols in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are indicated by the numbers intermediate between the numbers attached to the left and right main symbols for convenience. Is shown. In step S1015, the information of the symbol combination and the ineffective line determined in the above processing is compared with the ineffective alignment effect table, and the symbols stopped on the effective line are stored.

  After executing the processing in step S1015, in step S1016, an effect pattern determination processing for ineffective matching is executed. Then, in step S1017, a process of storing a flirt effect flag is executed, and in step S1018, a process of storing a movable accessory to be drive-controlled in the accessory storage area 244g is executed. The effect setting process ends. As shown in FIG. 33, in the non-effective matching rendering table, movable movable objects 170 to 173 to be driven and controlled corresponding to the non-effective lines L6 to L11 for stopping the symbol combination corresponding to the jackpot result are stored. In step S1018, referring to the address information stored in step S1015, information of the movable accessory to be driven is stored.

  If it is determined in step S1013 that an ineffective uniform effect is not to be generated, the process advances to step S1019. In step S1019, the same main symbol is stopped in all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in the main display area Rm and the sub-display area Rs, but no special reservation notice is executed (movable auditors 170 to 173 are changed from the shielded state to the unshielded state). (Displacement is not performed.) A lottery is performed to determine whether or not to generate an ineffective notice effect. In the non-effective notice effect lottery process, the non-effective notice effect table stored in the various table areas 243a of the ROM 243 and the value obtained from the non-effective notice effect counter from the various counter areas 244a of the RAM 244 are referred to. It is determined whether or not an effective notice effect is to be generated.

  In a succeeding step S1020, it is determined whether or not to generate an ineffective notice effect based on the processing result of the step S1019. If the ineffective notice effect is not to be generated, the process advances to step S1021 to execute a stop result determination process for normal reach. The processing in step S1021 is substantially the same as the processing in step S1002. However, in the super reach, the symbol of the middle symbol row Z2, which is the same as the symbol forming the reach line, is finally stopped at the stop position shifted left or right by one line with respect to the reach line, whereas in the normal reach display, this shift is performed. Is not limited to one line, and the stop result of the middle symbol row Z2 is determined according to the variable display time determined by the main control device 81. In this case, the valid lines L1 to L5 are randomly determined by lottery or the like. In this determination, a stop result in which the same symbol combination is not established on any of the activated lines L1 to L5 is determined. After executing the processing of step S1021, in step S1022, the effect pattern determination processing for normal reach is executed, and then the effect setting processing for main reach generation ends. The stop result of the middle symbol row Z2 may be randomly determined by lottery as long as the symbol combination does not correspond to the jackpot result.

  If it is determined in step S1020 that an ineffective notice effect is to be generated, the process for ineffective notice effect is executed in steps S1023 to S1028, and then the reach setting effect generation process ends. The processing for the ineffective notice effect will be described in detail later. In this process, the stop result and the effect pattern of the ineffective notice effect in the game times of the variable display time corresponding to the normal reach display are determined.

  Returning to the description of the fluctuation start process (FIG. 29), if it is determined in step S804 that no reach has occurred, the process proceeds to step S806. In step S806, it is determined whether the notice condition satisfaction flag is stored. If the notice condition fulfillment flag is stored, the effect setting process for hold notice is executed in step S807, and if the notice condition fulfillment flag is not stored, the effect setting process for normal departure is performed in step S808. Execute Here, the effect setting process for the normal departure will be described, and the effect setting process for the suspension notice will be described later in detail. In addition, in the effect setting process for the hold notice in step S807, the stop result and the effect pattern for the hold notice in the game times of the variable display time when no reach occurs are determined.

  In the effect setting process for a normal departure, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 34, first, in step S1101, an ineffective matching effect lottery process is executed. This process is substantially the same as the process in step S1011. However, the winning probabilities are different between the non-effectively aligned effect lottery in the game time of the variable display time when the reach is generated in step S1011 and the ineffectively aligned effect lottery in the game time of the variable display time when the reach is not generated in step S1101. In step S1011, there is a higher probability of winning an ineffectively aligned effect than in step S1101. More specifically, in step S1011 an ineffectively aligned effect is generated with a probability of 10%, and in step S1101, an ineffectively aligned effect is generated with a probability of 1%.

  In a succeeding step S1102, it is determined whether or not to generate an ineffective matching effect based on the processing result of the step S1101. In the case where an ineffective matching effect is to be generated, the process proceeds to step S1103, and a stop result determination process for ineffective matching is executed. This processing is the same as the processing in step S1015. After executing the process of step S1103, in step S1105, the effect pattern determination process for ineffective matching is executed, and then the effect setting process for non-normal deviation ends. That is, since the fluctuating display time is shorter than the fluctuating display time at the time of the occurrence of the reach, in the effect setting process for the normal departure, even when performing an ineffectively aligned effect, the fanning effect flag is not stored. Not set).

  If it is determined in step S1102 that an ineffective matching effect is not to be generated, the process proceeds to step S1105. In step S1105, a non-effective notice effect lottery process is executed. This processing is substantially the same as the processing in step S1019. However, the winning probability is different between the non-effective notice effect drawing lottery in the game time of the variable display time when the reach occurs in step S1019 and the ineffective notice effect drawing lottery in the game time of the variable display time when the reach does not occur in step S1105. In step S1019, the probability of winning an ineffective announcement effect is higher than in step S1105. More specifically, an ineffective notice effect is generated with a probability of 15% in step S1019, and an ineffective notice effect is generated with a probability of 3% in step S1105.

  In the following step S1106, it is determined whether or not to generate an ineffective notice effect based on the processing result of step S1105. If the ineffective notice effect is not to be generated, the process advances to step S1107 to execute a stop result determination process for non-reach occurrence. In this processing, the symbol combination corresponding to the jackpot result is not stopped on any of the activated lines L1 to L5, the combination of the out-of-reach symbols is not stopped, and further, on any of the non-activated lines L6 to L11. Do not stop the symbol combination corresponding to the jackpot result, and do not stop the same main symbol in all the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 in the main display area Rm and the sub-display area Rs (so as not to have a stop result corresponding to the holding notice). 2), the result of this stop is determined. After that, in step S1108, the effect pattern determination process for non-reach occurrence is executed, and then the effect setting process for non-normal operation ends.

  If it is determined in step S1106 that an ineffective notice effect is to be generated, the process for ineffective notice effect is executed in steps S1109 to S1111, and the effect setting process for out-of-normal operation ends. I do. The process for the ineffective notice effect will be described later in detail. In this process, the stop result and the effect pattern of the ineffective notice effect in the game time of the variable display time when no reach occurs are determined.

  Returning to the description of the fluctuation start processing (FIG. 29), after executing any one of the steps S803, S805, S807, and S808, the process proceeds to step S809. In step S809, a process of outputting the command including the stop result and the effect pattern information determined in step S803, step S805, step S807, or step S808 to the display control device 212 as a stop result command and a pattern command, respectively, is executed. . The MPU 252 of the display control device 212 performs display control on the symbol display device 161 to execute an effect in the current game round based on the received stop result command and pattern command.

  After the process of step S809 is performed, in a succeeding step S810, a process of starting an effect for the game round is performed, and then the process of starting the change is ended. Specifically, based on the effect pattern determined in step S803, step S805, step S807, or step S808, the drive control of the speaker unit 59 and the light emitting unit 58 is started, and the effect for game play is started.

<Process during fluctuation>
Next, the processing during fluctuation in step S705 in the fluctuation display control processing (FIG. 28) will be described. The during-variation process is a process of executing or changing various effects in the game times started by the variation start process.

  As shown in the flowchart of FIG. 35, in the processing during change, first, in step S1201, it is determined whether or not a stir effect flag is stored in the various flag storage area of the RAM 244 in 244b. If the fanning effect flag is stored, it is determined in the following step S1202 whether it is time to start the fanning effect.

  Here, the MPU 242 measures the time from the start of the variable display of the symbol on the symbol display device 161 using the progress counter provided in the various counter areas 244a of the RAM 244. Specifically, when the variable display is started, the update (addition) of the progress counter is performed at a predetermined cycle (for example, 2 msec). Further, in the progress table provided in the various table areas 243a of the ROM 243, information of each counter value corresponding to the timing at which the flirting effect is to be started is one-to-one with information of the effect pattern which can be set at the start of the game round. Are stored in a state where they are associated with each other. Then, in step S1202, it is determined whether or not the value stored in the current progress counter is a counter value corresponding to the timing at which the fanning effect should be started in the progress table of the current game times.

  Note that the processing (steps S1205, S1209, S1212, and the like, which will be described later) for determining whether or not it is the execution timing of another effect in the game time also determines the execution timing by referring to the progress table and the progress counter. Figure out.

  If it is determined in step S1202 that it is the start timing of the fanning effect, the fanning effect is started in step S1203. In this processing, based on the information of the movable movable objects 170 to 173 to be driven stored in the accessory storage area 244 g of the RAM 244, the drive units 170 a to 173 a of the corresponding movable auditors 170 to 173 are drive-controlled. A process for vibrating (moving up and down) movable movable objects 170 to 173 is executed. Further, in step S1204, a fanning effect start command is output to the display control device 212. The MPU 252 of the display control device 212 executes display control for causing the symbol display device 161 to perform the display for the fluttering effect based on the received fluttering effect start command. As the tilting effect on the display screen G, an effect such as an effect is set on the display screen G around the vibrating movable object, for example.

  If it is not the timing to execute the flirting effect in step S1202, or after executing the processing in step S1204, the process proceeds to step S1205. In step S1205, it is determined whether or not it is time to end the flirting effect. If it is the time to end the fanning effect in step S1205, the fanning effect is ended in subsequent step S1206. In this process, a process for stopping the movable movable object being vibrated is executed. In step S1207, a fanning effect end command is output to the display control device 212. The MPU 252 of the display control device 212 executes control for terminating the fanning effect being executed on the display screen G on the symbol display device 161 based on the received fanning effect end command.

  If the fanning effect flag is not stored in step S1201, if it is not the end timing of the fanning effect in step S1205, or after executing the processing of step S1207, the process proceeds to step S1208. In step S1208, it is determined whether an open flag is stored in the various flag storage area 244b of the RAM 244. As described above, the release flag is a flag stored in the various flag storage area 244b of the RAM 244 in the above-described step S911 when the fluctuation effect is executed.

  If the release flag is stored, it is determined in step S1209 whether or not it is time to release the movable auditors 170 to 173. If it is determined that it is the opening timing of the movable auditors 170 to 173, the corresponding movable auditors 170 to 173 are opened in step S1210. In this processing, based on the information of the movable movable objects 170 to 173 to be driven stored in the accessory storage area 244 g of the RAM 244, the drive units 170 a to 173 a of the corresponding movable auditors 170 to 173 are drive-controlled. Then, a process of moving the movable auditors 170 to 173 to the non-shielding position is executed. In step S1211, an open command is output to the display control device 212. The MPU 252 of the display control device 212 executes the display control of the opening effect (re-change effect or special reservation notice effect) on the symbol display device 161 based on the received opening command. In addition, in the display control device 212, if the current opening effect is the re-fluctuation effect, the symbol combination corresponding to the jackpot result stopped on the temporary stop line as described above is moved to the final stop line. The display device 161 is controlled.

  In step S1209, when it is not the opening timing of the movable auditors 170 to 173, or after executing the processing of step S1211, the process proceeds to step S1212. In step S1212, it is determined whether or not it is time to close the movable auditors 170 to 173. If it is the closing timing, in step S1213, the corresponding closing process of the movable auditors 170 to 173 is executed. In this processing, based on the information of the movable movable objects 170 to 173 to be driven stored in the accessory storage area 244 g of the RAM 244, the drive units 170 a to 173 a of the corresponding movable auditors 170 to 173 are drive-controlled. Then, a process of moving the movable auditors 170 to 173 to the shielding position is executed. In step S1214, a close command is output to the display control device 212. The MPU 252 of the display control device 212 executes a process of terminating the opening effect (return effect or special reservation notice effect) on the symbol display device 161 based on the received closing command.

  If the open flag is not stored in step S1208, if it is not the shutter member closing timing in step S1208, or after the processing of step S1214 is performed, the process proceeds to step S1215. Steps S1215 and S1216 are processes for a preliminary notice and will be described later in detail.

<Process for fluctuation end>
Next, a description will be given of the change termination processing in step S706 in the change display control processing (FIG. 28). The change ending process is a process of ending a predetermined effect in the game times started by the change start process.

  In the variation end processing, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 36, in step S1301, a fixed stop processing for executing the game effect at a fixed stop corresponding to the current game result is executed. In such a process, the speaker unit 59 and the light emitting unit 58 are drive-controlled to produce an effect corresponding to the fixed stop. Then, in step S1302, the determination command is output to the display control device 212, and then the process for ending the change is ended. The MPU 252 of the display control device 212 controls the symbol display device 161 to stop the symbol fixing based on the received fixing command.

  As described above, the fluctuation display at each game time is performed based on the fluctuation command output from the main control device 81 to the effect control device 82 so that the final display finally corresponds to the game result. You. Then, the re-fluctuation effect occurs with a predetermined probability when the game result is any of the jackpot results. Further, even if the game result is a departure result, an effect as if a re-fluctuation effect occurs with a predetermined probability, that is, an ineffective uniform effect occurs. In this case, not only the symbol combination corresponding to the jackpot result on the non-effective line on the display screen G is stopped, but also the effect of the non-effective uniform effect is enhanced by interlocking with the movable role that blocks the non-effective line. ing.

  Specifically, when an ineffective matching effect occurs, the movable character that is blocking the inactive line where the symbol combination corresponding to the jackpot result has stopped becomes as if it is almost unshielded and re-fluctuations A stir effect can occur as an effect as if an effect were to occur. Therefore, the player expects the occurrence of the re-fluctuation effect, that is, the game result to be a jackpot result, by the occurrence of the fanning effect. In addition, one of the conditions for the occurrence of the re-fluctuation effect is that the corresponding movable auditorium moves from the shielding position to the non-shielding position. Therefore, as for the player, when the non-effectively aligned effect occurs, it is expected that the corresponding movable auditorium will eventually move from the shielding position to the non-shielding position.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect of the design on the display screen G and the effect of the operation of the movable auditors 170 to 173 are organically linked to each other, so that a more dynamic effect is provided. The degree has been improved.

<Explanation of processing related to suspension notice>
Next, processing related to the suspension notice will be described.

<Process performed by main controller 81>
As the processing related to the suspension notice, processing executed by the MPU 202 of the main control device 81 and processing executed by the effect control device 82 are set. Therefore, the processing on the main control device 81 will be described first, and then the processing on the effect control device 82 will be described.

<Confirmation process for suspension notice>
First, the confirmation process for the suspension notice executed by the MPU 202 of the main controller 81 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. As described above, the confirmation processing for the suspension notice is the processing executed in step S205 of the winning processing for the operating port (FIG. 16) of the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 15).

  In the confirmation process for suspension notice, in step S1401, information on the suspension number stored in the suspension number storage area NA in the suspension area RE is read, and the information on the suspension number is stored in a register of the MPU 202. In the following step S1402, the information for the jackpot determination in the hold information acquired in step S204 of the winning process for the operating port (FIG. 16) based on the current winning in the operating port 115, that is, latched from the jackpot random number counter C1. Understand information.

  In the following step S1403, it is determined whether or not the high probability mode flag is stored in the RAM 204, thereby determining whether or not the current winning / failure lottery mode is the low probability mode. In the case of the low probability mode, in step S1404, the information for the jackpot determination grasped in step S1402 is set as the jackpot winning with reference to the low probability mode winning / failing table shown in FIG. Specified in the information. When the mode is the high probability mode, the information for the jackpot determination grasped in the step S1402 is referred to as the jackpot determination in step S1405 by referring to the winning / non-permission table for the high probability mode shown in FIG. Specify whether it is included in the set information.

  After step S1404 or step S1405, in step S1406, it is determined whether the information for jackpot determination grasped in step S1402 corresponds to the jackpot winning. If it is determined that it corresponds to the jackpot winning, in step S1407, the information for the type determination of the hold information acquired in step S1404 based on the current prize in the operating port 115, that is, the jackpot type counter C2 From the information latched from.

  In the following step S1408, referring to the distribution table shown in FIG. 14B, the information for jackpot type determination grasped in step S1407 is information set as a normal jackpot result or information set as a probable change jackpot result. Identify which is included. Then, in step S1409, it is determined whether the information for the jackpot type grasped in step S1407 corresponds to the normal jackpot result. If it corresponds to the normal jackpot result, the normal jackpot information is stored in the register of the MPU 202 in step S1410, and if it corresponds to the jackpot result, in step S1411, the register is changed to the register of the MPU 202. Store jackpot information.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1406, the process in step S1410 is performed, or the process in step S1411 is performed, the process advances to step S1412. In step S1412, based on the current prize in the operating port 115, the information for judging out-of-reach among the hold information acquired in step S1404, that is, the information latched from the reach random number counter C3 is grasped.

  In the following step S1413, the reach determined in step S1412 is referred to by referring to the reach determination table (reach determination information group) stored in the reach determination table storage area (reach determination information group storage means) of the ROM 203. Specify whether the information for determination is included in the information set as the reach winning. Thereafter, in step S1414, it is determined whether the reach determination information grasped in step S1412 corresponds to the occurrence of reach. If it corresponds to the occurrence of the reach, in step S1415, after the reach occurrence information is stored in the register of the MPU 202, the present confirmation processing ends. If it does not correspond to the occurrence of the reach, the present confirmation processing ends.

  Next, a description will be given, with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 38, of the processing for setting the hold command in step S206 in the winning processing for the operating port (FIG. 16).

  In the hold command setting process, in step S1501, it is determined whether or not either the normal jackpot information or the probable change jackpot information is stored in the register of the MPU 202, thereby confirming the immediately preceding hold notice (FIG. 37). ), It is determined whether or not the information for jackpot determination corresponds to jackpot winning. If either the normal jackpot information or the probable variable jackpot information is stored, in step S1502, it is determined whether or not the information is the probable variable jackpot information, thereby confirming the immediately preceding suspension notice (see FIG. In 37), it is determined whether or not the information for type determination has been identified as corresponding to the probability change jackpot result.

  If the jackpot information is positive jackpot information, a probable change corresponding suspension command is set in step S1503, and if it is normal jackpot information, a normal corresponding hold command is set in step S1504. The setting of the above commands and the setting of various commands to be described later are performed by storing command information in a command setting area provided in the RAM 204.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1501 that both the normal jackpot information and the probable variable jackpot information are not stored, the process proceeds to step S1505, and it is determined whether the reach occurrence information is stored in the register of the MPU 202. In this way, it is determined whether or not the information for reach determination has been specified to correspond to the occurrence of reach in the immediately preceding confirmation processing for reservation notice (FIG. 37). If the reach occurrence information is stored, a departure reach correspondence suspension command is set in step S1506, and if the reach occurrence information is not stored, a complete departure correspondence suspension command is set in step S1507. I do.

  After executing any one of steps S1503, S1504, S1506, and S1507, in step S1508, a process of setting information on the number of held items for the held command is executed. Specifically, the information of the set pending command is configured as a plurality of bytes of information, and for some of the bits, information indicating that the command is a pending command, , And information on the number of items to be suspended can be set. In this case, in step S1508, first, the information on the number of holds stored in the register of the MPU 202 in step S1501 in the immediately preceding hold notice confirmation processing (FIG. 37) is read out, and then the hold command already set The information on the number of reserved items read out is stored in the bits for information on the number of reserved items in the above by arithmetic processing such as logical OR. With this, for the hold command set in any of the processes of step S1503, step S1504, step S1506, or step S1507, the number of the hold information corresponding to the hold command is specified. Information is included.

  After executing the processing in step S1508, the present setting processing ends. The hold command including the information on the number of holds in step S1508 is transmitted to the effect control device 82 by the external output process of step S301 in the next normal process (FIG. 17). The effect control device 82 receives the hold command and specifies that the hold information has increased.

  The setting method of the hold command is to specify whether or not a jackpot is won by the hold command in the effect control device 82, the type of the jackpot at the time of the jackpot win, and the presence or absence of the reach if the jackpot is not won. Is optional as long as it is possible. For example, a combination of a probable-change-response pending command, a normal-response pending command, an out-of-reach-response pending command, and a completely-delay-responding pending command are individually set for each pending number. May be configured to select one pending command in accordance with the result of the confirmation in the confirmation process (FIG. 37).

<Regarding the on-hold notice control process executed by the effect control device 82>
Next, the suspension notice control process executed by the MPU 202 of the effect control device 82 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The suspension notice control process is a part of a plurality of types of processes repeatedly executed by the MPU 252, and is activated at a predetermined cycle (for example, a 2 msec cycle).

  First, in step S1601, it is determined whether any pending command has been received from main controller 81. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1601, in step S1602, a suspension notice setting process is executed as a process corresponding to the received suspension command.

  In the following step S1603, the effect-side reserved storage number SN stored in the various counter areas 244a of the RAM 244 is incremented by one. In step S1603, a process corresponding to the increase in the number of storages to be suspended (for example, a process of changing the display when the suspension information is displayed on the display screen G) is executed. Further, in step S1603, a process of storing the hold information of the received hold command in the RAM 244 is executed. The RAM 244 is provided with a holding area 244h as an area for storing the holding information. The holding area 244h is associated with the holding ball storage area 232 of the main control device 81, and has a first unit area to a fourth unit area. An area is provided. In step S1603, a process of storing the hold information in the corresponding area is executed.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1601 or after execution of step S1603, the flow advances to step S1604 to determine whether a shift command has been received. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1604, the production-side reserved storage number SN is decremented by one in step S1605. In step S1605, a process corresponding to the decrease in the number of held storages (for example, a process of changing the display when the held information is displayed on the display screen G) is executed. In step S1605, a shift process is performed. In this shift processing, the hold information set in the unit area of the hold area 244h is sequentially shifted to the lower area side. Specifically, while the hold information of the first unit area is cleared, each of the second unit area → the first unit area, the third unit area → the second unit area, the fourth unit area → the third unit area, etc. The hold display information in the unit area is shifted.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1604, or after the processing in step S1605 has been performed, the suspension notice control processing ends. Here, the suspension notice setting processing in step S1602 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

  In the suspension notice setting process, first, in step S1701, it is determined whether or not the production-side reserved storage number SN is “1” or more. If the production-side reserved storage number SN is “0”, it is determined in the following step S1702 whether or not the game is currently being executed. At step S1701, the number of production-side reserved storages SN is equal to or greater than "1", and when there is pending information that has not started a game round at the time of receiving the current pending command, or at the production side at step S1702 Even if the number of held storages SN is “0”, if the game is currently being executed, the process proceeds to step S1703.

  In step S1703, it is determined whether or not a winning flag is stored in the various flag storage area 244b of the RAM 244. The winning flag is a flag stored in step S1706 to be described later when a probable-change corresponding suspension command or a normal response suspension command is received, and is executed before the game time corresponding to the suspension command received this time. This flag is used by the MPU 202 to specify that one of the jackpot results occurs in the game round.

  If it is determined that the winning flag is not stored, the process proceeds to step S1704, and it is determined whether or not a notice condition satisfaction flag is stored in the various flag storage area 244b of the RAM 244. The notice condition establishment flag is a flag stored when the notice condition is satisfied as described above. More specifically, the notice condition establishment flag is set in a jackpot notice setting process (step S1707) or a miss notice setting process (step S1708) described later. This is the flag to be stored.

  If it is determined that the advance notice condition satisfaction flag is not stored, in step S1705, it is determined whether the currently received suspension command is a probable-change correspondence suspension command or a normal correspondence suspension command. If the command is a hold command corresponding to these jackpot results, a process of storing the winning flag is executed in the following step S1706, and then a jackpot announcement setting process is executed in step S1707. If the received hold command is not the hold command corresponding to the jackpot result in step S1705, that is, if the hold command is a hold-reach-compatible hold command or a complete-miss-hold-hold command, the release notice is provided in step S1708. Execute the setting process.

  If it is determined in step S1702 that the game round is not being executed, if it is determined that the winning flag is stored in step S1703, if it is determined that the notice condition satisfaction flag is stored in step S1704, Alternatively, after executing any one of the steps S1707 and S1708, the suspension notice setting processing ends.

  Here, the jackpot announcement setting process of step S1707 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In the jackpot announcement setting process, first, in step S1801, a hold announcement lottery process for a jackpot is executed. In this processing, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to execute the hold notice in the hold information corresponding to the hold command received this time. Specifically, it is determined whether or not to execute the hold notice by referring to the value of the hold notice lottery counter obtained from the various counter areas 244a of the RAM 244 and the jackpot hold notice lottery table stored in the various table areas 243a of the ROM 243. Perform a lottery. In the hold announcement lottery table for the jackpot according to the present embodiment, the probability of winning the hold announcement lottery is set to 75%, and more than half of the hold information corresponding to the jackpot result is won in the hold announcement lottery. Is set.

  In a succeeding step S1802, it is determined based on the processing result of the step S1801 whether or not the hold preliminary lottery is won. If the holding preliminary lottery has not been won, the big hitting preliminary setting process ends. If the holding notice lottery has been won, the process advances to step S1803.

  In step S1803, it is determined whether the suspension command received this time is a normal correspondence suspension command. If it is the normal response suspension command, in step S1804, a process of grasping a notice symbol corresponding to the normal jackpot result is executed. The notice symbol indicates a common symbol that is stopped and displayed at a predetermined position when all the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 are stopped and displayed in the reserved notice. In this processing, a non-specific symbol (even number symbol) is grasped as a symbol for a notice as a symbol for a notice corresponding to a normal jackpot result. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1803 that the received command is not the normal response suspension command but the probability variation response suspension command, in step S1805, a process of grasping a notice symbol corresponding to the probability variation jackpot result is executed. In this processing, a specific symbol (a main symbol with an odd number) is grasped as a symbol for a notification as a symbol for a notification corresponding to the probability change jackpot result.

  After executing the processing of step S1804 or S1805, the process proceeds to step S1806. In step S1806, a process is executed of storing the notice symbol grasped in step S1804 or step S1805 in the notice symbol storage area 244i of the RAM 244. Then, in step S1807, a process of storing a notice condition satisfaction flag in the RAM 244 is executed, and then the big jackpot notice setting process ends.

  Next, with reference to the flow chart of FIG. 42, a description will be given of the advance notice setting processing of step S1708 of the hold notice setting processing (FIG. 40).

  In the release notice setting process, first, in step S1901, it is determined whether the hold command received this time is a release reach correspondence hold command. If the command received this time is not a release reach correspondence hold command but a complete release correspondence hold command, the release notice setting process ends as it is.

  If it is determined in step S1901 that the command is a hold reach correspondence hold command, in step S1902, a hold advance announcement lottery process for the hold is executed. In this processing, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to execute the hold notice in the hold information corresponding to the hold command received this time. Specifically, with reference to the value of the hold notice lottery counter acquired from the various counter areas 244a of the RAM 244 and the hold notice lottery table for departure from the various table areas 243a of the ROM 243, whether to execute the hold notice is determined. Perform a lottery. In the off-hold announcement lottery table of the present embodiment, the probability of winning the on-hold announcement lottery is set to 10%, which is set lower than the jackpot announcement lottery process.

  In a succeeding step S1903, it is determined whether or not the holding notice lottery is won based on the processing result of the step S1902. If it is determined that the holding notice lottery has not been won, the final notice setting processing ends. If it is determined that the reservation announcement lottery has been won, the process advances to step S1904.

  In step S1904, a process of determining a symbol for notice corresponding to the out-of-reach is executed. In this processing, a symbol that forms a reach line when the reach display is executed in the game information of the hold information that has triggered the hold command is specified based on the received reach correspondence support hold command. If the symbol forming the reach line is a specific symbol, a symbol for a notice corresponding to the off-reach is determined as the specific symbol, and if the symbol forming the reach line is a non-specific symbol, the symbol for the notice corresponding to the off-reach is determined. The symbol is determined as a non-specific symbol.

  In step S1905, a process of storing a notice symbol based on the processing result of step S1904 in a corresponding unit area of the holding area 244h is executed. In step S1906, a notice condition satisfaction flag is stored in the RAM 244. The miss notice setting process ends.

  That is, in the jackpot announcement setting process (step S1707) or the departure announcement setting process (step S1708) of the suspension announcement setting process, it is determined whether to perform the suspension announcement based on the received suspension command, and the suspension announcement is performed. In this case, a notice condition satisfaction flag is stored in the RAM 244. By storing the notice condition satisfaction flag, the effect of the suspension notice is set in the variable display control process (FIG. 28) in the game times executed before the game time targeted for the suspension notice. You.

  As described above, as the production for the reservation notice, the normal reservation notice as the reservation notice using only the main display area Rm and the special reservation notice as the reservation notice using both the main display area Rm and the sub-display area Rs are provided. Is set. In the special reservation notice, a special reservation notice with a fanning effect (hereinafter, also referred to as a first special reservation notice) and a special reservation notice without a fanning effect (hereinafter, also referred to as a second special reservation notice) are set. I have. The first and second special reservation notices are set based on a difference in the variable display time of the game times. Specifically, when the fluctuation display time for reach non-occurrence is set as the fluctuation display time of the game times, the first special suspension notice without the flirting effect is executed, and Also, when a long fluctuation display time at the time of occurrence of a reach (when a normal reach occurs) is set, a second special suspension notice accompanied by a stir effect is executed. In the first special reservation advance notice, the movable movable objects 170 to 173 move to the non-shielding position during the standby time after the variable display of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 is completed. In the second special reservation notice, after the variable display of each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 is completed, the corresponding movable auditors 170 to 173 move to the non-shielding position after the flirting effect is performed.

  As described above, in order to determine which special reservation notice is to be executed based on the difference in the variable display time, the first special reservation notice that does not accompany the stir-up effect is reached in the fluctuation start processing (FIG. 29) of the fluctuation display control processing. The non-occurrence (step S804: NO) effect setting process for holding advance notice (step S807) is set in the effect setting process for holding advance notice, and the second special holding advance notice accompanied by a fluttering effect is effect setting process for reach occurrence (step S805, FIG. 29, 32). Here, the setting of the first special reservation notice will be described first, and then the setting of the second special reservation notice will be described.

  In the effect setting process for the reservation notice, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 43, a special reservation notice production lottery process is executed in step S2001. In this processing, the special reservation notice is referred by referring to the value of the special reservation notice lottery counter acquired from the various counter areas 244a of the RAM 244 and the special reservation notice lottery table stored in the various table areas 243a of the ROM 243. Is determined. In the lottery table for special hold notice, a lottery table for a jackpot result and a lottery table for a missed result are set, and a corresponding lottery table is acquired based on the hold information targeted for the hold notice. Then, using the lottery table and the lottery counter, it is determined whether to execute the special reservation notice (first special reservation notice) or the normal reservation notice.

  In addition, the probability of becoming a special reservation notice is set higher in the jackpot result lottery table than in the off-going result lottery table. In the present embodiment, 70% of the jackpot result lottery table is held specially. It is set as a notice, and 10% is set as a special reservation notice in the lottery table for the off-result.

  In a succeeding step S2002, it is determined whether or not to execute the special reservation notice effect based on the processing result of the step S2001. In the case of executing the normal hold advance announcement effect instead of the special hold advance effect, in a subsequent step S2003, a stop result determination process for the normal hold advance announcement is executed. In this stop result setting process, it is determined whether the information of the notice symbol stored in step S1806 or step S1905 is a non-specific symbol or a specific symbol, and which symbol is determined based on the determined information. It is determined whether to stop at all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. Then, a stop result table for the normal holding notice corresponding to the determined symbol is read from the ROM 243, and a symbol combination to be stopped at the activated lines L1 to L5 in the normal holding notice is determined.

  Here, the stop result table for the normal suspension notice will be described with reference to FIG. Note that FIG. 44 (a) illustrates a stop result table in the middle line L2 when the number added to the notice-corresponding symbol is “7”. Further, in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the sub-designs arranged between the main symbols are conveniently shown using numbers in the middle of the numbers attached to the left and right main symbols. As a specific example of the stop result, the stop result of the address information D (1) is shown in a simplified manner.

  In the stop result table for the normal suspension notice, a plurality of stop results for stopping the same main symbol in all the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 in the main display region Rm are set according to the symbol combination to be stopped on the activated lines L1 to L5. The information on the result of the stop is stored as address information. In this case, the same main symbol does not stop at any of the activated lines L1 to L5, and the same main symbol is present at the upper symbol column Z1 and the lower symbol column Z3 at any of the activated lines L1 to L5. Is set so that a reach line is not formed. For example, when the address information D (1) is selected and the notice-corresponding symbol (7) is stopped at the upper stage of the middle line L2 and the middle stage and lower stage of the right line L3, "7" is displayed on the middle line L2 from above. Are set in the order of a main symbol with "", a sub symbol between "6" and "7", and a sub symbol between "6" and "7".

  As the types of the stop results of the normal reservation notice, all the types (3 × 3 × 3 = 27) in which the same main symbol is stopped in all the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 in the main display region Rm are selected from the effective lines L1 to L5. The number excludes the symbol combination (5) corresponding to the jackpot result in which the same main symbols stop together and the symbol combination (5 lines × 2 types) that is out of reach. −5-10 = 12 types.

  Returning to the description of the effect setting process for the hold announcement (FIG. 43), in the stop result determination process of step S2003, the stop result of 1 is determined from the above-described stop result table for the normal hold announcement, and the address information is stored in the RAM 244. The result is stored in the result address storage area 244d. Then, in the subsequent step S2004, an effect pattern determination process for a normal suspension notice is executed. The stop result determined in step S2003 and the effect pattern determined in step S2004 are output to the display control device 212 as a stop result command and a pattern command in step S809 of the variation start processing (FIG. 29). . Then, the MPU 252 of the display control device 212 controls the display of the symbol display device 161 so as to execute an effect corresponding to the normal suspension notice. As a result, when the variable display of the symbols is stopped, the symbols corresponding to the information of the symbols for the notice in all the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 are stopped and displayed at the predetermined display positions in the display screen G.

  If the special reservation notice is to be executed in step S2002, the process proceeds to step S2005. In step S2005, a stop result setting process for a special suspension notice is executed. In this stop result setting process, it is determined whether the information of the notice symbol stored in step S1806 or step S1905 is a non-specific symbol or a specific symbol, and which symbol is determined based on the determined information. Decide whether to use a notice-compatible design. Then, a stop result table for the special reservation notice corresponding to the decided notice corresponding symbol is read from the ROM 243, and a symbol combination to be stopped at the activated lines L1 to L5 in the special reservation notice is determined.

  Here, the stop result table for special reservation notice will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 44B illustrates a stop result table in the middle line L2 when the number assigned to the notice-corresponding symbol is “7”. Further, in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the sub-designs arranged between the main symbols are conveniently shown using numbers in the middle of the numbers attached to the left and right main symbols. As a specific example of the stop symbol, the stop result of the address information E (3) is shown in a simplified manner.

  In the stop result table for the special reservation notice, the stop result in which the same main symbol is stopped in all the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 in the main display region Rm and the sub display region Rs according to the symbol combination to be stopped in the activated lines L1 to L5. Are set, and information on the result of the stop is stored as address information. In this case, the same main symbol does not stop at all of the activated lines L1 to L5 and the non-activated lines L6 to 11, and the upper symbol column Z1 and the lower symbol column are also arranged at any of the activated lines L1 to L5. The Z3 is set so that a reach line is not formed by the same main symbol. For example, when the address information E (3) is selected and the notice-corresponding symbol (7) is stopped at the upper stage of the middle line L2, the middle stage of the right ineffective line L6, and the lower stage of the left line L1, the middle line L2 is displayed. From the top, a symbol combination to be stopped is set in the order of the main symbol with “7”, the main symbol with “6”, and the sub symbol between “7” and “8”.

  As the types of the suspension results of the special reservation notice, all types (5 × 5 × 5 = 125) in which the same main symbol is stopped in all symbol columns Z1 to Z3 in the main display region Rm and the sub display region Rs, A symbol combination (5) corresponding to the jackpot result in which the same main symbols stop together in the activated lines L1 to L5, and a non-effective aligned symbol combination in which the same main symbols stop together in the inactivated lines L6 to L11 ( 6), the symbol combination that is out of reach (5 lines × 4 types), and the symbol combination (12) of the above-mentioned normal reservation notice are excluded, and specifically, 125-5-6. −20−12 = 82 types.

  In the special suspension notice, since the suspension notice is performed using the symbols stopped in the sub display area Rs in addition to the symbols stopped in the main display area Rm, the types of the stop results are increased as compared with the normal suspension notice. I have. Therefore, the number of appearances in the suspension notice becomes diversified, and diversification of the effect is realized.

  Returning to the description of the effect setting processing for the reservation notice (FIG. 43), in the stop result determination processing of step S2005, one stop result is determined from the stop result table for the special reservation notice, and the address information is stored in the RAM 244. The result is stored in the result address storage area 244d. Then, in a succeeding step S2006, an effect pattern determination process for special reservation notice is executed.

  The stop result determined in step S2005 and the effect pattern determined in step S2006 are output to the display control device 212 as a pattern command and a stop result command in step S809 of the change start processing (FIG. 29). Then, the MPU 252 of the display control device 212 controls the display of the symbol display device 161 so as to execute an effect corresponding to the special reservation notice. Thereby, when the variable display of the symbol is stopped, the symbol corresponding to the information of the symbol for the notice is stopped and displayed at the predetermined display position in the display screen G in all the symbol columns Z1 to Z3.

  After executing the processing of step S2006, the processing of storing an open flag in the RAM 244 is executed in step S2007. Then, in step S2008, based on the processing result of step S2005, a process of storing a movable accessory to be drive-controlled in the accessory storage area 244g is executed. The information on the movable object to be driven and controlled is stored in a stop result table for special reservation notice. For example, when the stop result of the address information E (3) is selected in step S2005, it is stored that the first movable auditors 170 and the second movable auditors 171 should be drive-controlled. In this way, an affirmative determination is made in step S1208 in the during-change process (FIG. 35), and the opening / closing control of the corresponding movable auditorium (steps S1209 to S1214) and the display effect on the symbol display device 161 are performed.

  After executing the processing of step S2004 or step S2008, the processing of storing the notice execution flag in the RAM 244 is executed in step S2009, and then the effect setting processing for the hold notice is ended. The notice execution flag is a flag for the MPU 242 to recognize that the notice condition is satisfied and the game is to execute any of the reservation notices.

  Next, a description will be given of a process related to the setting of the second special reservation notice accompanied by the fanning effect. This processing is performed in the effect setting processing for reach generation (FIG. 32) in the fluctuation start processing.

  Referring again to FIG. 32, the game time to be started is the game time corresponding to the occurrence of the reach, and the reach mode is the normal reach display (step S1001: YES), and the notice condition satisfaction flag is set. Is stored (step S1004: YES), the process proceeds to step S1005. In step S1005, a process of rewriting the information stored in the register in step S801 in the change start process (FIG. 29) from the game occurrence of the reach to the game time for performing the special reservation notice is executed.

  In the following step S1006, a stop result determination process for special notice is executed, and in step S1007, an effect pattern determination process for special reservation notice is executed. These processes are the same as the processes in steps S2005 and S2006. Then, the stop result determined in step S1006 and the effect pattern determined in step S1007 are output to the display control device 212 as a pattern command and a stop result command in step S809 of the variation start processing (FIG. 29). You. The MPU 252 of the display control device 212 performs display control on the symbol display device 161 so as to execute an effect corresponding to the special reservation notice. Thus, when the variable display of the symbol is stopped, the symbol corresponding to the information of the symbol for the notice is stopped and displayed at a predetermined display position on the display screen G in all the symbol columns Z1 to Z3.

  In a succeeding step S1008, a process of storing an opening flag in the RAM 244 is executed, and in a step S1009, a process of storing a flirt effect flag in the RAM 244 is executed. In step S1010, a process of storing a movable accessory to be drive-controlled in the accessory storage area 244g is executed. This process is the same as the process in step S2008. Thus, in the changing process (FIG. 35), an affirmative determination is made in step S1201 to perform a flirting effect process (steps S1202 to S1207) and a display effect on the symbol display device 161 are performed, and step S1208 is performed. Then, processing for opening and closing control of the movable movable objects 170 to 173 (steps S1209 to S1214) and display effects on the symbol display device 161 are performed. Then, in step S1011, a process of storing a notice execution flag in the RAM 244 is performed, and then the effect setting process for reach generation is ended.

  In other words, when setting the first special suspension notice without the fanning effect, the storing process of the fanning effect flag is not performed, and during the second special holding notice with the fanning effect, the storing process of the fanning effect flag is performed. The processing configuration is the same for the stop result determination processing, the effect pattern determination processing, and the processing for controlling the opening and closing of the movable auditors 170 to 173.

  In addition, in the effect setting process for reach generation, although the stop result is the same as that in the case of the special reservation notice, a process related to an ineffective notice effect in which the movable auditors 170 to 173 do not move to the non-shielding position is also performed. This processing is performed in steps S1023 to S1028 when the ineffective notice effect is won in the ineffective notice lottery processing in step S1019 (step S1020: YES).

  That is, in step S1023, the process of rewriting the information stored in the register in step S801 in the fluctuation start process (FIG. 29) from the game time at which the reach has occurred to the game time at which the special reservation notice effect is performed is executed. By the way, as described above, in the game time, an ineffective notice effect is performed instead of the special hold notice effect. However, in the special hold notice and the ineffective notice, the pattern stop result and the effect pattern are the same, and the movable role 170 173 is different only in whether or not it moves to the non-shielding position. Therefore, in step S1023, first, the effect of the current game time is stored as the game time for performing the special reservation notice effect. By doing so, the number of types of presentation of the game times to be stored is reduced, and the storage capacity is reduced.

  In a succeeding step S1024, a stop result setting process for a special reservation notice is executed, and in a step S1025, an effect pattern determination process for a special reservation notice is executed. Such processing is the same as the processing in step S1006 and step S2006, step S1007, and step S2007. Then, the stop result determined in step S1024 and the effect pattern determined in step S1025 are output to the display control device 212 as a pattern command and a stop result command in step S809 of the variation start processing (FIG. 29). You. Then, the MPU 252 of the display control device 212 performs display control on the symbol display device 161 so as to execute a variable display corresponding to the special suspension notice. Thus, when the variable display of the symbol is stopped, the symbol corresponding to the information of the symbol for the notice is stopped and displayed at a predetermined display position on the display screen G in all the symbol columns Z1 to Z3. However, since the release flag is not stored in the above-described processing, the effect executed as described above is not a special reservation notice effect but an ineffective notice effect.

  Then, in step S2026, a process of storing an ineffective notice flag in various flag storage areas 244b of RAM 244 is executed. The non-effective notice flag is a flag for the MPU 242 to recognize that it is a game time for performing an ineffective notice effect.

  In a succeeding step S2027, a process of storing a flirt effect flag in the RAM 244 is executed, and in a step S2028, a process of storing a movable accessory to be drive-controlled in the accessory storage area 244g is executed. This process is the same as the process in step S2008. In this way, a positive determination is made in step S1201 in the during-change process (FIG. 35), and a fanning effect process (steps S1202 to S1207) and a display effect on the symbol display device 161 are performed. After executing the processing of step S2028, the effect setting processing for generating reach is ended.

  In addition, the above-mentioned ineffective notice effects may not be accompanied by fanning effects. This is set in the effect setting processing for normal deviation (step S808) in the fluctuation start processing (FIG. 29). Such processing will be described again with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

  If the ineffective notice effect is won in the ineffective notice lottery process performed in step S1105 (step S1106: YES), the process proceeds to step S1109. In step S1109, a process of storing a non-effective notice effect in a register as an effect of the current game is executed. In a succeeding step S1109, a stop result setting process for a special reservation notice is executed, and in a step S1110, an effect pattern determination process for a special reservation notice is executed. These processes are the same as the processes in steps S1006, S1024 and S2005, S1007, S1025 and S2006. Then, the stop result determined in step S1109 and the effect pattern determined in step S1110 are output to the display control device 212 as a pattern command and a stop result command in step S809 of the change start processing (FIG. 29).

  The MPU 252 of the display control device 212 performs display control so that the symbol display device 161 executes a variable display corresponding to the special suspension notice. Thus, when the variable display of the symbol is stopped, the symbol corresponding to the information of the symbol for the notice is stopped and displayed at a predetermined display position on the display screen G in all the symbol columns Z1 to Z3. However, in the above processing, since the release flag is not stored, the effect is not a special reservation notice effect but an ineffective notice effect.

  That is, in the non-effective notice effect, the stop result is the same as that of the special hold notice, and the effect pattern is the same because the ineffective notice effect and the special hold notice effect differ only in the presence or absence of the opening / closing control of the movable auditors 170 to 173. I have. As described above, while the contents of the variable display on the display screen G are made common, the effect (whether the special pending announcement effect or the ineffective announcement effect) is made different by opening / closing control of the movable auditors 170 to 173. In this way, the diversification of the effects and the simplification of the process for displaying the fluctuation are both achieved.

  After executing the process of step S1110, in step S1111, a process of storing an ineffective notice flag in the RAM 244 is executed, and then the normal deviation effect setting process ends.

  As described above, at the start of each game round, the stop result and the fluctuation pattern on the display screen G are determined, and the effect of each game round is performed. Here, a prize may occur in the operation port 115 at the timing when the effect of the game is being performed, and the hold information based on the prize may be a target of the hold notice. In this case, in the present embodiment, a process for giving a suspension notice is performed in the game round being executed. Hereinafter, this processing will be described.

  This process is performed in steps S1215 and S1216 of the process for changing (FIG. 35). Referring again to FIG. 35, in step S1215, it is determined whether or not the notification execution flag is not stored in the RAM 244, although the notification condition satisfaction flag is stored in the RAM 244. Here, in the pachinko machine 10, as described above, the notice execution flag is stored by executing the change start process (FIG. 29) in the situation where the notice condition satisfaction flag is stored. Therefore, the situation where the notice execution flag is stored but the notice execution flag is not stored means that after the change start process is executed, that is, the change display of the symbol in one game time is started. Later, a new prize is generated in the operating port 115, which means that the conditions for executing the suspension notice for the suspension information acquired based on the prize are satisfied.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S1215, the replacement process is executed in step S1216, and then the current change process ends. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1215, the during-variation process ends. Here, the replacement process will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

  In the replacement process, first, it is determined in step S2101 whether or not an ineffective notice flag is stored. If it is determined that the ineffective notice flag is stored, the ineffective notice flag is deleted in the following step S2102. Then, in step S2103, the release flag is stored in the RAM 244, and in step S2103, the notice execution flag is stored in the RAM 244. Then, the replacement process ends.

  That is, in the present embodiment, when the special holding notice and the stop result are the same at the start of the game round, but the ineffective notice effect in which the movable auditors 170 to 173 do not move to the non-shielding position is set, The non-effective notice effect is changed to a special reservation notice in which the movable characters 170 to 173 move to the non-shielding position. In this case, it is possible to suppress a local increase in the processing load without the need to modify the stop symbol.

  On the other hand, if the ineffective notice flag is not stored in step S2101, the stop result correction process is executed in step S2105, and the replacement process ends. Here, the stop result correction processing will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

  In the stop result correction processing, first, in step S2201, it is determined whether the game time being executed is a game time corresponding to the super reach display. When it is determined that the game number corresponds to the super-reach display, the main stopped symbol correction process is terminated. That is, in the case of the super reach display, even if the advance notice condition is satisfied, the super reach display is performed without performing the suspension notice.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the game number does not correspond to the super-reach display, in step S2202, the information of the notice symbol is read from the notice symbol storage area 244i. Then, in step S2203, it is determined whether or not all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are changing at high speed.

  With reference to FIG. 22 again, the symbol variation display in the pachinko machine 10 will be described. When the symbol variation display is performed on the symbol display device 161, first, the upper symbol row Z1, the middle symbol row Z2, and the lower symbol row Z3. The high-speed fluctuation display (or the first speed display) is performed so that the identification of each symbol displayed on the display screen G in all the symbol columns is impossible or difficult in appearance. Thereafter, as the period of T1 elapses from the start of the change, as shown in FIG. 22 (a), first, for the upper symbol row Z1, identification of each symbol displayed in the display screen G in the upper symbol row Z1 is performed. Is switched from the high-speed fluctuation display to the low-speed fluctuation display (or the second speed display slower than the first speed display) so that the appearance is easy, and when the period of T2 has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, the upper symbol row Z1 is displayed. Is stopped. In addition, when the period of T2 has elapsed from the start of the change, as shown in FIG. 22B, the lower symbol row Z3 is displayed on the display screen G in the lower symbol row Z3. The display is switched from the high-speed fluctuation display to the low-speed fluctuation display so that the symbol can be easily identified in appearance, and the fluctuation display in the lower symbol row Z3 is stopped when a period of T3 has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation. When the period of T3 has elapsed from the start of the change in this way, as shown in FIG. 22C, in the middle symbol row Z2, each of the images displayed in the display screen G in the middle symbol row Z2 is displayed. The display is switched from the high-speed fluctuation display to the low-speed fluctuation display so that the symbol can be easily identified in appearance. Then, when the period of T4 has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, the fluctuation display in the middle symbol row Z2 is stopped.

  In the above configuration, the periods of T1, T2, T3, and T4 are determined in accordance with various effect tables stored in the ROM 243, and more specifically, in one-to-one correspondence with various effect patterns. The reach effect is performed after the elapse of the period T3 and until the elapse of the period T4.

  Note that it is not essential that the timing at which the variable display of the symbol in the upper symbol row Z1 is stopped and the timing at which the variable display speed of the symbol in the lower symbol row Z3 is switched at the same time. Good. Similarly, it is not essential that the timing at which the fluctuation display of the symbol in the lower symbol row Z3 is stopped and the timing at which the fluctuation display speed of the symbol in the middle symbol row Z2 is switched at the same time. Is also good. Further, the T1, T2, and T3 are made to correspond one-to-one with the number of the hold information stored at the start of the game round, more specifically, according to the number of the hold information stored at the start of the game round. May be determined. Further, when the number of pieces of hold information stored at the start of the game round is the maximum number of holds, one of T1, T2, and T3 may be set to “0”.

  As described above, the MPU 242 measures the time from the start of the symbol change display on the symbol display device 161 using the progress counter provided in the RAM 244. Further, in the progress table provided in the ROM 243, information on each counter value corresponding to T1, T2, and T3 is in a one-to-one correspondence with information on effect patterns that can be set at the start of the game round. Is remembered. In step S2203, it is determined whether or not the value stored in the current progress counter is less than the counter value corresponding to T1 in the progress table. It is determined whether it is in the middle.

  As shown in the flowchart of FIG. 46, when it is determined in step S2203 that all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are changing at high speed, the first correction processing is executed in step S2204, and then the final stop result correction is performed. The process ends. If all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are not in the high-speed fluctuation in step S2203, that is, if the period of T1 has elapsed, it is determined in step S2205 whether the lower symbol row Z3 is in the high-speed fluctuation. Is determined. In this process, it is determined whether or not the value stored in the current progress counter is less than the counter value corresponding to T2 in the progress table. If the lower symbol row Z3 is changing at high speed, that is, before the time period of T2 has elapsed, the second correction processing is executed in step S2206, and then the main stop result correction processing ends. If the lower symbol sequence Z3 is not changing at high speed in step S2205, that is, if the period of T2 has elapsed, it is determined in step S2207 whether or not the middle symbol sequence Z2 is changing at high speed. judge. In this process, it is determined whether or not the value stored in the current progress counter is less than the counter value corresponding to T3 in the progress table. If the middle symbol row Z2 is changing at high speed, that is, before the time period of T3 has elapsed, the third correction processing is executed in step S2208, and the main stop result correction processing ends. In step S2207, if the middle symbol row Z2 is not changing at high speed, that is, if the period of T3 has elapsed, the stop result is not corrected and the main stop result correction process is terminated.

  Hereinafter, the first correction processing in step S2204, the second correction processing in step S2206, and the third correction processing in step S2208 will be described.

  In the first correction process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 47, a special hold advance lottery process is executed in step S2301, and it is determined in step S2302 whether or not this lottery has been won. The processing of steps S2301 and S2302 is the same as the processing of steps S2001 and S2002 in the effect setting processing for the suspension notice (FIG. 43). If the special hold announcement effect is won in step S2205, a process of storing an open flag in the RAM 244 is performed in step S2303, and in step S2304, the target movable auditors 170 to 173 are stored in the accessory storage area 244g. Is executed. Such processing is the same as step S2008 and the like. As a result, an affirmative determination is made in step S1208 in the subsequent-use changing process, and a process for controlling the opening and closing of the movable accessory is performed.

  In a succeeding step S2305, it is determined whether or not the game time being executed is a game time corresponding to the normal reach display. If the display is the normal reach display, a process of storing the flutter flag in the RAM 244 in step S2306 is executed. As a result, an affirmative determination is made in step S1201 in the during-variation use process after the next time.

  If it is determined in step S2302 that the special reservation notice has not been won, in step S2304 it is not the normal reach display (reach has not occurred), or after executing the processing in step S2306, the process proceeds to step S2307. In step S2307, the ROM 243 refers to a first-stage correction table as a first-stage correction information group. As shown in FIG. 48 (a), the first-stage correction table has a pair of an arbitrary combination of the initial effect pattern information and the notice design information except for the case where the super reach display occurs. 1, the information of the effect pattern for the first correction is set, and further, the address information is set corresponding to the information of the effect pattern for the first correction. In this case, all the information on the effect patterns for the first correction is set as the information on the effect patterns after the period of T1 has elapsed from the start of the change. However, the information of each effect pattern for the first correction is set so as not to change the variable display time in the effect pattern set initially.

  By the way, in the first stage correction table, the information of each effect pattern of the special reservation notice effect and the normal reservation notice effect is set in association with the information of the notice symbol. Therefore, the effect patterns to be referred to are different depending on whether the special hold announcement effect has been won in step S2302 or not.

  In the following step S2308, first correction address information corresponding to a combination of the type information of the notice symbol specified in step S2202 and the information of the effect pattern being executed stored in the pattern address storage area 244e. (First correction information) is specified from the first-stage correction table, and the specified address information is stored in a correction address storage area 244j provided in the RAM 244.

  By storing the address information for the first correction in the correction address storage area 244j, the MPU 242 determines that the period of T1 has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation based on the information of the progress counter, and then sets the current time. The drive of the light emitting unit 58 and the speaker unit 59 is controlled so as to perform an effect corresponding to the information of the effect pattern for the first correction.

  In step S2309, a correction command including the address information for the first correction stored in step S2308 is output to display control device 212. The display control device 212 stores the first correction address information in the display-side correction address storage area of the work RAM 254 based on receiving the correction command. The program ROM 253 of the display control device 212 stores a table similar to the first-stage correction table shown in FIG. Then, a variable display pattern for the first correction is specified from the address information for the first correction, and the variable display of the symbol is executed using the variable display pattern. Thus, when the variable display of the symbol is stopped, the symbol corresponding to the information of the symbol for the notice is stopped and displayed at a predetermined display position on the display screen G in all the symbol columns Z1 to Z3.

  After executing the process of step S2309, a process of storing a notice execution flag in the RAM 244 in step S2310 is executed, and then the first correction process ends.

  Next, the second correction processing in step S2206 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

  In the second correction process, first, in step S2401, information on the stop symbol of the upper symbol row Z1 in the main display area Rm is grasped based on the information stored in the stop result address storage area 244d. In this case, as the type information of the stopped symbol, there are a case where the main symbol is one and a case where the main symbol is two. Both of them are specified as symbols to be determined.

  In the following step S2402, it is determined whether or not the first correction condition is satisfied for the symbol to be determined identified in step S2401. The first correction condition is that if the information of the notice symbol is a specific symbol, that is, a main symbol with an odd number, the first correction condition is satisfied if the symbol to be determined is the specific symbol. In addition to being set so as to be determined, when the type information of the notice symbol is a non-specific symbol, that is, when the symbol to be determined is a non-specific symbol, the first symbol is set when the symbol to be determined is the non-specific symbol. It is set so that it is determined that the correction condition is satisfied.

  If it is determined that the first correction condition is not satisfied, the process proceeds to step S2403, and the information of the stop symbol of the upper symbol row Z1 in the sub display area Rs is grasped based on the information stored in the stop result address storage area 244d. I do. In this case, as the type information of the stopped symbols, there are a case where there are 0 main symbols and a case where there are two main symbols. In the case of, both are specified as symbols to be determined.

  In subsequent step S2404, it is determined whether or not the second correction condition is satisfied for the symbol to be determined identified in step S2403. The second correction condition is the same as the first correction condition, when the information of the notice symbol is a specific symbol, that is, a main symbol with an odd number, if the symbol to be determined is the specific symbol, the second symbol is used. 2 When the correction condition is set to be satisfied, and the type information of the notice symbol is a non-specific symbol, that is, a main symbol with an even number, the symbol to be determined is It is set so that it is determined that the second correction condition is satisfied when the symbol is a non-specific symbol.

  That is, the symbols to be determined are different between the first correction condition and the second correction condition, the first correction condition is a symbol stopped in the main display region Rm, and the second correction condition is a symbol to be displayed in the sub-display region Rs. The symbol to be stopped is determined. In this way, by making the stop symbol in the sub-display area Rs in addition to the stop symbol in the main display area Rm as a determination target, the possibility that the correction condition is satisfied is improved. More specifically, in step S2401, if the stop symbol in the main display area Rm is a combination of a specific symbol and a non-specific symbol, the first correction condition is satisfied regardless of which of the preview symbols, but the main display region If the stop symbol of Rm is one of the specific symbol and the non-specific symbol, and the symbol for notice is the other, the first correction condition is not satisfied. On the other hand, in step S2404, even if the stop symbol of the main display area Rm for which the first correction condition is not satisfied is one of the specific symbol and the non-specific symbol and the symbol for the preview is the other symbol. Since the other symbol is a stopped symbol in the sub display area Rs, the second correction condition is satisfied.

  If it is determined in step S2404 that the second correction condition is not satisfied, the stopped symbol correction processing ends. That is, when the second correction condition is not satisfied, the effect of the game time is continued with the effect pattern set in the fluctuation start process without executing the suspension notice. Incidentally, the case where a negative determination is made in step S2404 is a case where two main symbols are stopped in the main display region Rm, and the stopped symbols are specific symbols (main symbols with 1 and 9), Furthermore, it is only when the notice symbol is a non-specific symbol.

  If it is determined in step S2404 that the second correction condition is satisfied, a process of storing an open flag in the RAM 244 is performed in step S2405, and in step S2406, the movable movable objects 170 to 173 to be processed are executed. Is stored in the accessory storage area 244g. As a result, an affirmative determination is made in step S1208 of the during-variation use process (FIG. 35), and the process of controlling the opening and closing of the movable accessory is performed.

  In a succeeding step S2407, it is determined whether or not the game time being executed is a game time corresponding to the normal reach display. If it is determined that the game time corresponds to the normal reach display, a process of storing a flutter flag in the RAM 244 is executed in step S2408. As a result, an affirmative determination is made in step S1201 in the during-variation use process after the next time.

  If the first correction condition is satisfied in step S2402, the normal reach display is not performed (reach is not generated) in step S2406, or after the process of step S2408 is performed, the process proceeds to step S2409. In step S2409, a second-stage correction table as a second-stage correction information group stored in the ROM 243 is referred to. As shown in FIG. 48 (b), the second stage correction table is provided for any combination of the information of the initial variable display pattern and the type information of the symbol to be determined except for the case where the super reach display occurs. The information of the variable display pattern for the second correction is set in one-to-one correspondence, and the address information is further set in correspondence with the information of each variable display pattern for the second correction. In this case, all the information on the variable display pattern for the second correction is set as the information on the variable display pattern after the lapse of the period T2 from the start of the change. However, the information of each variable display pattern for the second correction is set so that the variable display time in the initially set variable display pattern is not changed.

  By the way, in the second stage correction table, the information of each effect pattern of the special reservation notice effect and the normal reservation notice effect is set in association with the information of the notice symbol. Therefore, reference is made to the case where the first correction condition is satisfied in the above step S2402 and correction is made to the normal reservation notice effect, and the case where the second correction condition is satisfied and the correction is made to the special reservation notice effect in step S2404. The production pattern is different.

  In a succeeding step S2410, the type information of the symbol to be determined that the correction condition is satisfied in the step S2402 or the step S2404 and the effect pattern of the currently executed game stored in the pattern address storage area 244e. The second correction address information (second correction information) corresponding to the combination with the information is specified from the second stage correction table, and the specified address information is stored in the correction address storage area 244j.

  When a plurality of symbols are to be determined and the correction condition is satisfied for any of the symbols, a symbol to be determined that the correction condition is determined to be satisfied is determined by lottery or the like. It is configured. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the symbol with the smaller number or the symbol with the larger number is configured to be the symbol to be determined that the correction condition is satisfied. Is also good.

  By storing the address information for the second correction in the correction address storage area 244j, the MPU 242 determines that the period of T2 has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation based on the information of the progress counter, The drive of the light emitting unit 58 and the speaker unit 59 is controlled so as to perform an effect corresponding to the information of the variable display pattern of the second modification.

  In step S2411, a correction command including the second correction address information stored in step S2410 is output to the display control device 212. The display control device 212 stores the second correction address information in the display-side correction address storage area of the work RAM 254 based on the reception of the correction command. A table similar to the second stage correction table shown in FIG. 48B is stored in the program ROM 253 of the display control device 212. Then, a variation display pattern for the second modification is specified from the address information for the second modification, and the variation display of the symbol is executed using the variation display pattern. Thus, when the variable display of the symbol is stopped, the symbol corresponding to the information of the symbol for the notice is stopped and displayed at a predetermined display position on the display screen G in all the symbol columns Z1 to Z3.

  After executing the processing of step S2411, the processing of storing a notice execution flag in the RAM 244 in step S2412 is executed, and then the second correction processing ends.

  Next, the third correction processing in step S2208 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

  In the third correction process, first, in step S2501, based on the information stored in the stop result address storage area 244d, information on the stop symbol in the upper symbol row Z1 and the stop symbol in the lower symbol row Z3 in the main display area Rm. Understand information and. In this case, there are a case where the main symbol is one and a case where there are two main symbols as the information of the stopped symbol of the upper symbol column Z1, but in the case of one, it is specified as a symbol to be determined in the upper symbol column Z1. In the case of two symbols, both of them are specified as symbols to be determined in the upper symbol row Z1. In addition, there is a case where there is one main symbol and a case where there are two main symbols as the information of the stopped symbol of the lower symbol column Z3, but in the case of one, it is specified as a symbol to be determined in the lower symbol column Z3. In the case of two symbols, both symbols are specified as symbols to be determined in the lower symbol row Z3.

  In a succeeding step S2502, it is determined whether or not the third correction condition is satisfied for the symbol to be determined identified in the step S2501. The third correction condition is satisfied when a common symbol of the same type exists in the symbol to be determined in the upper symbol row Z1 and the symbol to be determined in the lower symbol row Z3. Is set not to be determined. Also, even when a common symbol of the same type exists, if the information of the symbol for the notice is a specific symbol, that is, a main symbol with an odd number, the common symbol of the same type is used. If it is a specific symbol, it is set to be determined that the third correction condition is satisfied. If the type information of the preview symbol is a non-specific symbol, that is, a main symbol with an even number, It is set so that it is determined that the third correction condition is satisfied when the same type of common symbol is a non-specific symbol. Further, in the third correction condition, even when the same symbol of the same type exists, a stop result corresponding to the reach display, that is, a reach line is formed by the common symbol of the same type Is set so that the third correction condition is not satisfied.

  If it is determined that the third correction condition is not satisfied, in step S2503, based on the information stored in the stop result address storage area 244d, the stop symbol of the upper symbol row Z1 in the sub display area Rs is determined. The information and the information of the lower symbol sequence Z3 are grasped. In this case, there are a case where the main symbol is one and a case where there are two main symbols as the information of the stopped symbol of the upper symbol column Z1, but in the case of one, it is specified as a symbol to be determined in the upper symbol column Z1. In the case of two symbols, both of them are specified as symbols to be determined in the upper symbol row Z1. In addition, there is a case where there is one main symbol and a case where there are two main symbols as the information of the stopped symbol of the lower symbol column Z3, but in the case of one, it is specified as a symbol to be determined in the lower symbol column Z3. In the case of two symbols, both symbols are specified as symbols to be determined in the lower symbol row Z3.

  In the following step S2504, it is determined whether or not the fourth correction condition is satisfied for the symbol to be determined identified in steps S2501 and S2503. In the fourth correction condition, the same type of common symbol exists in the symbol to be determined in the upper symbol row Z1 and the symbol to be determined in the lower symbol row Z3 in the main display area Rm and the sub display area Rs. In such a case, it is set so that it is not determined that the correction condition is satisfied. Also, even when a common symbol of the same type exists, if the information of the symbol for the notice is a specific symbol, that is, a main symbol with an odd number, the common symbol of the same type is used. If the fourth modification condition is determined to be satisfied when the symbol is a specific symbol, and the type information of the notice symbol is a non-specific symbol, that is, if the symbol information is a main symbol with an even number, When the common symbol of the same type is a non-specific symbol, it is set so that it is determined that the fourth correction condition is satisfied.

  Here, in the fourth modification condition, unlike the third modification condition, when there is a common symbol of the same type, a symbol that stops in the main display region Rm and a symbol that stops in the sub-display region Rs. When a reach line is formed, or when a reach line is formed between symbols stopped in the sub-display area Rs, the fourth correction condition is satisfied on condition that the above other conditions are satisfied. Is set to As described above, in the present embodiment, the game times in which the off-reach effect is executed are not subject to the suspension notice. That is, under the third correction condition for which the symbol stopped in the main display region Rm is to be determined, the third correction condition is set not to be satisfied when the reach line is formed.

  On the other hand, in the fourth modification condition, in the game times in which the result of the fluctuation display is the stop result of the out-of-reach, that is, the fluctuation display ends, and the stop result is displayed in all the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 as in the suspension notice. In the case where the same type of symbol is stopped, the game times are set to be treated as a suspension notice. Furthermore, when the reach line is formed including the symbol that stops in the sub display area Rs, the symbol that stops in the sub display area Rs is not made visible, that is, the corresponding movable members 170 to 173 are not shielded. The reach display is not performed without moving to the position. In other words, in the fourth correction condition, when a reach line is formed including a symbol that stops in the sub-display area Rs, the reach display is not performed as described above, but as a result, the game results in the stop result of the off-reach. It is set so that the fourth correction condition is satisfied as the number of times.

  As described above, the possibility of the correction condition being satisfied is improved by making the stop design of the sub-display region Rs in addition to the stop design of the main display region Rm the determination target. In detail, the pattern in which the same symbol of the same type exists in the symbol of the upper symbol row Z1 and the symbol of the lower symbol row Z3 except for the pattern which becomes a reach when only the main display region Rm is to be determined. While there are four patterns for one type of symbol, there are 12 patterns including the sub-display area Rs, which is three times as large.

  If the fourth correction condition is not satisfied in step S2504, the third correction processing ends. That is, in this case, the effect of the game time is continued according to the effect pattern set in the fluctuation start process without executing the suspension notice.

  If the fourth modification condition is satisfied in step S2504, a process of storing an open flag in the RAM 244 is executed in step S2505, and in step S2506, the target movable auditors 170 to 173 are executed. A process for storing the object in the object storage area 244g is executed. As a result, an affirmative determination is made in step S1208 of the processing during fluctuation (FIG. 35) for the next and subsequent times, and the processing for controlling the opening and closing of the movable auditorium is performed. In the third correction process, the process of determining whether or not the display before the normal display is the normal reach display as in the first and second correction processes is not set. This is because, in the third correction process, if the display before the correction is the normal reach display, neither the third correction condition nor the fourth correction condition is satisfied.

  If the third correction condition is satisfied in step S2502, or after executing the processing in step S2506, the process proceeds to step S2507. In step S2507, a third-stage correction table as a third-stage correction information group stored in the ROM 243 is referred to. As shown in FIG. 48 (c), the third-stage correction table is provided for any combination of the information of the initial variable display pattern and the type information of the symbol to be determined except for the case where super reach occurs. The information of the variable display pattern for the third correction is set in one-to-one correspondence, and the address information is set in correspondence with the information of the variable display pattern for the third correction. In this case, all the information on the variable display pattern for the third correction is set as the information on the variable display pattern after the lapse of the period T3 from the start of the variation. However, the information of each variable display pattern for the third correction is set so that the variable display time in the initially set variable display pattern is not changed.

  By the way, in the third stage correction table, the information of each effect pattern of the special reservation notice effect and the normal reservation notice effect is set in association with the information of the notice symbol. Therefore, reference is made to the case where the third correction condition is satisfied in the above step S2502 and the normal reservation advance effect is corrected, and the case where the fourth correction condition is satisfied and the special hold advance effect is corrected in the step S2504. The production pattern is different.

  In the following step S2508, the type information of the symbol to be determined that the correction condition is satisfied in step S2502 or step S2504, and the effect pattern of the currently executed game stored in the pattern address storage area 244e. The third correction address information (third correction information) corresponding to the combination with the information is specified from the third-stage correction table, and the specified address information is stored in the correction address storage area 244j.

  When a plurality of symbols are to be determined and the correction condition is satisfied for any of the symbols, a symbol to be determined that the correction condition is determined to be satisfied is determined by lottery or the like. It is configured. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the symbol with the smaller number or the symbol with the larger number is configured to be the symbol to be determined that the correction condition is satisfied. Is also good.

  By storing the third correction address information in the correction address storage area 244j, the MPU 242 determines that the period of T3 has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation based on the information of the progress counter, The drive of the light emitting unit 58 and the speaker unit 59 is controlled so as to perform an effect corresponding to the information of the variable display pattern for 3 correction.

  In step S2509, a correction command including the third correction address information stored in step S2508 is output to the display control device 212. The display controller 212 stores the third correction address information in the display-side correction address storage area of the work RAM 254 based on receiving the correction command. The program ROM 253 of the display control device 212 stores a table similar to the third-stage correction table shown in FIG. Then, a variation display pattern for the third correction is specified from the address information for the third correction, and the variation display of the symbol is executed using the variation display pattern. Thus, when the variable display of the symbol is stopped, the symbol corresponding to the information of the symbol for the notice is stopped and displayed at a predetermined display position on the display screen G in all the symbol columns Z1 to Z3.

  After executing the process of step S2509, a process of storing a notice execution flag in the RAM 244 in step S2510 is performed, and then the third correction process ends.

  As a result, when the advance notice condition is satisfied while the fluctuation display of the game times is being performed, the suspension notice can be executed in the game times in which the fluctuation display is being performed. In this case, not only the main display area Rm but also the sub-display area Rs are set as determination targets for the correction in the symbol correction processing, so that the possibility of correction is dramatically improved, and an opportunity to execute a hold notice Can be increased.

  According to the embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects can be obtained.

  A reservation notice according to the reservation information that is stored in the reservation area RE of the reservation ball storage area 232 and that is not a target of the rejection determination is executed in a game time before the game time related to the reservation information. Sometimes. Thereby, for the player, only the game in which the winning of the game ball to the operation port 115 is generated and the game in which the result of the determination of the holding information acquired based on the winning is confirmed in the game time related to the holding information is performed. In the case where a plurality of pieces of hold information are stored in the hold area RE, the result of the case where the order of the hit / fail determination is determined for the hold information is determined according to the content of the hold notice. The game of predicting the game is added, and the game is diversified. Thereby, the attention degree of the game can be increased.

  The suspension notice is made according to the display mode on the display screen G of the symbol display device 161. Thereby, if the player is paying attention to the display screen G in an attempt to grasp the result of the determination of each game time, the player can naturally check the suspension notice, and even though the suspension notice has been made, the player cannot overlook it. It is suppressed that it is done. In addition, since the suspension notice is performed based on the result of stopping the symbols of each game on the display screen G, the effect of preventing the suspension notice from being overlooked is enhanced. In particular, by performing the suspension notice according to the mode of the stop result in the variation display of the symbol of each game times, it is possible for the player to prevent the timing at which the suspension notice is performed from being difficult to understand and to miss the suspension notice. Performance is further reduced.

  In the configuration in which the suspension notice is performed according to the mode of the stop result as described above, the main display region Rm and the sub display region Rs are set as the regions where the symbols on the display screen G are stopped and displayed, and the sub display region Rs is set in the sub display region Rs. The stopped symbols can be switched between a state that can be visually recognized by the movable auditors 170 to 173 and a state that is difficult to visually recognize. Then, the setting is made so that the suspension notice is also performed based on the stop result including the symbol to be stopped in the sub display area Rs. Even when the suspension notice is performed, when the suspension is performed based on the stop result including the symbol stopped in the sub-display area Rs, the symbol stopped in the sub-display area Rs is difficult to be visually recognized as described above. Therefore, until the symbol is switched from a state in which it is difficult to visually recognize to a state in which the symbol can be visually recognized, it is difficult for the player to notice that the suspension notice is performed. Therefore, it is possible to provide a surprising effect when the suspension notice is given. In addition, when the symbol is switched from the state in which the symbol is difficult to visually recognize to the state in which the symbol can be visually recognized, the operation of the corresponding movable auditors 170 to 173 is accompanied, so that it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking it. it can. As a result, it is possible to appropriately increase the degree of attention to the suspension notice.

  Furthermore, in the case of performing the suspension notice using the symbol stopped in the sub display area Rs, not only the effect on the display screen G but also the operation of the movable auditors 170 to 173 is involved, so that the effect is flashy. As a result, the degree of attention to the suspension notice is further improved.

  When the notice condition is satisfied during the change display of the symbol in each game time (when the notice condition satisfaction flag is stored), the symbol is stopped in the main display area Rm in the game time or the stopped symbol is used. It is determined whether or not the suspension notice can be executed. If the suspension notice can be executed, the stop symbol of the changing symbol row is changed. It is configured to add a stopped or stopped design. In other words, both the number of symbols used to determine whether or not the hold notice can be executed and the type of the hold notice (normal hold notice or special hold notice) both increase as compared with the configuration in which only the normal hold notice is performed. Therefore, when the advance notice condition is satisfied during the fluctuation display, the possibility that the suspension notice can be executed in the game time can be drastically improved.

  In order to exert such a function, first, it is determined whether or not the normal hold notice can be executed, and if the normal hold notice cannot be executed, it is determined whether or not the special hold notice can be executed. In the case of the normal hold notice, the hold notice is valid only for the stop symbol in the main display area Rm regardless of the presence or absence of the movement of the movable characters 170 to 173. Therefore, the normal hold notice is a special hold notice for the player. It is thought that it is more reassuring that the suspension notice is effective. Therefore, by adopting a configuration in which the normal suspension notice is executed with priority, the player can enjoy the subsequent effects (the subsequent game times) with ease.

  On the other hand, in the situation where the notice condition is satisfied at the start of the game round, if the hold information corresponding to the jackpot result is a trigger of the hold condition being satisfied, the special hold notice is given priority over the normal hold notice. The configuration was adopted. In other words, if the notice condition is satisfied during the game round, the normal hold notice has priority regardless of the timing of the notice condition being satisfied, and if the notice condition is satisfied at the start of the game round, the special hold notice Has priority. For this reason, for example, in the situation where any pending notice is performed in the previous game round, if a special reserved advance notice is performed in the game round, there is a high possibility that a jackpot result will be obtained in the subsequent game round, If the advance notice condition is satisfied in the situation where the hold advance notice is not performed in the previous game round and the normal hold advance notice is performed in the game round, it is possible to obtain a jackpot result after that even if it is not a special hold advance notice. Expectations swell. In other words, although the special reservation notice basically has a higher expectation that the jackpot result will be higher thereafter, a prize is generated in the operating port 115 during the game round, and the normal reservation notice is performed in the game round. In such cases, the degree of expectation of a subsequent jackpot is comparable to that of the special reservation notice. By doing so, it is possible to make the player have a sense of expectation even in the case of the normal suspension notice without increasing the degree of attention to the special suspension notice.

  As described above, when the notice condition is satisfied during the game time and the suspension notice is executed in the game time, the stop symbol of the symbol row during the high-speed fluctuation display is changed. It is difficult for a player to identify a symbol that is changing during a high-speed change display, and by changing such a changing symbol, the discomfort caused by the change to the player is reduced. can do.

  Even if the notice conditions are not satisfied at the start of the game round, a lottery of the ineffective notice production that will have the same stop result as the stop result in the special reservation notice will be made, and if the lottery is won, the stop in the special reservation notice will be made The variable display is started so as to obtain the result. Thereby, when the notice condition is satisfied in the game time, the special holding notice is given only by setting the movable auditors 170 to 173 in the non-shielding state without changing the changing symbol or the stopped symbol. It is possible to do. Therefore, when the notice condition is satisfied during the game round, the symbol change processing is not required as described above, and an increase in the processing load due to the execution of the hold notice can be suppressed.

  In particular, in this configuration, even during the period in which the symbols Z1 to Z3 are stopped and displayed until the final display is made, the special holding notice can be executed because the stopped symbols are not changed. it can. This can further increase the opportunity for the suspension notice.

  Further, when the ineffective notice effect is won, the stop result of the game time is set to the same stop result as when the special hold notice is performed as described above, and the ineffective notice flag is stored in the RAM 244. In this way, when the notice condition is satisfied in the game time, the suspension notice is executed only by determining whether or not the ineffective notice flag is stored, instead of grasping the stop result. Whether or not it is possible can be determined, and an extreme increase in the processing load can be suitably avoided.

<Second embodiment>
In the first embodiment, when the hold information corresponding to the game time for performing the reach display is obtained, the notice condition is established with a predetermined probability, that is, when the hold notice is performed, Has a configuration in which the reach display is finally executed in any of the game times. The present embodiment is different from the first embodiment in that a case is set in which a reach display is not finally performed even if a hold notice is issued. Hereinafter, a configuration different from the first embodiment will be described.

  First, a description will be given of a dismissal notice setting process according to the present embodiment. FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing the off-set notice setting process in the present embodiment, and shows a process executed in place of the off-set notice setting process shown in FIG. The release notice setting process is a process executed by the MPU 202 of the effect control device 82 in step S1708 of the hold notice setting process (FIG. 40) as described above.

  First, in step S2601, it is determined whether or not the hold command received this time is an off-limit reachable hold command. If it is determined that the command is the out-of-reach support command, the process of steps S2602 to S2606 is executed. Since the processing of steps S2602 to S2606 is the same as the processing of steps S1902 to S1906 in the first embodiment, the description is cited.

  If it is determined in step S2601 that the command is not the out-of-reach support command but the out-of-control command, the process advances to step S2607. In step S2607, it is determined whether or not the production-side reserved storage number SN is “2” or more. If the production-side reserved storage number SN is less than “2”, the final notice setting process ends. If the production-side reserved storage number SN is equal to or greater than “2”, a non-continuous notice lottery process is executed in step S2608. In this lottery process, the above-mentioned reach display is not finally performed by referring to the value obtained from the non-continuous notice counter from the various counter areas 244a of the RAM 244 and the discontinuous notice table from the various table areas 243a of the ROM 243. A lottery is performed to determine whether or not to execute a non-continuous notice as the hold notice. In a succeeding step S2609, it is determined whether or not to execute the discontinuous notice based on the processing in the step S2608. If it is determined that the discontinuous notice is not to be executed, the miss notice setting process ends.

  If it is determined in step S2609 that discontinuous notice is to be executed, the same processing as steps S2604 to S2606 is executed in steps S2610 to S2612. That is, in step S2610, a process of determining a notice symbol corresponding to the departure is executed, in step S2611, a process of storing a notice symbol is executed, and in step S2612, a process of storing a notice condition satisfaction flag in the RAM 244 is executed.

  In a succeeding step S2613, a process of storing the discontinuous flag in the various flag storage area 244b of the RAM 244 is executed. The discontinuous flag is a flag for the MPU 242 to recognize that the discontinuous notice is being performed. In a succeeding step S2614, a process of inputting “2” to the discontinuous counter provided in the various counter areas 244a of the RAM 244 is executed. The non-continuous counter is a counter for the MPU 242 to know the number of games corresponding to the hold information that triggered the non-continuous notice. After executing the processing of step S2614, the present notice setting processing is ended.

  Next, a description will be given of an effect setting process for a reservation notice in the present embodiment. FIG. 52 is a flow chart showing an effect setting process for reservation notice in the present embodiment, and shows a process executed in place of the effect setting process for stay notice shown in FIG. 43 described above. The effect setting process for the suspension notice is a process executed in step S807 of the change start process (FIG. 29) as described above.

  In the effect setting process for the suspension notice in the present embodiment, first, in step S2701, it is determined whether the discontinuous flag is stored in the RAM 244 or not. If it is determined that the discontinuity flag is stored, a process of decrementing the discontinuity counter by 1 is performed in step S2702. In step S2703, it is determined whether or not the discontinuity counter is “0” based on the processing result in step S2702.

  If it is determined in step S2701 that the discontinuity flag is not stored, or if it is determined in step S2703 that the discontinuity counter is not “0”, the process advances to step S2704. In step S2704, a special hold announcement effect lottery process is executed in the same manner as in step S2001. In the following step S2705, it is determined whether or not to execute the special hold advance effect based on the processing result in step S2704, as in step S2002. . If it is determined in step S2705 that the special hold notice effect is not to be executed, a process for normal hold notice is executed in steps S2706 and S2707, similarly to the processing in steps S2003 and S2004.

  If it is determined in step S2703 that the non-continuous counter is “0”, or if it is determined in step S2705 that the special suspension notice is to be executed, the process advances to step S2708. In step S2708, stop result determination processing for special reservation notice is executed, and in subsequent step S2709, effect pattern determination processing for special reservation notice is executed. These processes are the same as the processes in steps S2005 and S2006, and thus the description is cited.

  In a succeeding step S2710, it is determined whether or not the discontinuous flag is stored in the RAM 244. If it is determined that the discontinuity flag is stored, the process advances to step S2711 to determine whether the discontinuity counter is "0". If it is determined in step S2710 that the discontinuity flag is not stored, or if it is determined in step S2711 that the discontinuity counter is not “0”, the process proceeds to step S2712. The processing in steps S2712 and S2713 is the same as the processing in steps S2007 and S2008 described above. In step S2712, processing for storing an open flag in the RAM 244 is executed, and in step S2713, the movable movable objects 170 to 173 to be processed are processed. Execute the process of storing.

  After executing the processing of step S2707 or step S2713, in step S2714, processing of storing a notice execution flag in the RAM 244 is performed, and then the effect setting processing for the reserved notice is ended.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2711 that the discontinuity counter is "0", that is, if the discontinuation counter is a game corresponding to the hold information that triggered the discontinuation, the process proceeds to step S2715. In step S2715, the non-continuous flag is deleted. Then, in step S2716, a process of setting the effect of the current game time as an ineffective advance effect instead of the special hold advance effect is executed. Specifically, in step S2716, a process of storing an ineffective notice flag in the RAM 244 is performed, and a process of deleting the notice condition satisfaction flag in the RAM 244 is executed. After executing the processing of step S2716, the effect setting processing for the final notice is ended.

  Although the detailed description with reference to the drawings is omitted, as described in the first embodiment, the hold notice is not only the effect set processing for the hold notice in the change start processing, but also the effect set processing for the reach generation. (FIG. 32) is also set (when a normal reach is selected, a special hold announcement effect with a fanning effect is set). Therefore, in the effect setting processing for reach generation in the present embodiment, if it is determined in step S1004 that the notice condition satisfaction flag is stored, first, as in steps S2701 to S2703, the non-continuous flag is set. It is determined whether or not is stored. If it is stored, 1 is subtracted from the non-continuous counter before proceeding to step S1005, and if not stored, the process directly proceeds to step S1005. Since the hold information that triggers the non-continuous notice is the hold information based on the complete departure corresponding hold command, the game times in which the non-continuous counter becomes “0” do not correspond to the normal reach display.

  That is, in the present embodiment, in the non-continuous notice, in the game times corresponding to the hold information that triggered the non-continuous notice, the special hold notice effect and the stop result are the same, but the corresponding movable characters 170 to An ineffective notice effect in which 173 does not enter the non-shielding state is performed. In this case, the advance notice condition satisfaction flag is deleted as described above, so that the suspension notice is not performed in the subsequent game times.

  On the other hand, since the notice condition establishment flag is deleted, the notice condition may be established based on the hold information acquired during the execution of the game round. That is, if the advance notice condition is satisfied during the execution of the game corresponding to the hold information that triggered the discontinuous advance notice, the hold advance notice is performed in the play. In this case, since the notice condition satisfaction flag is stored and the notice execution flag is not stored, an affirmative determination is made in step S1215 of the during-change process (FIG. 35) and the replacement process (step S1216). ) Is performed. In the replacement process (FIG. 45), since the ineffective notice flag is stored as described above, an affirmative determination is made in step S2101, and in step S2102 to step S2105, the ineffective notice effect is replaced with the special hold notice effect. Is performed. Thereby, when the notice condition is satisfied in the game time corresponding to the hold information that triggered the discontinuous notice, the hold notice can be executed.

  According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects can be obtained.

  As a type of the mode of the hold notice, a discontinuous notice is provided in which the hold notice is performed over a plurality of game times, but the hold notice is not performed without eventually developing into a reach display, and the opportunity of the discontinuous notice is provided. In the game time corresponding to the held information, that is, the game time in which the hold notice is not performed and the reach display is not performed, the ineffective notice effect is performed. Then, when the notice condition is satisfied during execution of the game round, the ineffective notice effect is replaced with the special hold notice effect. This makes it possible to maintain a feeling of expectation in a case where a hold notice is given in a plurality of game times and a reach display is made in the next game time even though the continuous hold notice is interrupted. .

  In particular, in the present embodiment, since the non-effective notice effect is performed in the last game time of the discontinuous notice, even if the notice condition is satisfied in the last game time, Since it is only necessary to replace the non-effective notice effect with the special hold notice effect, it is possible to suppress an extreme increase in the processing load.

  The configuration in which the non-effective notice effect is performed in the last game time can be applied as a structure in which the non-effective notice effect is generated in the game time where some inconvenience may occur when the hold notice is not executed. This inconvenience is, for example, when the advance notice condition is satisfied in the last game time of the discontinuous advance notice effect as described above, or when the number of reserved storage is 0 and the game time is being executed, for example, There may be a situation where the suspension notice is not performed over a plurality of game times (a situation where the execution frequency of the suspension notice is low).

  If the hold condition is satisfied when the number of hold memories is 0 and the game time is being executed, if the hold notice is not executed in the game time, the hold information is used as a trigger for the hold condition to be satisfied. The suspension notice will not be performed in the previous game round. For this reason, when the game time is started with the number of stored memories being 0, by setting so as to perform an ineffective notice effect in the game time, it is assumed that the notice condition is satisfied in the game time. In addition, it is possible to avoid such an inconvenience that the suspension notice cannot be executed in the game time, and the suspension notice is not performed in the game times before the game time of the suspension information which triggered the establishment of the notice condition.

  The situation where the frequency of execution of the suspension notice is low means that the notice condition has not been satisfied for a while (for example, over 100 consecutive game times). In such a situation, if the reservation notice cannot be executed even though the notice condition is satisfied, it is impossible to provide the player with a great opportunity. Therefore, for example, a frequency grasping means for grasping the frequency at which the suspension notice is performed may be provided in the RAM 244, and when the frequency grasping means grasps that the frequency is less than the predetermined frequency, an ineffective notice effect may be performed. . As a result, it is possible to preferably execute the suspension notice without missing a chance.

<Third embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the mode of the suspension notice is different from the first and second embodiments. That is, when the suspension notice is continuously performed over a plurality of game times, the suspension notice with an effect different from the suspension notice executed in the previous game time is performed in each of the continuous game times. . More specifically, as the mode of the reservation notice, the same notice-corresponding symbol is stopped in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 as in the first and second embodiments. Then, a so-called step-up effect as a stage effect such as an effect is performed on the notice-corresponding design in accordance with the suspension notice by the above-mentioned design. First, the flow of the suspension notice of the present embodiment will be described with reference to the schematic diagram of FIG.

  When the notice condition is satisfied, the same main symbol is stopped and displayed in each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 so as not to correspond to the reach display and the jackpot result as in the first and second embodiments. In this case, in the game time two times before the game time related to the hold information that triggered the establishment of the advance notice condition, as shown in FIG. Is displayed in such a manner as to spring upward from below.

  When the reservation advance notice is further performed in the subsequent game time, that is, the game time immediately before the game time related to the hold information that triggered the establishment of the notice condition, the second effect of the stage effect is shown in FIG. 53 (b). In this way, a display effect is performed in which the main symbol, which is a symbol corresponding to the notice, is surrounded by an effect such as an aura. Then, as shown in FIG. 54 (c), the variable display ends in a stop mode that results in a big hit, as a game cycle related to the hold information that triggered the establishment of the notice condition.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 53 (d) → FIG. 53 (c), in the next game round in which the suspension notice accompanied by the first effect is performed, a jackpot result may be obtained instead of the second effect. In addition, there is a case where the out-of-way reach is performed in the game time following the first effect and the second effect, or the out-of-the-way reach is performed in the next game time after the first effect without passing through the second effect.

  Next, the jackpot announcement setting process in the present embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. As already described, the jackpot notice setting process is a process executed in step S1707 of the hold notice setting process (FIG. 40), and FIG. 54 is executed instead of the jackpot notice setting process shown in FIG. The processing is shown.

  In the jackpot announcement setting process in the present embodiment, the processes of steps S2801 to S2807 are executed in the same manner as the processes of steps S1801 to S1807. In step S2808, a value obtained by subtracting 1 from the production-side reserved storage number SN is input to the stage counter provided in the various counter area 244a of the RAM 244. The stage counter is a counter for the MPU 242 to grasp the number of pieces of hold information to be played before the hold information that triggered the establishment of the notice condition. That is, in step S2808, a process of inputting the number of pieces of hold information targeted for the game times to the stage counter before the current hold information is executed.

  In a succeeding step S2809, a stage effect selection process is executed. The stage effect selection process is, in the stage effect described above, a second stage advance notice in which a hold announcement accompanied by a first effect and a second effect is performed before the game time of the hold information which has triggered the advance notice condition. This is a process of selecting any one of a first-stage announcement in which only a preliminary notice with the first effect is performed without performing a preliminary notice with the second effect. The selection rate is arbitrary, but in the present embodiment, the two-stage notice is selected with a probability of 70%. In step S2809, a selection counter is obtained from the various counter areas 244a of the RAM 244, and a selection table is obtained from the various table areas 243a of the ROM 243, and the above-described selection processing is performed.

  In a succeeding step S2810, it is determined whether or not the first-stage notice is selected based on the processing result of the step S2809. If the second-stage notice is selected instead of the first-stage notice, the process of storing the second-stage flag in the various flag storage area 244b of the RAM 244 in step S2811 is executed, and then the big jackpot notice is set. The process ends. The second stage flag is a flag for the MPU 242 to know that the second stage notice has been selected.

  If it is determined in step S2802 that the preliminary announcement occurrence lottery has not been won and the advance notice condition has not been satisfied, or if it has been determined in step S2810 that the first-stage advance notice has been selected, the large jackpot announcement setting is directly performed. The process ends.

  Next, a description will be given, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. As described above, the release notice setting process is a process executed in step S1708 of the hold notice setting process (FIG. 40), and FIG. 55 is executed instead of the release notice setting process shown in FIG. FIG.

  In the miss notice setting processing according to the present embodiment, the processing of steps S2901 to S2906 is executed in the same manner as the processing of steps S1901 to S1906. Then, in step S2907, as in step S2808, a process of inputting a value obtained by subtracting 1 from the production-side reserved storage number SN to the stage counter is executed. In a succeeding step S2908, a stage effect selection process is executed similarly to the step S2809. The selection rate in such processing is arbitrary, but in the present embodiment, it is set so that the first-stage notice is selected with a probability of 70% in the selection processing in step S2908. That is, in the stage effect selection process in the jackpot jackpot setting process, the second stage announcement is selected with a probability of 70%, and in the stage effect selection process in the out-of-office setting process, the second stage announcement is selected with a probability of 30%. Then, the degree of expectation of the jackpot result after the second stage effect is selected is set higher than the degree of expectation of the jackpot result after the first stage effect is selected.

  In subsequent step S2909, similarly to step S2810, it is determined whether or not the first stage effect is selected based on the processing result of step S2908, and it is determined that the second stage effect is selected instead of the first stage effect. In this case, in step S2910, a process of storing the second stage flag is executed, and then the non-public notice setting process ends.

  If it is determined in step S2901 that the command is not the out-of-reach support suspension command but the out-of-reach support suspension command, it is determined in step S2903 that the on-hold notice has not been won and that the advance notice condition has not been satisfied, or in step S2909. If the first stage effect is selected, the final notice setting process is terminated.

  Next, the effect setting processing for the hold notice in the present embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. As already described, the effect setting process for the suspension notice is a process executed in step S807 in the process for starting the fluctuation (FIG. 29), and FIG. 56 is a flowchart of the effect setting process for the suspension notice shown in FIG. It shows a process that is executed instead.

  In the effect setting process for the suspension notice according to the present embodiment, first, in step S3001, it is determined whether or not the overlap flag is stored in the various flag storage area 244b of the RAM 244, and it is determined that the overlap flag is stored. In this case, in step S3002, the duplicate notice setting processing is executed, and the effect setting processing for the reservation notice is ended. The duplication flag and the duplication notice setting process will be described later in detail.

  If it is determined in step S3001 that the duplication flag is not stored, the process proceeds to step S3003, and it is determined whether the step counter is equal to or more than “3”. By the way, if the stage counter is "0", that is, if the current game time is the game time corresponding to the hold information that triggered the establishment of the advance notice condition, the hold advance notice is given in the change start processing (FIG. 29). Instead of the effect setting process for the game, the effect setting process for the jackpot (step S803) or the effect setting process for the reach generation (step S805) is performed. Therefore, when it is determined in step S3003 that the stage counter is not “3” or more and is smaller than “3”, the case where the stage counter is “0” is not included, and is limited to “2” or “1”. .

  If the step counter is less than “3” in step S3003, that is, “2” or “1”, it is determined in step S3004 whether the step counter is “2”. If it is “2”, it is determined in step S3005 whether the second stage flag is stored. The case where the stage counter is “2” in step S3004 and the second stage flag is stored in step S3005 means that the game time executed before the hold information that triggered the establishment of the advance notice condition is In this case, there are two pieces of such hold information including the hold information related to the current game, and the second stage notice is selected in the stage effect selection process (step S2809 or step S2908). In other words, this means that the current game time should execute the suspension notice accompanied by the first effect. In this case, in step S3006, the process of storing the first effect as the stage effect of the current suspension notice in the register so as to perform the first effect Execute

  If it is determined in step S3005 that the second stage flag is not stored, the hold information related to the game time executed before the hold information that triggered the establishment of the notice condition is set to the hold time related to the current game time. There are two items including information, and the first stage notice has been selected in the stage effect selection process. In this case, no reservation notice is executed in this game round.

  If it is determined in step S3004 that the stage counter is not “2”, it means that the stage counter is “1”. In this case, the process advances to step S3007 to determine whether the second stage flag is stored. The case where the stage counter is “1” in step S3004 and the second stage flag is not stored in step S3007 means that the game times executed before the hold information that triggered the establishment of the advance notice condition , There is a case in which there is one piece of hold information related to the current game times as the hold information, and the first stage notice is selected in the stage effect selection process. In other words, this means that the current game time should execute the suspension notice accompanied by the first effect. In this case, the process proceeds to step S3006, and the register performs the first effect as the stage effect of the current suspension notice in the register. Execute the process of storing.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3007 that the second stage flag is stored, the hold information related to the game times executed before the hold information that triggered the establishment of the notice condition is set to the current game times. There is one piece of suspension information related to the second stage notice in the stage effect selection process. In this case, it means that the current game time should execute the suspension notice accompanied by the second effect. Then, the process proceeds to step S3008, and a process of storing the information in the register so as to perform the second effect is performed as the stage effect of the current suspension notice.

  After performing the processing in step S3006 or step S3008, in steps S3009 to S3015, the same processing as the processing in steps S2001 to S2009 is performed.

  If the step counter is equal to or more than "3" in step S3003, if the second step flag is not stored in step S3005, or after executing the processing in step S3015, 1 is read from the step counter in step S3016. After performing the subtraction process, the effect setting process for the final notice is ended.

  Further, as described in the first embodiment, at the start of the game round, the hold notice can be set not only in the effect setting processing for the hold notice but also in the effect setting processing for reach generation (FIG. 32). . Therefore, hereinafter, a process when a hold notice is set in the effect setting process for reach generation in the present embodiment will be described with reference to a flowchart of FIG.

  That is, if it is determined in step S1001 that the reach display of the current game is not the super reach display but the normal reach display, it is determined in step S3101 whether or not a notice condition satisfaction flag is stored. If it is determined that the notice condition satisfaction flag is not stored, the process proceeds to step S1012. On the other hand, if it is determined that the notice condition satisfaction flag is stored, the process advances to step S3102 to determine whether the overlap flag is stored. If the duplication flag is stored, the duplication notice setting process is performed in step S3103, and then the effect setting process for generating reach is ended. The duplication flag and the duplication notice setting process will be described later in detail.

  If the duplication flag is not stored in step S3102, it is determined in step S3104 whether or not the step counter is “3” or more or “0”. If it is determined that the stage counter is equal to or more than “3” or “0”, the process proceeds to step S1012, and the suspension notice is not performed. In this case, the process proceeds to step S1012 after decrementing the stage counter by one.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3104 that the stage counter is “2” or “1”, the process proceeds to step S3105. In step S3105, it is determined whether or not the stage counter is "2". If it is "2", it is determined in step S3106 whether or not the second stage flag is stored. If the second stage flag is not stored, the process proceeds to step S1012, and the suspension notice is not performed this time. In this case, the process proceeds to step S1012 after decrementing the stage counter by one. If the second stage flag is stored in step S3106, in step S3107, a process of storing the first stage as a stage effect of the current suspension notice in the register is executed.

  If it is determined in step S3105 that the stage counter is “1” instead of “2”, it is determined in step S3108 whether the second stage flag is stored. If the second stage flag is not stored, the process proceeds to step S3107, and the first effect is stored in the register. If the second stage flag is stored in step S3108, in step S3109, a process of storing in the register so that the second effect is performed as the stage effect of the current suspension notice is performed.

  After executing the process of step S3107 or step S3109, a process of decrementing the stage counter by 1 is executed in step S3110, and the same processes as steps S1005 to S1011 are executed in steps S311 to S3117. Then, the effect setting process for generating the reach is ended.

  As described above, the present embodiment is configured so that the suspension notice is executed in the game time one or two times before the game time related to the reservation information that triggered the establishment of the notice condition, The effect selected by the effect selection process is executed as a stage effect of the suspension notice in the game times one or two times before the same. Further, as described above, in the stage effect of the suspension notice, when the second-stage notice is selected, the degree of expectation that a jackpot result will be obtained after that is set higher than in the first-stage notice. For this reason, it is assumed that the player expects that, in the next game round in which the hold notice with the first effect is executed, the hold notice with the second effect is executed instead of developing to reach display. Is done. In this manner, in a configuration in which a staged effect is provided in the suspension notice as in the present embodiment, the player expects that the effect is further developed.

  However, depending on the situation where the hold condition is satisfied, the above-described staged effect may be performed based on the number of pieces of hold information related to the game times executed before the game time related to the hold information that triggered the hold condition to be satisfied. It can be difficult to do. That is, when the number of the hold information is small, there may be a disadvantage that it is not possible to suitably execute the staged effect for each game. Therefore, in the present embodiment, a characteristic configuration is provided in order to eliminate such inconvenience. Hereinafter, the characteristic configuration will be described.

  FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing the replacement process in the present embodiment. As described above, the replacement process is a process executed in step S1216 in the changing process (FIG. 35), and is a process performed when a notice condition is satisfied during execution of a game round. FIG. 58 shows a process executed in place of the replacement process shown in FIG.

  In the replacement process according to the present embodiment, first, in step S3201, it is determined whether or not the stage counter is equal to or greater than “2”. When the stage counter is "2" or more, that is, without including the currently executed game times, the hold related to the game times executed prior to the game times related to the hold information that triggered the establishment of the notice condition is held. If two or more pieces of information are included, the main replacement process ends. In such a case, since there are two or more game times to be executed before the game times related to the hold information that triggered the establishment of the advance notice condition, any stage notice has been selected by the stage effect selection process. Even before this, the selected stage notice can be executed before the game times related to the hold information that triggered the establishment of the notice condition. Therefore, it is not necessary to give a suspension notice in the currently executed game.

  If the step counter is less than “2” in step S3201, the step counter becomes “1” or “0”. By the way, unlike the case of step S3003 in the above-described effect setting process for holding notice (FIG. 56), a negative determination in step S3201 includes a case where the stage counter is “0”. This is because the replacement process is executed in the changing process (FIG. 35), and the effect setting process for the suspension notice is executed in the changing start process (FIG. 29). . That is, this replacement process is a process performed after the stage counter is decremented by one, and the game times executed prior to the game times related to the hold information that triggered the establishment of the notice condition are currently being executed. This includes the case where only the number of games is played (the stage counter is “0”).

  If the step counter is “1” or “0” in step S3201, the process advances to step S3202 to determine whether the step counter is “1” and the second step flag is not stored. The case where the stage counter is “1” and the second stage flag is not stored means that the game times related to the hold information that triggered the establishment of the notice condition without including the game times currently being executed are included. This means that there is one piece of hold information related to the game run executed before, and the first stage notice has been selected by the stage effect selection process. In this case, instead of the currently executed game time, the hold notice with the first effect may be executed in the next game time, and thus the replacement process is terminated as it is.

  The case where a negative determination is made in step S3202 means that the stage counter is “1” and the second stage flag is stored, or that the stage counter is “0”. By satisfying the condition, the process advances to step S3203. In step S3203, it is determined whether the stage counter is “0” and the second stage flag is stored. The negative determination in step S3203 means that the stage counter is "1" and the second stage flag is stored, or that the stage counter is "0" and the second stage flag is stored. Not mean. In the former case, the suspension notice with the first effect should be performed in the currently executed game time, and the suspension notice with the second effect should be performed in the next game time. This means that a suspension notice accompanied by the first effect should be performed in the game times. That is, in any case, it is necessary to give a suspension notice accompanied by the first effect in the game currently being executed. Therefore, if a negative determination is made in step S3203, it is determined in step S3204 whether or not an invalid notice flag is stored. If it is determined that the invalid notice flag is stored, the invalid notice flag is set in step S3205. In step S3206, the release flag is stored. In step S3207, the target movable objects 170 to 173 are stored. In step S3208, the notice execution flag is stored. The processing of steps S3204 to S3208 is the same as the processing of steps S2101 to S2105, and the special suspension notice is executed in the currently executed game round by these processings.

  If it is determined in step S3204 that the ineffective notice flag is not stored, a stop result correction process is performed in step S3209. The processing in step S3209 is substantially the same as the processing in step S2106 (FIG. 45). However, in the present embodiment, in the second correction processing (FIG. 49) or the third correction processing (FIG. 50), the processing when it is determined that the suspension notice cannot be executed in the currently executed game time is different. I have. Therefore, the second correction process and the third correction process according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to the flowcharts in FIGS. 59 and 60. FIG. 59 shows a process executed in place of FIG. 49, and FIG. 60 shows a process executed in place of FIG. Also, since the changes in the second correction process and the third correction process are the same, in the following description, the second correction process and the third correction process will be described collectively.

  That is, in the second correction process (FIG. 59), the second correction condition is not satisfied in step S2404, and in the third correction process (FIG. 60), the fourth correction condition is not satisfied in step S2504, and the sub display region Rs If it is determined that the holding advance notice cannot be executed in the game currently being executed even if the symbols of the above are included, step S3301 is performed in the second correction processing (FIG. 59), and step S3401 is performed in the third correction processing (FIG. 60). It is determined whether the stage counter is "1" and the second stage flag is stored. The case where the affirmative determination is made in step S3301 or step S3401 means that although the hold notice cannot be executed in the currently executed game time, the stage effect must be developed to the second stage in the next game time. I do. In this case, in the second correction process (FIG. 59), the process of storing the overlap flag in the RAM 244 is executed in step S3302 in the third correction process (FIG. 60) in step S3402, and then these correction processes are ended. . The overlap flag is a flag for the MPU 242 to know that both the suspension notice with the first effect and the suspension notice with the second effect should be executed in one game time. When a negative determination is made in step S3301 or step S3401, that is, when the stage counter is “0” and the second stage flag is not stored, the correction process ends as it is.

  Returning to the description of the replacement process (FIG. 58), after executing the process of step S3208 or step S3209, it is determined in step S3210 whether or not a notice execution flag is stored. If the notice execution flag is stored in step S3210, it means that the suspension notice can be executed in the game currently being executed in any of the above processes. In this case, in step S3211, a process of storing the first effect as a stage effect of the current suspension notice in the register is executed, and then the replacement process is ended.

  If the stage counter is “0” in step S3203 and the second stage flag is stored, the process for correcting duplicate notice is executed in step S3212, and the process for replacement is ended. .

  Here, by storing the overlap flag in the second correction process (FIG. 59) and the third correction process (FIG. 60) as described above, the change start process ( An affirmative determination is made in step S3001 of the effect setting process for the pending notice in FIG. 29) (FIG. 56), and the duplicate notice setting process is performed in step S3002. Further, an affirmative determination is made in step S3102 of the effect setting processing for reach generation (FIG. 57), and an overlap notice setting processing is performed in step S3103. Note that the processing in step S3002 and the processing in step S3103 are the same processing. Therefore, the outline of the duplication notice is briefly described first, then the duplication notice setting processing in steps S3002 and S3103 will be described, and then the duplication notice correction processing (step S3212) in the replacement processing (FIG. 58) will be described. I do.

  The overlap notice is an effect in which a plurality of suspension notices are performed without changing the stop result in one game round. In this overlap notice, the mode of the stop result is determined to be a special mode in which the same two types of symbols are stopped in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. As a special mode, as shown in the schematic diagram of FIG. 61A, a mode in which a reach line of a cross line reach formed over the main display region Rm and the sub display region Rs is formed, and A first special mode in which two reach symbols forming a reach line of the same cross line reach in column Z2 are stopped so as not to have any jackpot result, and as shown in the schematic diagram of FIG. In the display areas Rs1 and Rs2, a second special mode in which one of the two main symbols constituting the reservation notice is stopped and displayed is set.

<Duplicate notice as the first special mode>
Hereinafter, the flow of the overlap notice that is the first special mode will be described with reference to the schematic diagrams of FIGS. 62 and 63. In the overlapping notice as the first special mode, as shown in FIG. 62 (a), for example, the notice symbol is a main symbol (specific symbol) with “7”, and the main symbol with “7”. To form a reach line on the right-right ascending line L7, and to form a reach line on the right-ascending line L8 by the main symbol with "6". In the middle symbol row Z2, "6" is formed on the middle line L2. It is assumed that the mode in which the main symbol with the symbol "7" stops and the main symbol with the symbol "7" on the right inactive line L6 stops. In this case, the first movable auditory 170 and the second movable auditory 171 are set as the movable auditoriums to be opened, and the opening order of the first movable auditory 170 is first controlled to be opened, Next, the second movable role 171 is set to be opened and controlled. Further, the opening timing of the first movable auditory 170 and the second movable auditory 171 is set such that the opening control is performed after all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are stopped and displayed.

  As shown in FIG. 62 (b), when the opening of the first movable auditory piece 170 is controlled at the timing of t1 after all the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 are stopped and displayed, the main symbol ("6") is added. A reservation notice by a non-specific symbol) is established, and a first effect is generated at this timing. Further, at the subsequent timing t2, as shown in FIG. 62 (c), when the opening of the second movable auditory piece 171 is controlled, the main symbol (specified) to which "7" is set as the symbol for advance notice ), And a second effect is generated at this timing. In this case, after all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are stopped and displayed, the first movable auditory 170 and the second movable auditory 171 are controlled to be continuously opened, and a stage effect (first effect and second effect) is accordingly performed. Is generated, it is possible to realize a step-by-step suspension notice without changing the stop result in one game round, and a surprising effect can be achieved.

  Here, even in the same stop mode as in FIGS. 62 (a) to 62 (c), when the notice symbol is a main symbol (non-specific symbol) to which “6” is added, the overlapping announcement is performed. The opening timing of the movable character is different.

  That is, as shown in FIG. 63 (a), a reach line is formed on the right lower right line L7 by the main symbol with “7”, and the right upper right line L8 with the main symbol with “6”. Form a reach line, and in the middle symbol row Z2, the main symbol with the "6" attached to the middle line L2 stops, and the main symbol with the "7" attached to the right inactive line L6 stops. Is selected. In this case, the first movable auditory 170 and the second movable auditory 171 are set as the movable auditory to be opened, and the opening order thereof is opposite to the case where the specific symbol is a notice symbol. Thus, it is set so that the opening of the second movable role 171 is controlled first, and then the opening of the first movable role 170 is controlled. Further, the opening timing of the first movable auditory 170 and the second movable auditory 171 is set such that the opening control is performed after all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are stopped and displayed.

  As shown in FIG. 63 (b), when the opening and closing of the second movable role 171 is controlled at the timing of t1 after all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are stopped and displayed, a stop display is displayed below the right inactive line L6. Although the main symbol indicated by “7” becomes visible, none of the main symbols appear in all the symbol columns Z1 to Z3, and the reservation notice is not established. As shown in FIG. 63 (c), when the opening and closing of the first movable auditory piece 170 is controlled at the subsequent timing of t2, the main symbol with "6" in the upper row on the right non-effective line L6 becomes visible. At the same time, the main symbol with "7" in the middle becomes visible. In this case, the suspension notice by “6” and “7” is established at the same time, and the first effect and the second effect occur simultaneously as the stage effects. Note that the second effect is generated for a main symbol to which "6" which is a symbol for notice is added.

As described above, when the notice symbol is a non-specific symbol (in this example, “6”) and normally corresponds to the jackpot result, a plurality of suspension notices are simultaneously established in the stage notice. . This means that the preliminary notice is established for the main symbol (specific symbol) corresponding to the odd-variable jackpot result to which the odd number is given as the first stage, and the regular jackpot result for the announcement symbol with the even number attached in the second stage. If the hold notice is established for the corresponding main symbol (non-specific symbol), the player may be discouraged if the jackpot result that can be expected thereafter is demoted from the probable jackpot result to the normal jackpot result. Because there is. On the other hand, if the suspension notice is established in the non-specific symbol as the first stage and the suspension notice is established in the other non-specific symbol as the second stage, it may be necessary to change the stopped symbol again. In addition, since it is necessary to change the symbol arrangement and the number of stopped symbols without the need for re-variation, the configuration may eventually become complicated. Therefore, by simultaneously establishing a plurality of reservation notices by the non-specific symbol and the specific symbol, and generating a preview symbol in the non-specific symbol in the second performance, without discouraging the player. It is possible to make the notice symbol recognized.
<Duplicate notice in the second special mode>
In the following, the flow of the overlap notice of the second special mode will be described with reference to the schematic diagram of FIG. As a second special mode, as shown in FIG. 64 (a), for example, the notice symbol is a main symbol with “7” added, and the stop result is “7” in the lower part of the right inactive line. The attached main symbol is stopped and displayed, and the main symbol with “7” added to the middle line of the middle line L2 is stopped and displayed. The upper line of the left line L1, the middle line of the middle line L2, and the right ineffective line L6 are displayed. It is assumed that a mode in which the main symbol (specific symbol) with “7” added to the lower row is stopped and displayed is selected. In this case, the main symbol (non-specific symbol) in which “6” is added to the upper stage of the right line L3, the middle stage of the left ineffective line L9, and the lower stage of the middle line L2 is stopped. As the movable roles to be opened, a second movable role 171, a third movable role 172, and a fourth movable role 173 are set, and the order of opening them is as follows. The opening is controlled so that the fourth movable role 173 is controlled, and then the second movable role 171 is controlled to be released. In addition, the opening timing of the second movable auditory piece 171, the third movable auditory substance 172, and the fourth movable auditorium 173 is set such that the opening control is performed after all the symbol rows Z <b> 1 to Z <b> 3 are stopped and displayed. ing.

  As shown in FIG. 64 (b), the third movable auditors 172 and the fourth movable auditors 173 are controlled to be opened at the timing of t1 after all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are stopped and displayed, thereby obtaining “6”. A reservation notice is established by the main symbol marked with, and a first effect is generated at the same time. Then, at the subsequent timing of t2, as shown in FIG. 64 (c), the second movable auditory 171 is controlled to be opened, whereby the holding notice by the main symbol with “7” is established, and at the same time, the second Direction occurs.

  The stop result in the second special mode is set to be selected only when the notice symbol is a specific symbol. In the stop result in the first special mode as described above, one (or two) symbols constituting the suspension notice can be visually recognized by opening and controlling one movable role, and the suspension notice is established. However, in the stop result that is the second special mode, it is necessary to open and control different movable characters, and it is not possible to visually recognize the symbols that constitute a plurality of reservation notices and to establish those reservation notices. caused by. In this case, even if a plurality of movable characters are controlled to be opened simultaneously, it is assumed that the player visually recognizes each movable character at different timing as long as the movable characters are arranged at different positions, As a result, it is assumed that the symbols existing behind the movable role are also visually recognized at different timings. In this case, for example, if the player checks a specific symbol first and then checks a non-specific symbol, it may be disappointing that the jackpot result that can be expected thereafter has been demoted from a probable jackpot result to a normal jackpot result. Absent. In particular, in the case of the stop result in the second special mode, since the symbols that stop in separate areas such as the left and right sub-display areas Rs1 and Rs2 are used, there is a possibility that each symbol is confirmed at different timings as described above. Get higher. Therefore, by selecting the second special mode only when the notice symbol is a specific symbol corresponding to the probability change jackpot result, it is possible to reduce the possibility of discouraging the player. Becomes

  As shown in the flowchart of FIG. 65, in the overlap notice setting processing in the hold notice effect setting processing, first, in step S3501, the processing of setting the effect pattern of the current game to the overlap notice is executed, and in step S3502, Execute stop result determination processing for duplicate notice. In the overlap result stop result determination process, the stop result in the current overlap notice effect is determined by using the overlap notice stop result table and the notice design provided in the various table areas 243a of the ROM 243. In the stop result table for the duplicate notice, the design for notice and the stop result in the special mode are set in one-to-one correspondence with each other as an arbitrary combination. In addition, movable objects 170 to 173 to be opened and controlled are set in accordance with the stop result of the special mode, and the opening order and opening timing are also set. In addition, as described above, when the notice symbol is a specific symbol, the first special mode and the second special mode are set so as to be selected, and when the preview symbol is a non-specific symbol, The first special mode is selected. In the case where the notice symbol is a non-specific symbol and the first special mode is selected, the order of opening movable movable objects 170 to 173 depends on the specific symbol and the non-specific symbol at the second opening timing as described above. It is set so that the suspension notice is established at the same time.

  In a succeeding step S3503, a process of storing in the register that the first effect and the second effect are performed as the stage effect of the current preliminary notice is executed. Then, in step S3504, a process of storing the execution timing of each of these effects (opening control of movable movable objects 170 to 173 and effect effects) in a register with reference to the above-described stop result table for duplicate notice is executed. In a succeeding step S3505, a process of storing an open flag is executed, and in a step S3506, a process of storing a notice execution flag is executed. Accordingly, in the changing process, the opening control of the corresponding movable auditors 170 to 173 is performed at the timing stored in step S3504, and at the same time, a stage effect is performed on the symbol display device 161.

  Next, a description will be given, with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 66, of the duplication notice correction processing (step S3212) performed in the replacement processing (FIG. 58).

  In the overlapping notice correction process, in step S3601, it is determined whether the currently executed game time is a game time corresponding to the super reach display. When it is determined that the game number corresponds to the super-reach display, the duplication notice correction processing is terminated. If it is determined that it is not the game time corresponding to the super reach display, in step S3602, a process of grasping a notice symbol is executed. Then, in step S3603, it is determined whether or not all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are changing at high speed in the currently executed game times. If an affirmative determination is made in step S3603, the release flag is stored in step S3604, and in step S3605, it is determined whether or not the currently executed game time is a game time corresponding to the normal reach display. If it is determined that the game time corresponds to the normal reach display, a flirting effect flag is stored in step S3606.

  If it is determined in step S3605 that the game time does not correspond to the game reach corresponding to the normal reach display, or after the process of step S3606 has been executed, in step S3607, the fourth table as the fourth-stage correction information group is read from the various table areas 243a of the ROM 243. Referring to the stage correction table, in the following step S3608, address information for the fourth correction is stored, and in step S3609, the first and second effects are stored as registers in the register so as to execute the stage effect of the suspension notice. In step S3610, a process of storing the movable movable objects 170 to 173 to be executed is executed.

  As shown in FIG. 67 (a), the fourth stage correction table has a pair of an arbitrary combination of the initial effect pattern information and the notice pattern information except for the case where the super reach display occurs. The information of the effect pattern for the fourth correction and the information of the stop result are set in correspondence with 1, and the address information is further set in correspondence with the information of the effect pattern and the stop result for the fourth correction. I have. In this case, all the information of the effect pattern for the fourth correction is set as the information of the effect pattern after the lapse of the period T1 from the start of the change. However, the information of each fourth modification effect pattern is set so as not to change the variable display time in the effect pattern set initially.

  In addition, all pieces of information on the stop result for the fourth correction are determined as the stop result in the first special mode or the second special mode. Further, the information of the effect pattern for the fourth correction in the fourth-stage correction table includes the information of the movable characters 170 to 173 to be controlled to be opened in the stop result in the special mode and the opening order thereof, as a notice symbol. Are set in a one-to-one correspondence with the above information. In addition, the generation timing of the stage effects (first effect and second effect) in the suspension notice is determined in accordance with the opening order of the movable auditors 170 to 173.

  After executing the process of step S3610, a process of storing the execution timing of each effect (opening control of the movable role, step effect) in a register is executed in step S3611, based on the fourth stage correction table. . After that, the notice execution flag is stored in step S3612, and the present overlapping notice correction process ends.

  Explaining the relationship between the above-mentioned overlap notice and the swaying effect, the swaying effect when the overlapping notice is performed is set so as to be performed first on a movable character that is controlled to be opened. That is, with reference to the example shown in FIG. 62 described above, after all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are stopped and displayed, a stir effect is performed to determine whether or not the first movable auditory 170 performs opening control. Thereafter, the first movable role 170 is controlled to be opened, and the second movable role 171 is subsequently controlled to be released. However, the configuration of this effect is arbitrary as long as the fluctuation display time of the game times is not changed.For example, in the case where a duplicate notice is performed, it is set so that the directing is performed with a shorter length than usual, and each of the effects is set. Before the movable members 170 to 173 are controlled to be opened, a short flirting effect may be performed.

  In addition, as described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the so-called stationary display is performed from the stop display of all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 to the final display in the case of the pachinko machine 10 when the flirting effect is not performed. The standby time is set to be relatively long at 2 seconds. Therefore, for example, in the overlap notice, even if all the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 are stopped and displayed, it takes 1 second for the first stage effect and 1 second for the second stage effect, and the respective effects are played. It is set to the extent that people can confirm it, so that it is possible to produce directly.

  Returning to the description of the correction processing for overlap notice (FIG. 66), if it is determined in step S3603 that all the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 are not changing at high speed, the process proceeds to step S3613. In step S3613, it is determined whether or not the lower symbol row Z3 is changing at high speed. If the lower symbol row Z3 is changing at high speed, the process proceeds to step S3614, and it is determined whether the fifth correction condition is satisfied. Here, the fifth correction condition is satisfied when any of the main symbols is stopped or is scheduled to be stopped in the upper part of the middle line L2, regardless of the design for notice. When any of the main symbols is stopped or is not scheduled to stop at the upper stage of the middle line L2, the correction condition is satisfied when the notice symbol is a specific symbol. Is set to be determined to be

  If it is determined in step S3614 that the fifth correction condition is satisfied, the same processing as in steps S3604 to S3606 is performed in steps S3615 to S3617.

  In step S3618, a fifth-stage correction table as a fifth-stage correction information group is referenced from the ROM 243, and in step S3619, the fifth correction address information is stored. A process for storing in the register so as to execute the first effect and the second effect is executed. In step S3621, a process for storing the movable movable objects 170 to 173 to be executed is executed.

  The fifth stage correction table is similar to the fourth stage correction table, as shown in FIG. 67 (b). The information of the fifth modification effect pattern and the information of the stop result are set in one-to-one correspondence with the arbitrary combination of The address information is set in correspondence with. In this case, the information of the effect pattern for the fifth correction is all set as the information of the effect pattern after the period of T2 has elapsed from the start of the change. However, the information of each fifth modification effect pattern is set so as not to change the variable display time in the effect pattern set initially.

  In addition, the information of the stop result for the fifth correction is all defined as the stop result in the first special mode or the second special mode, similarly to the information of the stop result for the fourth correction. Further, in the information of the effect pattern for the fifth correction, the information of the movable characters 170 to 173 to be opened and controlled in the stop result in the special mode and the opening order thereof are one pair with respect to the information of the notice symbol. 1 is set correspondingly. In addition, the generation timing of the stage effects (first effect and second effect) in the suspension notice is determined in accordance with the opening order of the movable auditors 170 to 173.

  After executing the process of step S3621, a process of storing the execution timing of each effect (opening control of the movable role, step effect) in a register is executed based on the fifth stage correction table in step S3622. . Then, after storing the notice execution flag in step S3623, the present duplicate notice correction processing ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3614 that the fifth correction condition is not satisfied, the correction is not corrected to the overlap notice but is also corrected to a hold notice (normal hold notice or special hold notice) that is not a duplicate notice. The duplication notice correction process ends without any occurrence. In the present embodiment, a step-by-step suspension notice is set as described above, and the second-stage notice is set so that the degree of expectation of a jackpot result becomes higher after the first-stage notice.

  In this embodiment, it is set so that the degree of expectation is higher when the reach display is performed without the suspension notice being performed than when the reach display is performed without progressing only to the first stage. Therefore, when the fifth correction condition is not satisfied as described above, the holding notice is not executed even if the holding condition is satisfied, so that the degree of attention to the subsequent reach display is appropriately increased. It becomes possible.

  Returning to the description of the correction processing for overlap notice (FIG. 66), when it is determined in step S3613 that the lower symbol row Z3 is not changing at high speed, the flow proceeds to step S3624. In step S3624, it is determined whether or not the middle symbol row Z2 is changing at high speed. If it is determined that high-speed fluctuation is being performed, the correction processing for duplication notice is terminated as it is. That is, if the middle symbol row Z2 is performing high-speed fluctuation, the suspension notice is performed even if the suspension condition is satisfied. There is no.

  If the middle symbol row Z2 is changing at high speed in step S3624, it is determined in step S3625 whether the sixth correction condition is satisfied. The sixth correction condition is satisfied regardless of which of the symbols for the advance notice when the symbols stopped or scheduled to be stopped in the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 correspond to the first special mode. If the same symbol exists in each of the symbols stopped or scheduled to be stopped in the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3, the condition is that the notice symbol is a specific symbol. Is set to hold.

  If the sixth correction condition is satisfied in step S3625, the release flag is stored in step S3626. In step S3627, a sixth-stage correction table as a sixth-stage correction information group is referred to from the ROM 243, the sixth correction address information is stored in step S3628, and further, in step S3629, the effect of the suspension notice is produced. A process for storing the first effect and the second effect in the register is executed, and in step S3630, a process for storing the movable movable objects 170 to 173 to be executed is executed.

  The sixth stage correction table is similar to the fourth and fifth stage correction tables, as shown in FIG. 67 (c). As shown in FIG. The information of the effect pattern for the sixth correction and the information of the stop result are set in one-to-one correspondence with an arbitrary combination with the information of the symbol, and further, the effect pattern for the sixth correction and the stop. Address information is set corresponding to the result information. All the information on the effect patterns for the sixth correction are set as the information on the effect patterns after the period of T3 has elapsed from the start of the change, but the information on the effect patterns for each sixth correction was initially set. It does not change the variable display time in the effect pattern.

  In addition, the information of the stop result for the sixth correction, like the information of the stop result for the fourth and fifth corrections, is a special mode in which the same two types of symbols are stopped in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. Specifically, the stop result is determined to be the first special mode or the second special mode. Further, in the information of the effect pattern for the sixth correction, the information of the movable characters 170 to 173 to be controlled to be opened in the stop result in the special mode and the opening order thereof are one pair with the information of the notice symbol. 1 is set correspondingly. In addition, the generation timing of the stage effects (first effect and second effect) in the suspension notice is determined in accordance with the opening order of the movable auditors 170 to 173.

  After executing the process of step S3630, a process of storing the execution timing of each effect (opening control of the movable role, step effect) in a register is executed in step S3631 based on the sixth stage correction table. . After that, the notice execution flag is stored in step S3632, and the overlapping notice correction processing ends.

  If it is determined in step S3625 that the sixth correction condition is not satisfied, for the same reason as in step S3614, without performing a notice other than the overlap notice, the present overlap notice correction processing is performed as it is. To end.

  In this way, when the notice condition is satisfied during the execution of the game time, in the process for changing, the game time related to the game time executed before the game time related to the hold information that triggered the establishment of the notice condition is related. The stage effect is set according to the number of the hold information and the state of the fluctuation display of the currently executed game times. Then, in the case where a plurality of (two) suspension notices should be executed in the currently executed game time, the effect and stop result of the currently executed game time are corrected to the duplicate notice.

  Next, the number of pieces of hold information related to the game times executed before the game times related to the hold information that triggered the establishment of the notice condition, the type of the stage effect selected by the stage effect selection process, and With reference to FIG. 68, each relationship between the execution condition (situation) as to whether or not the hold advance notice can be executed in the game times described above will be described.

  First, if the number of pieces of hold information related to the game times executed before the game times related to the hold information that triggered the establishment of the notice condition is two or more, that is, two or three, the stage effect selection is performed. Regardless of which stage effect is selected by the process, the stage effect can be executed in a game time executed before the game time related to the hold information that triggered the establishment of the notice condition. For this reason, regardless of whether or not the effect of the currently executed game can be corrected to the suspension notice, the suspension notice is not performed in the currently executed game. Then, according to the selected stage effect, the suspension notice with the stage effect is started from the game time one or two times before the game time related to the hold information that triggered the establishment of the notice condition in accordance with the selected stage effect.

  If the number of pending information related to the game times executed before the gaming time related to the pending information that triggered the establishment of the advance notice condition is 1, if the number of the held information related to the game times is one, the selected stage effect and the pending game times are executed. The effect from the currently executed game time differs depending on whether or not the correction is possible. In other words, if the selected stage effect is the first stage advance notice, it is not necessary to execute the suspension advance notice in the currently executed game time, so the hold advance notice accompanying the first effect is executed in the next game time. When the second stage notice is selected, if a pending notice (hereinafter, also simply referred to as “single notice”) that is not a duplicate notice in the game play being executed can be corrected, the game play being executed is solely performed. The first effect is executed as a stage effect with correction to the notice. Then, in the next game round, the suspension notice with the second effect is executed.

  On the other hand, if it is not possible to modify to the single announcement in the running game time, the preliminary announcement without the first effect and the second effect is executed in the next game time without modifying the pending announcement in the current game time. . Thus, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that the execution of the second stage notice is limited despite the fact that the second stage notice has been selected in the stage effect selection process.

  When the number of the hold information related to the game times executed before the game time related to the hold information that triggered the establishment of the notice condition is 0, it corresponds to the stage effect selected in the game time being executed. Only when it is possible to modify the notice, the reservation notice is executed. In other words, when the selected stage effect is the first stage notice, the currently executed game times can be modified to the single notice if it can be modified, and if not, the modification is not performed. Also, when the selected stage effect is the second stage announcement, if the game execution being executed can be corrected to the duplicate announcement, it is corrected to that, and if not, the correction is not made. In other words, even if it is possible to correct the stage effect on the side not selected by the stage effect selection process, it can be said that the configuration is not corrected. With this configuration, the selection rate set in the stage effect selection process is suppressed from being changed by uncertain information such as the notice condition establishment timing, and the balance of the degree of attention set for each effect is broken. Can be suppressed.

  According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects can be obtained.

  When the suspension notice is executed in successive game times, a stage effect is generated in each suspension notice. According to such a configuration, it is assumed that the player expects that the longer the reservation notice is, the longer the jackpot result will be. Thereby, it is possible to increase the degree of attention of each game round.

  In the above configuration, when one of the main symbols of a plurality of types is stopped in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the other main symbols are also stopped in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, as a mode of the stop result of the game round. Special modes that can be set are set. This makes it possible to execute a plurality of suspension notices in one game. Therefore, even when there is little pending information related to the game times executed before the game times related to the pending information that triggered the advance notice conditions when the preliminary conditions are satisfied, the stop result in the above-described special mode is obtained. By doing so, a plurality of reservation notices can be executed in one game round, so that the above-described continuous effect can be established in one game round. Therefore, the degree of attention to the game can be appropriately increased.

  In the case of the stop result in the special mode, at least some of the symbols constituting the reservation notice are shielded by the movable auditors 170 to 173, and the movable auditors 170 to 173 are opened. As a result, a hold notice composed of symbols that can be visually recognized by opening the door is established. Thereby, the degree of attention to the operation of the movable auditors 170 to 173 is increased, and the type of the reservation notice (the reservation notice by the specific symbol or the reservation notice by the non-specific symbol) that is established by confirming the operation as the player is established. ) Can be grasped, and in a configuration in which a plurality of suspension notices can be realized in one game round, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that the type of the suspension notice that has been established is difficult to understand and confused.

  Further, as a stop result in a special mode, a stop result in a first special mode in which a plurality of (two) suspension notices can be established by operating one movable role, and a plurality of movable roles are respectively operated. And a stop result that is the second special mode in which the hold notice is established each time. Thereby, in the latter case, it has an effect of making it easy to understand the types of hold notices established as described above, and in the former case, it is possible to make it difficult to understand the types of hold notices that have been established. Become. As described above, basically, it is better for the player to easily understand the type of the held suspension notice. However, in some situations, it may be better to make it harder to understand, as in the former case. In other words, even though the notice symbol is a non-specified symbol, if the reservation notice by the non-specific symbol and the reservation notice by the specific symbol are established in one game round, after the reservation notice by the specific symbol is established, If the hold notice is established by the non-specific symbol, the player may be discouraged if the jackpot result that can be expected thereafter is demoted from the probable jackpot result to the normal jackpot result. Therefore, in such a case, it is difficult to understand which hold notice has been established by simultaneously establishing the hold notice with the non-specific symbol and the hold notice with the specific symbol, and the player is discouraged as described above. It is possible to suppress the situation.

<Fourth embodiment>
One of the features of the present embodiment is that a configuration is provided in which the degree of expectation of a jackpot result differs depending on the suspension notice suspension mode. Specifically, as the reservation notice, a first reservation notice, a second reservation notice, and a third reservation notice with different degrees of expectation to be the jackpot result are set. The first to third reservation notices are performed by stopping the same notice-corresponding symbols in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, as in the case of the reservation notices in the first to third embodiments. It is set so that the degree of expectation of the jackpot result after that differs depending on the area. First, with reference to the schematic diagram of FIG. 69, the outline of the relationship between the suspension mode of the suspension notice and the degree of expectation will be described.

  The first reservation notice refers to an effect in which the reservation notice is established using only the main symbols stopped in the main display area Rm, as shown in FIG. 69 (a). As shown in FIG. 69 (b), the second suspension notice uses a symbol that stops in the main display area Rm and a symbol that stops in one of the left and right sub-display areas Rs1 and Rs2. Is an effect that holds a preliminary notice. As shown in FIG. 69 (c), the third suspension notice is an effect in which the suspension notice is established using the symbol that stops in the main display area Rm and the symbol that stops in both the left and right sub-display areas Rs1 and Rs2. Say. If the notice condition is satisfied at the start of the game round, which hold notice is to be executed is determined based on the hold information which has triggered the notice condition. Then, in this case, the probability of selecting the third suspension notice is the highest when the trigger of establishment of the notice condition is a jackpot result, and the probability of selecting the first suspension notice when the trigger is off result. The highest setting.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the game times out of reach by the normal reach display are also treated as the suspension notice. That is, in the normal reach display, when the reach symbol of the middle symbol row Z2 stops in an area other than the reach line in the main display area Rm, the stop result of the game round is a stop result corresponding to the suspension notice. When the reach symbol stops in the sub-display area Rs in the middle symbol row Z2, the stop result of the game round corresponds to the suspension notice on condition that the corresponding movable auditors 170 to 173 are controlled to be opened. Stop results. Here, the mode of the reach display will be described with reference to the schematic diagram of FIG.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the normal reach display and the super reach display are set as the reach displays, and the degree of expectation that the super reach display is a big hit is set higher than the normal reach display. In the normal reach display, as described below, the variable display time determined by the main control device 81 (variable display time determined in step S508 in the variation start process in FIG. 19) corresponds to the middle symbol row Z2. The result of the stop is uniquely determined.

  In detail, first, when the fluctuation is started, as shown in FIG. 70 (a), the identification of each symbol displayed on the display screen G in all the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 is made impossible or difficult in appearance. High-speed fluctuation display (or first speed display) is executed. After a predetermined period has elapsed since the start of the change, first, the upper symbol row Z1 is set at a high speed so that the symbols displayed on the display screen G in the upper symbol row Z1 can be easily identified in appearance. The display is switched from the fluctuation display to the low-speed fluctuation display (or the second speed display slower than the first speed display). Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 70 (b), the variable display in the upper symbol row Z1 is stopped, and the identification of each symbol displayed in the display screen G in the lower symbol row Z3 is performed for the lower symbol row Z3. Is switched from the high-speed fluctuation display to the low-speed fluctuation display so as to make the appearance easier. Then, as shown in FIG. 70 (c), the variable display in the lower symbol row Z3 is stopped. In this case, the same symbol is stopped and displayed on any of the activated lines in the upper symbol column Z1 and the lower symbol column Z3. This timing is referred to as reach generation timing.

  At the reach occurrence timing, in the middle symbol row Z2, switching from the high-speed variation display to the low-speed variation display is performed so that the symbols displayed in the display screen G in the middle symbol row Z2 can be easily identified in appearance. At the same time, a symbol position adjustment process is executed. In the symbol position adjustment process, the symbol position of the middle symbol row Z2 is adjusted so that the symbol “1” of the middle symbol row Z2 passes through the middle line L2 at the timing of switching from the high-speed variation display to the low-speed variation display. You. Specifically, the display control device 212 outputs an internal command to the VDP 255 at the timing of the elapse of a predetermined period (6 seconds in the present embodiment) from the start of the change to the position of the predetermined symbol. . This predetermined period is set to be the same as the period from the fluctuation start timing to the reach occurrence timing. The symbol position adjustment processing is always executed when the reach display occurs. Specifically, the process of creating such an internal command is incorporated in a variation pattern for performing reach display. That is, the position of the symbol “1” in the middle symbol row Z2 at the reach generation timing is the same regardless of the reach display. In other words, the display mode of the middle symbol row Z2 at the start timing (reach occurrence timing) of the low-speed fluctuation display of the middle symbol row Z2 is determined.

  The period from the start of the fluctuation to the reach occurrence timing is a fixed period regardless of the stop result. Further, in the low-speed fluctuation display, at a constant speed (in this embodiment, the fluctuation display for one symbol is performed in 0.5 seconds) until a fluctuation end command is received (until the fluctuation display time elapses). A variable display is performed. As a result, the stop result of the middle symbol row Z2 is uniquely determined from the variable display time. Specifically, the various symbol area stop result information tables are stored in the various table areas 243a of the ROM 243. As shown in the schematic diagram of FIG. 71, in the middle symbol row stop result information table, the stop result of each middle symbol row Z2 is set to correspond to the information of each variable display time on a one-to-one basis. For example, when the main controller 81 sets the variable display time to be 16 seconds, it takes 6 seconds before the reach generation timing, that is, the variable display of the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 is stopped, and Since it takes 9.5 (= 0.5 × 19) seconds from the stop of the fluctuation display of the symbol array Z3 to the arrival of the symbol “1” in the intermediate symbol array Z2 again to the intermediate line L2, the total is 15.5. Seconds are required, so the remaining time is 0.5 seconds. Therefore, the symbol "1" is stopped at the position shifted left by one symbol from the middle line L2, that is, at the left line L1.

  From the above, in the case of the reach display, the period from the fluctuation start timing to the low-speed fluctuation display start timing is set to be constant, and the mode of the middle symbol row Z2 at the start timing of the low-speed fluctuation display is uniquely determined. Since the variable display speed of the low-speed variable display is constant, the stop result of the middle symbol row Z2 is determined according to the variable display time. Then, the stop information is specified based on the game result and the stop result of the middle symbol row Z2. As a result, as compared with the case where the stop result of the middle symbol row Z2 is not specified, possible stop results are limited, and thus the amount of information stored in advance as possible stop results can be reduced. .

  The super reach display is the same as the normal reach display from the fluctuation start timing until the fluctuation display of the middle symbol row Z2, which is the final stop symbol row at the reach generation timing, switches from the high-speed fluctuation display to the low-speed fluctuation display. Are different in the variable display mode. Specifically, the super-reach display temporarily stops in a predetermined area during the low-speed fluctuation display, and thereafter executes the generation and output processing of the internal command so as to switch from the high-speed fluctuation display to the low-speed fluctuation display again.

  That is, in the present embodiment, in the game time in which the super reach display is performed, first, the normal reach display is performed, and the reach symbol of the middle symbol row Z2 is temporarily stopped in a predetermined region that is a region different from the reach line, After that, it is set so that the super reach display is performed. In the present embodiment, an area that is shifted by one line from the reach line display to the fluctuation destination side is set as the above-described predetermined area that temporarily stops. That is, for example, as shown in FIG. 72A, when the normal reach display is performed on the right line L3, as shown in FIG. 72B, the reach symbol ("7" in the figure) is displayed in the middle symbol row Z2 as shown in FIG. After the attached main symbol) temporarily stops at the middle line L2, the variable display of the middle symbol row Z2 is started again, and the super reach display is performed as shown in FIG. 72 (c). In other words, in the reach symbol of the middle symbol row Z2, an area (developed point) where the normal reach display changes to the super reach display is predetermined.

  Here, the middle symbol sequence control process at the time of the reach executed by the MPU 252 of the display control device 212 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, in step S3701, it is determined whether or not it is the deceleration timing of the middle symbol row Z2. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the above-described timing of T3 has elapsed. If an affirmative determination is made in step S3701, the display control of the symbol display device 161 is performed in step S3702 so that the middle symbol row Z2 is decelerated from high-speed fluctuation to low-speed fluctuation. Specifically, a deceleration command as a deceleration command is output from the effect control device 82 to the display control device 212, and the display control device 212 determines whether or not the deceleration command has been received, thereby determining whether the deceleration timing of the middle symbol sequence Z2 has been reached. Can be determined.

  If it is determined in step S3701 that it is not the deceleration timing, or after the processing in step S3702 is performed, it is determined in step S3703 whether the current reach display is the super reach display. If it is determined that the display is the super-reach display, it is determined in step S3704 whether or not it is time to evolve from the normal-reach display to the super-reach display. Specifically, as described above, the timing at which the reach symbol of the middle symbol row Z2 fluctuates by one line from the reach line to the fluctuation destination side is the development timing from the normal reach display to the super reach display. If it is the development timing, in step S3705, the middle symbol row Z2 during the low-speed fluctuation is temporarily stopped and displayed, and then processing for developing to the super-reach display is executed.

  If it is determined in step S3703 that the display is the normal reach display, if it is determined in step S3704 that it is not the development timing, or if the processing in step S3705 is performed, the process advances to step S3706. In step S3706, it is determined whether it is the stop timing of the middle symbol row Z2, that is, whether it is the end timing of the variable display. If it is the stop timing, a process of stopping and displaying the middle symbol row Z2 is executed in step S3707. If a negative determination is made in step S3706, or after the processing in step S3707 is performed, the middle symbol row control processing at the time of reach is ended.

  Next, a description will be given of an effect setting process for a reservation notice in the present embodiment with reference to a flowchart of FIG. 74. As already described, the effect setting process for the suspension notice is a process executed in step S807 of the process for changing start (FIG. 29), and FIG. It shows the processing to be executed.

  First, in step S3801, a process for grasping a notice symbol is executed. In step S3802, based on the hold information stored in the hold area 244h, it is determined whether or not the hold information that triggered the establishment of the notice condition is a jackpot result. Specifically, with reference to each unit area of the hold area 244h, if the hold information corresponding to the jackpot result is stored in any of the unit areas, the trigger of establishment of the advance notice condition is a hold corresponding to the jackpot result. It is determined that it is information. If the information is the hold information corresponding to the jackpot result, the notice type lottery table for the jackpot is referred to in step S3803 in the various table areas 243a of the ROM 243. If the hold information is not the hold information corresponding to the jackpot result, In step S3804, reference is made to the advance notice type lottery table stored in the various table areas 243a of the ROM 243, and in subsequent step S3805, based on the notice type lottery table, the suspension notice to be executed in the current game round is executed. An announcement type lottery process for selecting a type is executed.

  In the jackpot announcement type lottery table, as shown in FIG. 75 (a), the probability of selecting the third suspension announcement is the highest, and the probability of selecting the first suspension announcement is the lowest. In this relation, the probability of selection is arbitrary, but in the present embodiment, the third reservation notice is selected with a probability of 60%, the second reservation notice is selected with a probability of 30%, and the first reservation notice is selected. The notice is set to be selected with a 10% probability. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 75 (b), the probability of selecting the first suspension notice is set to be the highest, and the probability of selecting the third reservation notice is set to be the lowest, as shown in FIG. 75 (b). . In this relation, the probability of selection is arbitrary, but in the present embodiment, the first reservation notice is selected with a probability of 60%, the second reservation notice is selected with a probability of 30%, and the third reservation notice is selected. The notice is set to be selected with a 10% probability.

  Returning to the description of the selection setting process for the hold announcement (FIG. 74), after executing the announcement type lottery process in step S3805, the process advances to step S3806. In step S3806, it is determined based on the processing result in step S3805 whether the first suspension notice has been selected. If the first suspension notice has been selected, in step S3807, a stop result determination process for the first suspension notice is executed. In the stop result determination process, the stop result of the current game round is determined with reference to the stop result table for the first suspension notice from the ROM 243. The stop result table for the first reservation notice is made by associating a notice symbol with an arbitrary combination for stopping and displaying a main symbol of the same type as the notice symbol in each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 in the main display region Rm. The stop result to be the first suspension notice corresponding to the notice symbol is determined by lottery or the like. Then, in subsequent step S3808, an effect pattern determination process for the first suspension notice is executed.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3806 that it is not the first suspension notice, the process advances to step S3809 to execute a stop result determination process for the second and third suspension notices. In the stop result determination process, the stop result of the current game round is determined by referring to one stop result table drawn in step S3805 from the stop result table for the second and third reservation advance notices from the ROM 243. The stop result table for the second reservation advance notice stops the notice design and the main design of the same type as the notice design in the main display region Rm and the sub display regions Rs1 and Rs2 on the left and right sides in each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3. An arbitrary combination to be displayed is associated with the combination, and a stop result serving as a second suspension notice corresponding to the design for notice is determined by lottery or the like. In addition, the stop result table for the third reservation advance notice includes a notice design and a main design of the same type as the notice design in the main display region Rm and the sub display regions Rs1 and Rs2 on both the left and right sides in the respective symbol columns Z1 to Z3. And an arbitrary combination to be stop-displayed is determined, and a stop result serving as a third suspension notice corresponding to the notice symbol is determined by lottery or the like. In the stop result tables for the second and third reservation advance notices, similarly to the stop result tables for the special reservation advance notice in the first to third embodiments, movable movable objects 170 to 173 to be drive-controlled are provided. Corresponding.

  Then, in step S3810, an effect pattern determination process for the second and third reservation advance notices is executed. In a succeeding step S3811, a process of storing an open flag is executed, and in a step S3812, a process of storing the movable characters 170 to 173 to be drive-controlled is executed. After executing the processing of step S3808 or step S3812, the processing of storing the notice execution flag is executed in step S3813, and then the effect setting processing for the present preliminary notice is ended.

  Next, the effect setting processing for reach generation in the present embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. As described above, the effect setting processing for reach generation is processing executed in step S805 of the fluctuation start processing (FIG. 29).

  In the effect setting processing for reach generation in the present embodiment, when it is determined in step S1001 that the reach of the current game is the normal reach, it is determined in step S3901 whether a notice condition satisfaction flag is stored. I do. If the notice condition satisfaction flag is stored, a process of grasping a notice symbol is executed in step S3902, and in step S3903, it is determined whether or not the opportunity of the notice condition establishment is a jackpot result. In step S3904 and step S3905, the corresponding notice type lottery table is acquired, and in step S3906, the notice type lottery process is executed. These processes are the same as the processes in steps S3801 to S3805.

  In the following step S3907, it is determined whether or not the first reservation advance notice is selected based on the processing result of the above step S3906. In step S3909, an effect pattern determination process for the first suspension notice at the time of the reach is executed. If it is not the first hold notice in step S3907, it is determined whether or not the second hold notice is selected in step S3910, and if it is the second hold notice, the reach time is determined in step S3911. Is executed, and in step S3912, an effect pattern determination process for the second hold advance notice at the time of the reach is executed. If it is not the second hold notice in step S3910, a stop result determination process for the third hold notice at the time of the reach is executed in step S3913, and an effect pattern for the third hold notice in the reach is made in step S3914. Execute the decision processing.

  Hereinafter, the stop result determination processing for various suspension notices at the time of the reach in steps S3908, S3911, and S3913 will be described in detail.

  First, in the stop result determination processing for the first hold notice at the time of the reach, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 77, in step S4001, the stop symbol of the middle symbol row Z2 is grasped. Specifically, in the middle symbol row Z2, it is grasped which symbol stops in the main display area Rm and the sub display area Rs. Then, in step S4002, a process of determining a reach symbol is executed. In this process, if the notice symbol grasped in step S3902 is a specific symbol, the specific symbol of the type grasped in step S4001 is determined as a reach symbol, and the notice symbol grasped in step S3902 is non-specific. If it is a specific symbol, a non-specific symbol of the type grasped in step S4001 is determined as a reach symbol.

  More specifically, for example, this is a case where the notice symbol is recognized as the specific symbol of the main symbol with “7” added in step S3902, and in step S4001, the main display region Rm is displayed in the middle symbol column Z2. Suppose that it has been grasped that the specific symbol of the main symbol with “3” added to one of the sub-display areas Rs is stopped. In this case, in step S4002, the main symbol with “3” is determined as the reach symbol. Also, for example, in the case where it is determined in step S3902 that the design for notice is a non-specific design which is a main design with “2” added thereto, in step S4001, the main display region Rm and the sub display It is assumed that it has been grasped that the non-specific symbol of the main symbol with “4” added to one of the display areas Rs stops. In this case, in step S4002, the main symbol with “4” is determined as the reach symbol.

  In the middle symbol row Z2, specific symbols and non-specific symbols are stopped and displayed in the main display area Rm and the sub-display area Rs in the game times. Specifically, when the specific symbol is stopped and displayed on the middle line L2 of the main display region Rm, the non-specific symbol is stopped and displayed on the left and right sub-display regions Rs, and the specific symbol is displayed on the left line L1 of the main display region Rm. Is stopped and displayed on the right line L3 of the main display area Rm.

  After performing the process of step S4002, the process of determining a reach line is performed in step S4003. In this process, any one of the activated lines L1 to L5 is determined as the reach line, and the symbol corresponding to the reach symbol determined in step S4002 is not stopped at the determined reach line, that is, it corresponds to the jackpot result. The reach line is determined so that no symbol combination is obtained. Then, in step S4004, it is determined whether the symbol corresponding to the reach symbol determined in step S4002 is to be stopped and displayed in the main display region Rm or the sub-display region Rs in the middle symbol row Z2. This processing is performed based on the processing result of step S4001.

  If it is determined in step S4004 that the symbol corresponding to the reach symbol is to be stopped and displayed in the main display area Rm, the stop result determination process for the first suspension notice is terminated. In this case, the suspension notice executed in the current game round is performed in a combination of only the symbols stopped and displayed in the main display area Rm, and becomes the first suspension notice.

  If it is determined in step S4004 that the symbol corresponding to the reach symbol is stopped and displayed in the sub-display area Rs, an open flag is stored in step S4005, and in step S4006, the movable movable objects 170 to 173 is executed. Then, after executing the process of storing the opening timing of the movable characters 170 to 173 stored in step S4006 as the end of reach in step S4007, the stop result determination process for the first suspension notice ends. . In this case, the hold notice executed in the current game round is the second hold notice because the reach line is formed in the main display area Rm and the reach symbol is stopped and displayed in the sub-display area Rs in the middle symbol row Z2. . That is, in this case, even if the hold notice drawn in the notice type lottery process (step S3906) is the first hold notice, the second hold notice is executed.

  Next, the stop result determination process for the second hold advance notification at the time of the reach executed in step S3911 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. As described above, the stop result determination process is a process executed when the second suspension notice is selected.

  In the stop result determination process for the second suspension notice, first, in step S4101, a process of grasping the stop symbol of the middle symbol row Z2 is executed. After that, in step S4102, a reach symbol determination process is executed, and in subsequent step S4103, the reach symbol determined in step S4102 is stopped and displayed in the main symbol region Zm in the main display region Rm or the sub-display region Rs. Is determined. The processing in steps S4101 to S4103 is the same as the processing in steps S4001, S4002, and S4004.

  If it is determined in step S4103 that the display is stopped and displayed in the main display region Rm, a process of determining a reach line as an inactive line is performed in step S4104. In this case, the reach line is determined so that the reach symbol is not stopped and displayed on the determined line in the middle symbol row Z2, that is, so as not to be a symbol combination corresponding to the jackpot result. Then, in step S4105, the release flag is stored, in step S4106, processing for storing the movable movable objects 170 to 173 is performed, and in step S4107, processing for storing the release timing as the start of reach is performed. Then, the stop result determination process for the second suspension notice is ended. As a result, in the suspension notice executed in the current game round, the reach line is formed in the sub display area Rs, and the reach symbol in the middle symbol row Z2 is stopped and displayed in the main display area Rm. That is, the suspension notice executed in the same game time is the second suspension notice.

  If it is determined in step S4103 that the display is stopped and displayed in the sub-display area Rs, a process of determining the reach line as an effective line is performed in step S4108. Also in this processing, the reach symbol is determined so that the reach symbol is not stopped and displayed on the determined line in the middle symbol row Z2, that is, the reach line is determined so as not to be a symbol combination corresponding to the jackpot result. The termination result determination process for the application is terminated. As a result, in the suspension notice executed in the current game round, the reach line is formed in the main display area Rm, and the reach symbol in the middle symbol row Z2 is stopped and displayed in the sub-display area Rs. That is, the suspension notice executed in the same game time is the second suspension notice.

  Next, the stop result determination process for the third reach suspension notice performed in step S3913 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. As described above, the stop result determination process is a process executed when the third suspension notice is selected.

  First, in step S4201, a process of grasping the stop symbol of the middle symbol row Z2 is executed, and in step S4202, a reach symbol determination process is executed. In step S4203, the reach symbol determined in step S4202 is the middle symbol. In the column Z2, it is determined which of the main display area Rm and the sub-display area Rs is stopped and displayed. The processing of steps S4201 to S4203 is the same as the processing of steps S4101 to S4103.

  If it is determined in step S4203 that the stop line is displayed in the main display area Rm, the stop result corresponding to the third suspension notice cannot be obtained regardless of whether the reach line is set to an active line or an inactive line. . Therefore, in this case, in steps S4204 to S4209, a process of changing the current game time so as to be not the reach generation effect but the third suspension notice accompanied by the fanning effect is executed. That is, in step S4204, a process of changing the current game time from the reach occurrence effect to the third hold notice when no reach occurs is executed, and in step S4205, a stop result determination process for the third hold notice is executed. Then, in step S4206, an effect pattern determination process for the third suspension notice is executed. The processing in steps S4205 and S4206 is the same as the processing for the third suspension notice in the processing in steps S3809 and S3810.

  In a succeeding step S4207, a process of storing an open flag is executed, in a step S4208, a process of storing a flirt effect flag is executed, and in a step S4209, a process of storing the target movable auditors 170 to 173 is executed. Then, the stop result determination processing for the third suspension notice is ended.

  If it is determined in step S4203 that the display is stopped in the sub-display area Rs, a process of determining the reach line to be one of the non-effective lines L6 to L11 is performed in step S4210. In this case, the reach line is determined so that the reach line is formed in the sub display region Rs on the left and right sides opposite to the sub display region Rs grasped in step S4203, and the reach is set on the determined line in the middle symbol row Z2. The reach line is determined so that the symbols are not stopped and displayed, that is, the symbol combination does not correspond to the jackpot result. Then, in step S4211, a process of storing an open flag is performed, in step S4212, a process of storing the movable movable objects 170 to 173 is performed, and in step S4213, a release timing is set at the start of the reach. After that, the stop result determination process for the third suspension notice is ended. In this case, the hold notice executed in the current game round is such that the symbols forming the reach line and the reach symbols in the middle symbol row Z2 are stopped and displayed in the left and right opposite sub-display areas Rs. 3 reservation notice.

  As described above, in the game times where the advance notice condition is satisfied, any one of the first suspend notice to the third suspend notice is selected and the suspend notice is executed. Note that, in the present embodiment, when a notice condition is satisfied during execution of a game round, the suspension notice is not executed in the game round. In this embodiment, since there are more types of suspension notices than in the above-described first to third embodiments, in order to change the stop result of the running game times to the suspension result corresponding to the suspension notice, the suspension notice is issued. By performing a process of performing lottery selection of the type or changing the stop result in accordance with the lottery result, the processing load in the game cycle during execution can be extremely increased. The above-described restriction of the suspension notice is a device for suppressing such a local increase in the processing load.

  Next, with reference to the schematic diagrams of FIG. 80 and FIG. 81, a state in which the reach display is performed in each game round will be described, focusing on the relationship with the suspension notice.

  When the reach line is formed on the pay line and the reach display is started, the player expects that the reach symbol is stopped and displayed on the reach line, that is, a big hit result in the current round of the game. As described above, the reach display is set to the normal reach display and the super reach display, and the super reach display is set to have a higher degree of expectation as a jackpot result than the normal reach display. Then, in the present embodiment, in the normal reach display, the reach symbol passes through the reach line, is temporarily stopped, and then develops to the super reach display. For this reason, as a player, while the normal reach display is being performed, first expect that the reach symbol is stopped and displayed on the reach line as described above, and when the reach symbol passes through the reach line, We hope that the normal reach display will evolve into a super reach display.

  On the other hand, in the reservation notice, in the present embodiment, the first reservation notice to the third reservation notice are set, and the third reservation notice is most likely to be the jackpot result thereafter. Is set to have the lowest expectation of a jackpot. In the third suspension notice, a symbol combination serving as the suspension notice is formed using the symbols stopped and displayed in the left and right sub-display areas Rs1 and Rs2. A symbol combination serving as a reservation notice is formed using a symbol stopped and displayed in Rs2, and a symbol combination serving as a reservation notice is formed in the first reservation notice using a symbol stopped and displayed in the main display area Rm. You.

  In this case, as shown in FIG. 80 (a), for example, when the reach display is performed on the right line L3 which is an active line, the reach symbol stops first on the right line L3 in the middle symbol row Z2. Expect to be displayed. This is because if a stop display is performed on the right line L3 as it is, a jackpot result is obtained. When the reach symbol has passed the reach line, the player then temporarily stops at the middle line L2 where the middle symbol row Z2 is shifted by one line from the right line L3 to the variation destination side as shown in FIG. 80 (b). Expect to be displayed. This is because, once the stop display is performed, there is a possibility that the display will be developed into a super reach display thereafter, and it is expected that a jackpot result will be obtained thereafter.

  On the other hand, when the vehicle temporarily stops at the middle line L2 but does not develop into the super reach display, the stop result corresponds to the stop result serving as the first suspension notice. Therefore, it can be expected that a jackpot result will be obtained in subsequent game rounds. As described above, the configuration is such that the middle symbol row Z2 is temporarily stopped and displayed at the development point from the normal reach display to the super reach display. Is set. For this reason, when the player temporarily stops, in addition to the expectation that a subsequent deployment may result in a jackpot in the game round, the player may also have a jackpot result in a game round performed after the game round. It is possible to maintain the expectation that it will not be possible. Thereby, by the effect of the current game time, not only the current game time but also the subsequent game times can be enhanced, and as a result, the overall game interest can be enhanced.

  In the normal reach display, when the stop is not once performed on the middle line L2, as shown in FIG. 80 (c), the reach symbol is further changed to the change destination side and is a region farther from the reach line than the middle line L2 on the left side. When the stop is displayed on the non-effective line L9, the third movable auditors 172 and the fourth movable auditors 173 move to the non-shielding positions, and a stop result corresponding to the second reservation notice is obtained. As described above, the second hold advance notice is set to have a higher expectation that the jackpot result will be higher thereafter than the first hold advance notice, and by the stop result, the player will subsequently have the big hit result. Expected to be expected.

  Here, in general, it is considered that the further away the reach symbol is from the reach line, the lower the player's expectation of the jackpot result in this game round is. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as the reach symbol is further away from the reach line and stopped and displayed, as described above, the degree of expectation of a big hit in a subsequent game round is set higher. As a result, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the sense of expectation due to the separation of the reach symbol from the reach line, and to appropriately increase the degree of attention throughout the reach.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 81 (a), a case will be described in which a specific symbol and a non-specific symbol cause a cross line reach by a right-downline L7 and a right-upline L8. In this case, as shown in FIG. 81 (b), in the middle symbol row Z2, the main symbol (specific symbol) to which the reach symbol "7" forming the reach line of the right-upward-rightward line L8 is attached is the right symbol. When the game is stopped and displayed on the non-effective line L6, the game result of the current game round is a departure result, but the stop result is a stop result serving as a second reservation notice, and the jackpot result is obtained in the next and subsequent game rounds. Can be expected. In the middle symbol row Z2, when the main symbol to which "7" is added is stopped and displayed on the right line L3, a symbol combination corresponding to the probability variation jackpot result is obtained, and the current game time is a probability variation jackpot result. As shown in FIG. 81 (c), in the middle symbol row Z2, when the main symbol with “7” is stopped and displayed on the middle line L2, the stop result is the stop result serving as the second hold notice. is there. In addition, when the vehicle temporarily stops at the middle line L2, the normal reach of “7” can be developed into a super reach, so that a big hit can be expected in this game round.

  In the middle symbol row Z2, when the main symbol with "7" is stopped and displayed on the left line L1, the main symbol with "8", which is a non-specific symbol, is aligned on the right-downward right line L7. It becomes a symbol combination corresponding to the jackpot result, and the current game round is usually a jackpot result. As shown in FIG. 81 (d), in the middle symbol row Z2, when the main symbol with “7” is stopped and displayed on the left non-effective line L9, the stop result is the third suspension notice. The result. In this case, as shown in FIG. 81 (b) or 81 (c), the reach symbol is shifted and displayed by one line to the fluctuation base side or the fluctuation destination side from the reach line of “7”, and the second holding is stopped and displayed. Expectation of a jackpot result in the next and subsequent game rounds is higher than in the notice. Further, in this case, the main symbol with "8" is stopped and displayed on the middle line L2, and once the main symbol with "8" on this middle line L2 stops, the normal reach of "8" is superimposed. Because it can be developed into reach, it can be expected that this game round will also have a jackpot result.

  According to the embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects can be obtained.

  In the hold announcement, the stop result of the out-of-reach is also set to be the subject of the hold announcement, and the farther the reach symbol moves away from the reach line to the destination side or the base side, the greater the expectation of a big hit in the subsequent game round It was set to be a high degree of suspension notice. By doing so, it is possible to appropriately maintain the degree of attention during the reach, and in the effect of raising the degree of attention to the next and subsequent game rounds of the hold notice, it is also possible to increase the degree of attention of the current game round It becomes possible.

  As the specific configuration described above, a first suspension notice using only symbols stopped and displayed in the main display area Rm, a symbol stopped and displayed in the left or right sub-display area Rs and a stop display in the main display area Rm A second hold notice using a symbol to be displayed and a third hold notice using a symbol stopped and displayed in any of the left and right sub-display areas Rs are set, and a third hold notice, a second hold notice, The setting was made so that the expectation of the jackpot results increased in the order of 1 pending notice. With this setting, in the reach where the reach line is formed in the main display area Rm, it is more expected that the reach symbol of the middle symbol row Z2 stops in the sub display area Rs than in the main display area Rm. Becomes higher and the reach line is formed in the sub-display area Rs, the sub-display on the opposite side to the reach line is formed in the middle symbol row Z2 than the reach symbol is stopped in the main display area Rm. The expectation is higher when the vehicle stops in the region Rs. That is, the degree of expectation differs between the main display area Rm and the sub display area Rs in the area where the reach symbol in the middle symbol row Z2 stops. By clarifying the visual difference in the notice mode, it is possible to prevent the executed notice from making it difficult for the player to understand the difference in the degree of expectation.

<Fifth Embodiment>
This embodiment differs from the fourth embodiment in that a plurality of development points from normal reach display to super reach display are set. Specifically, as a development point from the normal reach display to the super reach display, a first development point at which the reach symbol temporarily stops at a line shifted by one line from the reach line to a destination side, and a change point at two lines from the reach line A second development point that temporarily stops at the line shifted to the front side and a third development point that temporarily stops at the line shifted by three lines from the reach line to the destination side are set. Further, the selected development point and the reach line of the normal reach display before the development are associated with each other so that the reach line can be developed into the super reach display.

  More specifically, when the first development point is selected, a line other than the left non-effective line L9 is set as the reach line of the normal reach display before the development. When the second development point is selected, it is set so that a line other than the left non-effective line L9, the left lower right line L10, and the left upper right line L11 is selected as the reach line of the normal reach before the development. ing. When the third development point is selected, the right reach line L3, the right ineffective line L6, the right right down line L7, or the right up line L8 are selected as the reach lines of the normal reach before the development. It is set to be.

  Hereinafter, this embodiment will be described with reference to the schematic diagram of FIG. 82, focusing on differences from the fourth embodiment.

  In the fluctuation start process (FIG. 29) by the effect control device 82, in step S903 of the effect setting process for the big hit (FIG. 30) and in step S1003 of the effect setting process for the reach generation (FIG. 32), the super reach time is set. The effect pattern at the time of super reach is determined with reference to the effect pattern table. As shown in FIG. 82 (a), in the effect pattern table at the time of the super hit for jackpot selected when the game result of the current game is the jackpot result, the probability that the third development point is selected is the highest. In addition to the setting, the probability that the first development point is selected is set to be the lowest. And it is set so that the probability of selection in the order of the third development point> the second development point> the first development point is high. Each selection rate is arbitrary as long as the above relationship is satisfied, but in the present embodiment, the probability of selecting the third development point is set to 60%, and the probability of selecting the second development point is set to 30%. The probability that the first development point is selected is set to 10%.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 82 (b), in the performance pattern table for super-reach for departure selected when the game result of the current game is a departure result, the probability that the first development point is selected is high. In addition to being set to the highest, the probability that the third development point is selected is set to be the lowest. The first development point, the second development point, and the third development point are set so that the probability of selection in this order is high. Although each selection rate is arbitrary as long as the above relationship is satisfied, in the present embodiment, the probability that the first development point is selected is set to 60%, and the probability that the second development point is selected is set to 30%. The probability that the third development point is selected is set to 10%.

  Because of this setting, in the normal reach display, the degree of expectation that the game result of the relevant game will be a big hit differs depending on the area (development point) where the reach symbol of the middle symbol row Z2 temporarily stops. That is, the degree of expectation is highest when the vehicle temporarily stops at the third development point, and the degree of expectation is lowest when the vehicle temporarily stops at the first development point. And the expectation increases in the order of the third development point> the second development point> the first development point.

  Further, since the development points are set as described above, it is possible to predict which development point is selected by the reach line on which the normal reach display is performed. That is, when the reach line on which the normal reach display is performed is the right line L3, the right ineffective line L6, the right-downward line L7, or the right-upward line L8, any of the first to third development points is selected. Could be. When the reach line on which the normal reach display is performed is the middle line L2, the downward line L4, and the upward line L5, there is no possibility that the third development point has been selected and the first development point or the second development point is not selected. It will be selected. When the reach lines for which the normal reach display is performed are the left line L1, the left-right descending line L10, and the left-right upward line L11, there is no possibility that the second and third development points are selected, and the first development point is not. The development point has been selected.

  As described above, the reach line of the normal reach display is determined by the development point of the super reach display. Therefore, the normal reach display of the lines L1, L10, and L11 where only the first development point is possible, and the development point are set. In the normal reach display of a non-existent line (left non-effective line L9), there is a concern that the degree of attention is reduced.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 82C, in the effect pattern table at the time of the normal reach for the jackpot, the lines L1, L10, and L11 in which only the first development point is possible are included. The probability of selection is high (60%), and then the probability that lines L2, L4, L5 where the first development point or the second development point may be selected is high (30%), Next, the probability that the lines L3, L6, L7, L8 in which the first to third development points may be selected is set to be high (9%). Further, as shown in FIG. 82 (d), in the effect pattern table at the time of normal reach for departure, lines L3, L6, L7, L8 in which the first to third development points may be selected are selected. Is set to the highest (60%), and then the probability that the lines L2, L4, L5 in which the first development point or the second development point may be selected is high (30%). %), And the probability of selecting the lines L1, L10, and L11 that may only have the first development point is set to be the lowest (10%). The effect pattern table at the time of normal reach is a table referred to in step S906 in the effect setting process for the big hit in the change start process (FIG. 29) and in step S1022 in the effect setting process for the reach generation.

  By setting the effect pattern table at the time of the normal reach in this way, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the attention degree of the normal reach display due to the development point of the super reach display being set as described above. Has become.

  Incidentally, the left inactive line L9 in which the development point is not set is set only in the jackpot table in the effect pattern table at the time of normal reach, and the selectivity is set to the lowest (1%). That is, when the reach display is performed on the left non-effective line L9, the jackpot result is determined at that time, which is a premier effect.

  Although a detailed description with reference to the drawings is omitted, when the point corresponding to the left sub-display area Rs2 is selected as the above-mentioned development point, the third movable character 172 and the third movable character 172 are displayed when the display is changed from the normal reach display to the super reach display. The driving units 172a and 173a are driven and controlled so that the four movable auditors 173 move to the non-shielding position. Therefore, when the point corresponding to the left sub-display area Rs2 is selected in the change start processing, processing for storing the corresponding movable auditors 172 and 173 and the development timing is performed.

  Next, with reference to the schematic diagram of FIG. 83, a state in which reach display is performed in each game round will be described focusing on the relationship with the development point to super reach display.

  As shown in FIG. 83 (a), when a reach occurs on the right line L3, the player first expects that the reach symbol stops on the right line L3 which is the reach line in the reach. If the reach symbol crosses the reach line, there is a possibility that it will later develop into a super reach display. As the development points, a first development point (middle line L2) shown in FIG. 83 (b), a second development point (left line L1) shown in FIG. 83 (c), and FIG. 83 (d) are shown. A third development point (left non-effective line L9) is set, and as the reach symbol is further away from the reach line toward the change destination, the degree of expectation of a jackpot result in the developed super reach display is set higher. ing. Therefore, as a player, expecting that the reach symbol fluctuates from the first development point to the second development point and from the second development point to the third development point, the reach symbol after passing through the reach line is expected. We will pay attention to whereabouts. Thereby, it is possible to appropriately increase the degree of attention during the reach.

  The relationship with the reservation notice will be further described. In the case where the reach occurs on the right line L3, if the stop is temporarily displayed at the first and second development points and then the stop is displayed (fixed display), the first reservation notice is displayed. Is obtained. On the other hand, if the stop display (fixed display) is performed after the stop at the third development point, a stop result corresponding to the second suspension notice is obtained.

  According to the present embodiment described above, when the normal reach display is performed, the more the point of development from the normal reach display to the super reach display is further away from the reach line, the larger the expected degree of the jackpot result in the game time. Is set high, the degree of attention of the reach can be appropriately increased.

  In the configuration as described above, due to the relationship between the reach line and the development point, when the normal reach display is performed, the development point may be limited by the reach line, so that the degree of attention to the normal reach display decreases. Is concerned. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the degree of expectation that a jackpot result is obtained in normal reach display without changing to super reach display is made different depending on the type of reach line. By doing so, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects of the above-described setting of the development point while avoiding the inconvenience that the attention level is reduced due to the relationship with the development point in the normal reach display.

<Sixth Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, a characteristic effect is realized by using the colorless and transparent game board 100 and the movable accessory device 162 and the symbol display device 161 arranged behind the game board 100.

  First, the configuration of the game board 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG.

  In the present embodiment, the configuration of the center frame 130 provided on the game board 100 is different. That is, in the present embodiment, the ball receiving portion 132 is disposed at the exit of the near-side ball passage 134 of the roof frame 131, and the game ball passing through the near-side ball passage 134 is received by the ball receiving portion 132. Become. The stage frame 150 according to the present embodiment is formed such that both left and right ends extend upward, so that the rear ball passage 153 communicates with the ball receiving portion 132.

  That is, in the present embodiment, a game ball that has entered the opening 135 of the roof frame 131 is distributed to one of the left and right near-side ball passages 134 and is received by the ball receiving portion 132 to move to the far side ball passage 153. Derived, and then to stage 144. In this case, the left and right rear ball passages 153 are arranged so that a part thereof overlaps the movable accessory device 162 in the front-rear direction. Therefore, the game balls passing through the left and right inner side ball passages 153 also overlap with the movable auditors apparatus 162 in the front-rear direction during the passage. Further, as described above, since the movable accessory device 162 is disposed so as to overlap the display screen G in the front-rear direction, the game balls that overlap the movable accessory device 162 in the front-rear direction during the passage are also simultaneously displayed on the display screen G. They will overlap in the front-back direction.

  Further, detection sensors 136a and 136b for detecting the passage of game balls are provided near the entrances of the left and right near-side ball passages 134 in the roof frame 131. The detection sensors 136a and 136b are connected to the effect control device 82, and the MPU 242 of the effect control device 82 enters the front ball passage 134 based on the detection information (detection signal) from the detection sensors 136a and 136b. It is possible to grasp that a ball has been generated (that a game ball passes through the rear ball passage 153).

  In the present embodiment, characteristic control for linking the operation of the movable auditors 170 to 173 with the operation of the game ball is performed using the above configuration. Hereinafter, the processing during fluctuation by the MPU 242 of the effect control device 82 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. As described above, the during-variation process is a process executed in step S705 of the variation display control process (FIG. 28), and FIG. 85 is a process executed instead of the during-variation process shown in FIG. It is.

  In the during-variation process according to the present embodiment, as in the processes in steps S1201 to S1207, a process for performing a flirting effect is performed in steps S4301 to S4307. In step S4308, it is determined whether an open flag is stored in the RAM 244. If an affirmative determination is made in step S4308, the flow advances to step S4309.

  In step S4309, based on the detection information of the detection sensors 136a and 136b, whether a game ball has entered the front-side ball passage 134 corresponding to the movable role 170 to 173 for which the opening control is to be executed in the current game round. Determine whether or not. Specifically, when either one of the first movable auditorium 170 and the second movable auditorium 171 is to execute the opening control in the current game round, it is disposed in the left front side ball passage 134. If the passing of the game ball is detected by the detected sensor 136a, an affirmative determination is made in step S4309. In the case where one of the third movable role 172 and the fourth movable role 173 is to execute the opening control in the current game round, the detection sensor arranged in the right front side ball passage 134. When passing of the game ball is detected by 136b, an affirmative determination is made in step S4309.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S4309, the process advances to step S4310 to execute a process of adding 1 to a ball entry counter provided in the various counter areas 244a of the RAM 244. This ball entry counter is referred to when the MPU 202 grasps the number of game balls that have entered the front ball passage 134.

  If a negative determination is made in step S4309, or after the process of step S4210 is performed, the process proceeds to step S4311. In step S4311, it is determined whether the value of the ball entry counter is equal to or greater than a predetermined number (for example, 3). If it is determined that the number is equal to or more than the predetermined number, the process proceeds to step S4312, and a process for performing opening / closing control of the movable movable objects 170 to 173 in steps S4312 to S4317 is executed. In addition, each process of step S4312 to step S4317 is the same as the process of step S1209 to step S1214, and thus the description is referred to.

  If a negative determination is made in step S4311, that is, if the value of the ball entry counter is less than the predetermined number, the open flag may be stored (even if the affirmative determination is made in step S4308). ), The processing for controlling the opening and closing of the movable movable objects 170 to 173 is not executed. In other words, in the present embodiment, the release flag is stored, and even if the game time is to execute the special reservation notice, a special number of game balls are not allowed to enter the corresponding near-side ball passage 134 by a predetermined number or more. No pending notice is executed.

  Here, the ball passing process executed by the MPU 242 of the effect control device 82 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. The ball passing process is a process started at a predetermined timing, and specifically, is a process started after the variable display control process (FIG. 28) is executed.

  In the ball passing process, first, it is determined in step S4401 whether or not it is the variable display start timing. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation start processing has been performed in the fluctuation display control processing executed before the ball passing processing started this time. If it is determined that it is the variable display start timing, the process advances to step S4402 to determine whether an open flag is stored.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S4402, a process of outputting a release suggestion command to the display control device 212 is performed in step S4403. The opening suggestion command includes information on the movable auditors 170 to 173 that are to perform the opening / closing control in the current game. In the display control device 212 that has received the release suggestion command, the symbol display device performs a suggestion effect that suggests which of the movable characters 170 to 173 in the left and right near-side ball passages 134 is to be operated. 161 is displayed. Specifically, for example, if the first movable auditory 170 or the second movable auditory 171 is the target, “Aim at the right passage!” Is displayed, and the third movable auditory 172 or the fourth movable auditory is displayed. If the accessory 173 is targeted, a message "Aim at the left passage!" Is displayed.

  If a negative determination is made in step S4401 or step S4402, or after the process of step S4403 is performed, the process proceeds to step S4404. In step S4404, it is determined again whether the release flag is stored. If it is determined that the release flag is stored, the process advances to step S4405. In step S4405, it is determined based on the detection information from the detection sensors 136a and 136b whether or not a game ball has entered the corresponding near-side ball passage 134. This process is the same as the process in step S4309.

  When an affirmative determination is made in step S4405, the driving of the corresponding movable auditors 170 to 173 is controlled in step S4406 to perform an operation corresponding to the ball entering the near side ball passage 134. For example, an operation of vibrating the movable auditors 170 to 173 is performed. If a negative determination is made in step S4404 or step S4405, or after the processing in step S4406 is performed, the ball passing processing ends.

  In the present embodiment, when the notice condition is satisfied at the start of the game round, and the special reservation notice is scheduled to be executed in the game round, the suggested effect is executed on the symbol display device 161 as described above. You. Then, when the player throws a game ball into the near-side ball passage 134 in accordance with the suggested effect, the movable movable members 170 to 173 operate (vibrate) each time the ball is hit. Then, when the number of entered balls becomes equal to or more than a predetermined number and the opening timing is reached, the corresponding movable auditors 170 to 173 are controlled to move to the non-shielding position, and the special reservation notice is executed.

  On the other hand, as described above, when the suggested effect is performed but the ball is not made to enter the corresponding near-side ball passage 134, or when the number of balls in the corresponding near-side ball passage 134 does not reach a predetermined number. No special reservation notice is given.

  By the way, in the present embodiment, even if the special reservation notice is not performed in this way, the game result in the current game round and the subsequent game round does not change. However, as described above, the present pachinko machine 10 is configured to be able to play a game with a sense of expectation for a subsequent game round by performing a special reservation notice, so that the player who wants to enjoy the performance as much as possible It is considered that even if the player understands that the game result is not affected, he / she wants a special reservation notice to be given in the current game. In this case, the player operates the firing handle 55 to make the game ball enter the near-side ball passage 134 so that a special reservation notice is given. By doing so, it is possible to encourage active participation in the game.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the above-described suggested effect is performed only at the start of the game round, but the notice condition is satisfied during the execution of the game round, and in the replacement process (step S4319), When the special reservation notice is set to be performed, the suggestion effect is not performed. On the other hand, even when the special reservation notice is set during the execution of the game times as described above, when the game ball enters the corresponding near-side ball passage 134, the corresponding movable role 170- Since 173 operates, the player can know that the special reservation notice can be performed thereafter. By doing so, it is considered that the player who wants to enjoy the effect as described above normally operates the firing handle 55 so as to enter the near side ball passage 134. It is possible to give a special feeling that only the player performing the firing operation can grasp the special reservation notice before the special reservation notice is performed, and it is possible to appropriately encourage the active participation in the game.

  In such a configuration, when a game ball is fired by the shooting mode for the player to enjoy the effect as described above, the fired game ball passes through the front ball passage 134 and the back ball passage 153. And is led to the stage 144. As described above, the game ball led out to the stage 144 is configured to easily enter the operation port 115 disposed below the game ball. It can be said that. In other words, the firing mode for the player to enjoy the effect is a firing mode in which the player easily obtains a privilege (can easily receive a winning / non-selection lottery). Thereby, the effect can be sufficiently enjoyed without giving a disadvantage to the player, and the effect of improving interest can be suitably exhibited.

  According to the present embodiment described above, the positional relationship among the game board 100, the movable accessory device 162, and the symbol display device 161 is used, and the movable accessory device 162 and the symbol display device are associated with the operation of the game ball. 161, it is possible to perform a game that follows the operation of a game ball fired by a player's operation with a visual effect on the gaming machine side (such as the operation of movable movable objects 170 to 173 or the display screen G). (Preliminary notice) can be performed. Thereby, the degree of attention to the game can be appropriately increased.

<Seventh embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the configuration of the movable accessory device 162 is different from those of the first to sixth embodiments. Hereinafter, an outline of movable accessory device 300 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 87 and 88. FIGS. 87 and 88 are schematic diagrams showing the relationship between the display screen G and the movable accessory device 300. The symbol display device 161 (display screen G) located behind the movable accessory device 300 is schematically indicated by a two-dot chain line. It is described.

  As shown in FIG. 87, similarly to the above-described embodiments, the movable accessory device 300 includes four movable auditors 310, 320, 330, and 340 arranged at four corners of the display screen G of the symbol display device 161. have. These four movable members 310, 320, 330, and 340 are openable and closable fans, and are in an open state (shielded state) that overlaps the display screen G in the front-rear direction, and a closed state that does not overlap the display screen G in the front-rear direction ( The state can be switched to a non-shielded state (see FIGS. 87 and 88).

  Specifically, when the upper right movable accessory (first movable accessory) 310 arranged at the upper right of the display screen G is opened, the upper right portion of the display screen G (variable display area) is covered, and it is difficult to visually recognize. Or, it becomes impossible, and the upper right portion is exposed by being in the closed state, and the visibility of the upper right portion is secured. In other words, the switching target of shielding / non-shielding by the upper right movable accessory (first movable accessory) 310 arranged at the upper right of the display screen G is the upper right portion of the display screen G (variable display area). Similarly, the switching target of shielding / non-shielding by the lower right movable accessory (second movable accessory) 320 arranged at the lower right of the display screen G is arranged at the lower right portion of the display screen G and at the upper left of the display screen G. The object to be switched between shielded and non-shielded by the upper left movable role (third movable role) 330 is the lower left movable role (fourth movable role) arranged at the upper left part of the display screen G and at the lower left of the display screen G. The switching target of shielding / non-shielding by 340 is the lower left portion of the display screen G.

  These four movable members 310, 320, 330, and 340 have a common basic structure. Therefore, in the following description, the upper right movable auditory 310 is illustrated with reference to the schematic diagram of FIG. 89, and thereafter, the other movable auditors 320, 330, and 340 are described focusing on differences from the upper right movable auditorium 310. Will be explained. FIG. 89 is a front view of the movable role 310.

  The movable accessory 310 has a bone 311 formed by combining a plurality of long plate-shaped members in the front-rear direction of the gaming machine. The bone part 311 includes a pair of front and rear rib parts 314 (a front rib part 314a on the near side and a rear rib part 314b on the rear side), and a plurality (three in this embodiment) of the rib parts sandwiched between the rib parts 314. 315. The ribs 314 and the middle ribs 315 have front and rear plate surfaces, and are stacked at one end. A main part 317 is formed at the one end, and the movable part 310 opens and closes by rotating the bone part 311 about the main part 317.

  A semi-transparent fan surface 312 is attached to an end (the other end) of each bone 311 opposite to the main part 317. The fan surface portion 312 has a fan shape of about 150 °, and ribs 314a and 314b are fixed to both sides of the fan-shaped diameter from the rear, and a middle rib 315 is fixed to an intermediate portion thereof at regular intervals. I have. In the fan surface portion 312, fixed portions 312a to be fixed to the respective bone portions 311 and non-fixed portions 312b sandwiched between the fixed portions 312a are provided alternately, and the fixed portions 312a and the non-fixed portions 312b are provided. A bent portion 312c that bends when closing the movable accessory 310 is formed at the boundary portion. The bent portions 312c include those of mountain folds formed along the edge of each bone portion 311 and those of valley folds provided between the bent portions 312c of the mountain folds. The part and the valley fold part are formed alternately.

  As shown in the schematic diagram of FIG. 90 (a), by making a configuration in which the mountain fold portion and the valley fold portion are maintained in the open state, when the movable role 310 is closed, the bent portion 312c is used as a starting point. It will be induced to deform. That is, it is possible to suppress the fan surface portion 312 from being bent at another portion without being bent at the bent portion 312c. In this way, by specifying the deformed portion of the fan surface portion 312, it is possible to prevent an unintended portion of the fan surface portion 312 from being deformed due to repetition of opening and closing, thereby preventing the folding function from working well. .

  The movable accessory 310 is integrated with the game board 100 by fixing the front rib part 314 a to the back of the game board 100. As shown in FIG. 87 and the like, a drive motor 313 as a power source is disposed behind the movable role 310 (the main part 317), and the movable role 310 is opened and closed by the power from the drive motor 31. .

  To open and close the movable accessory 310, one of the ribs 314 can be fixed and the other can be opened and closed by rotating the other. However, in such a configuration, it may be difficult to smoothly open and close, or the stress generated at the time of opening and closing may be locally large and the durability may be reduced. In the present embodiment, in order to eliminate such inconvenience, a driving force transmission mechanism for opening and closing the movable accessory 310 is characteristic. Therefore, the power transmission mechanism will be described below with reference to the schematic diagrams of FIGS. 89 and 90 (b).

  As shown in FIG. 89, a through hole 318 is formed in the main part 317 so as to penetrate in the front-rear direction, and a gear 319 is provided in the through hole 318. As shown in FIG. 90 (b), the gear 319 includes a driving unit side gear 313b fixed to the rotating shaft 313a of the driving motor 313, a bone unit side gear 313c fixed to each bone unit 311 and the driving unit. It is constituted by a planetary gear 313d disposed between the section side gear 313b and the bone side gear 313c. The bone side gear 313c is a sun gear, the drive section side gear 313b is an internal gear, and the planetary gear 313d is a planet. Functions as a planetary gear mechanism as a carrier.

  Note that the gear ratio of each of the gears 313b to 313d is set such that the rotation speed of the bone part relatively on the rotation tip side is faster than the rotation speed of the bone part relatively on the rotation base end side. Is set. That is, the rotation speed is set to increase as the amount of movement at the time of opening and closing increases. More specifically, the timing at which each bone reaches the open position / closed position is set to be the same.

  When the drive motor 313 is drive-controlled and the rotation shaft 313a rotates, the drive unit side gear 313b rotates, and the power is transmitted to the bone part side gear 313c via the planetary gear 313d. The drive motor 313 is connected to the effect control device 82 as in the above-described embodiments, and the drive control of the drive motor 313 is performed by the MPU 242 of the effect control device 82.

  When the drive motor 313 operates according to the drive signal from the effect control device 82 (when the rotation shaft 313a rotates), each bone 311 except the front rib 314a rotates. That is, by controlling the rotation of the rotation shaft 313a clockwise in front view, each bone 311 is rotated to open the fan, the fan surface 312 is opened, and the opening overlapping the display screen G in the front-rear direction is opened. State (see FIG. 87). In this state, the drive of the drive motor 313 is controlled and the rotation shaft 313a is controlled to rotate counterclockwise in front view, so that each bone 311 rotates to close the fan and the fan surface 312 Is closed, and is switched to a closed state in which the display screen G does not overlap in the front-rear direction (see FIG. 88). In this case, the fan surface portion 312 is folded at each bent portion 312c and is stored between the front and rear rib portions 314a and 314b. In this manner, when the fan surface portion 312 is closed, the outer shape of the movable role 310 as viewed from the front of the gaming machine is smaller than in the open state.

  Since the fan surface portion 312 is formed to be translucent as described above, when the upper right movable auditorium 310 is disposed at the shielding position, as shown in FIG. 87, from the display screen G (the right side sub display area Rs1) behind it. Is transmitted through the fan surface portion 312. In this case, in the present embodiment, a device is devised to change the visibility of the symbol displayed on the display screen G behind by utilizing the positional relationship between the fan surface portion 312 and the display screen G.

  That is, each bone 311 rotates in a direction substantially parallel to the display screen G and is displaced between the shielded position and the non-shielded position. On the other hand, the maximum rotation position of each bone 311 is set so that the angle formed by the front and rear ribs 314a and 314b (about 120 ° in the present embodiment) is smaller than the angle formed by the fan surface 312 (about 150 °). When each bone 311 moves to the shielding position, each bent portion 312c is arranged at a predetermined angle α as shown in FIG. 90 (a). As a result, a non-parallel surface is created between the fan surface portion 312 and the display screen G. In the non-parallel surface, light emitted from the display screen G is refracted, and the visibility of the display screen G is reduced. Specifically, the non-parallel surface is the non-fixed portion 312b, and the fixed portion 312a that is continuous with the non-fixed portion 312b is disposed substantially parallel to the display screen G. Therefore, in the fixing portion 312a, light emitted from the display screen G is transmitted as it is without being refracted.

  In this way, by providing a surface that is non-parallel to the display screen G and a surface that is parallel to the display screen G, the visibility of the display screen G is changed, and the player is positioned behind the movable auditors 310, 320, 330, and 340. Can be interested in the symbol displayed on the screen.

  In particular, in the present embodiment, when the movable accessory 310 opens and closes, a bending operation occurs at the bending portion 312c of the fan surface portion 312. Therefore, if the fan surface portion 312 is formed of Japanese paper or the like so as to have only translucency instead of transparency, there is a possibility that the strength of the bent portion 312c is reduced and the upper right movable role 310 is weakened. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the strength is ensured by forming the fan surface portion 312 from nylon resin or the like. And, by disposing the display screen G and the fan surface portion 312 in a non-parallel manner, it is possible to prevent the visibility of the display screen G behind the display from being excessively improved. By doing so, there is an inconvenience such that the upper right movable auditorium 310 is weakened due to position displacement while achieving a shielding effect of reducing the visibility of the display screen G in a situation where the upper right movable auditorium 310 is arranged at the shielding position. It is possible to avoid.

  Further, if the entire surface of the fan surface portion 312 is arranged to be non-parallel to the display screen G, not only the non-fixed portion 312b but also the fixed portion 312a needs to be non-parallel. In this case, each of the bones 311 fixed to the fixing portion 312a also needs to be the display screen G, and the structure may be complicated. On the other hand, since each bone 311 is fixed to the fixing portion 312a, light from the display screen G is not transmitted forward by making each bone 311 non-transparent. Therefore, by arranging the fixing portion 312a so as to be substantially parallel to the display screen G as in the present embodiment, the shielding function of the display screen G is ensured while the complexity of the structure is suppressed.

  Here, with respect to the upper movable members 310 and 330, the front ribs 314a and 334a are fixed to the game board 100, and the fixed front ribs 314a and 334a open and close the movable roles 310 and 330. The base end side and the rear rib part 314b, 334b side are the front end side. On the other hand, in the lower movable members 320 and 340, not the front ribs 324a and 344a but the rear ribs 324b and 344b are fixed to the base body 163, and the fixed rear ribs 324b and 334b are fixed. Is the base end side when opening and closing the movable auditors 320, 340, and the front rib side 324a, 344a side is the front end side.

  As shown in FIG. 87 and FIG. 91, when the movable auditors 310, 320, 330, and 340 are in the closed state, a part of the upper and lower movable auditors mutually move in the front-rear direction. They are arranged to overlap. The overlapping of the upper and lower movable members 310, 320 and 330, 340 will be described with reference to FIG. Since the movable accessory device 300 has a symmetric configuration, the movable accessory 310, 320 disposed on the right side of the display screen G is exemplified here.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the upper movable accessories 310 and 330 are opened and closed by the front ribs 314a and 334a being fixed to the game board 100 and the rear ribs 314b and 334b rotating. Is done. On the other hand, the lower movable members 320 and 340 are opened and closed as the rear ribs 324b and 344b are fixed to the game board 100 and the front ribs 324a and 344a rotate. By arranging the upper and lower movable members 310, 320, 330, and 340 in this way, even if both are in the open state and overlap in the front-rear direction as described above, the movable agent device 300 is arranged. Is suppressed from increasing in thickness.

  Specifically, assuming that each of the movable auditoriums 310, 320, 330, and 340 has a thickness d1 in the case where it is disposed at the shielding position, the overall thickness is d1 in a situation where the movable auditorium 310, 320, 330, and 340 are disposed at the non-shielding position. However, the thickness at each part is smaller than d1 (for example, see d2). By overlapping the movable auditors 310, 320, 330, and 340 between the thinned portions, the space before and after the portion where the overlapping occurs can be made smaller than d1 × 2. That is, it is possible to reduce the distance between the display screen G disposed behind the movable auditorium apparatus 300 and the game board 100 disposed in front of the movable auditorium apparatus 300, and the distance becomes longer. Lowering of the visibility of the display screen G can be suppressed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 92, an example of a relationship between a main symbol stopped and displayed in the sub-display area Rs of the display screen G and a movable accessory will be described. FIG. 92 is a schematic diagram showing a relationship between movable auditors 310 and 320 and main symbols stopped and displayed in sub-display area Rs1.

  As shown in FIG. 92 (a), when the upper movable auditory 310 is in the open state, the fan surface 312 of the movable auditorium 310 stops at the middle symbol row Z2 in the sub-display area Rs and part of the main symbol. Overlap in the front-back direction. Further, when the lower movable accessory 320 is disposed at the shielding position, the fan surface portion 322 of the movable accessory 320 overlaps a part of the main symbol stopped in the middle symbol row Z2 in the sub display region Rs in the front-rear direction. Are arranged as follows. The main symbol stopped in the middle symbol row Z2 of the sub-display area Rs includes a first portion P1 that is visible from the front of the gaming machine without overlapping with any of the upper and lower movable members 310 and 320, and an upper movable portion. A second portion P2 that overlaps only with the accessory 310 in the front-rear direction, a third portion P3 that overlaps only with the lower movable auditorium 320 in the front-rear direction, and a fourth portion that overlaps with the upper and lower movable auditoriums 310 and 320 in the front-rear direction. P4 is set.

  The main symbol stopped in the middle symbol row Z2 of the sub-display area Rs switches the lower movable auditorium 320 from the open state to the closed state while the upper movable auditorium 310 is in the open state. Then, as shown in FIG. 92 (b), in addition to the first portion P1 among the portions P1 to P4, the third portion P3 becomes visible from the front of the gaming machine. On the other hand, when the upper movable auditory 310 is switched from the open state to the closed state in a state where the lower movable auditorium 320 is in the closed state, as shown in FIG. Of the P1 to P4, in addition to the first portion P1, the second portion P2 becomes visible from the front of the gaming machine. In addition, by switching both the upper and lower movable members 310 and 320 from the open state to the closed state, the fourth portion P4 becomes visible as shown in FIG. 92 (c).

  Assuming that the main design is formed by combining the character image and the numeral image, a portion that becomes visible under the condition that both the upper and lower movable objects 310 and 320 are switched to the closed state (the fourth portion P4 ), The symbols for holding are stopped in the middle symbol row Z2 in the sub display area Rs in the holding announcement as described in the first to sixth embodiments, and the upper and lower movable Any of the objects 310 and 320 is displaced to the non-shielding position, which makes it easier for the player to recognize the significance of the special reservation notice that is effective. In other words, in the above-mentioned reservation notice, in addition to the operation of the movable auditors 310, 320, 330, and 340, the fact that the fourth portion P4 becomes visible can be established by using the middle pattern of the sub-display area Rs. It becomes a condition, and it becomes easy to recognize the success or failure of the reservation notice.

  It should be noted that, as the main symbol, one composed of a character image and a numeral image and one that appears to be identical at first glance (specifically, the numeral image is excluded) are set. Can be stopped and displayed, the mode of the suspension notice can be further diversified. For example, when the upper and lower movable members 310 and 320 are in the closed state and the fourth part is visible, the preliminary notice condition is satisfied by the main design having the numeral image, and the numeral image is displayed. It may be set so that the hold notice condition is not established because the main symbol is not marked with. Thereby, it is possible to contribute to further increasing the degree of attention to the effect using the movable role.

  According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects can be obtained.

  In the movable accessory device 300, the upper and lower movable auditors 310, 320 and 330, 340 are arranged so as to overlap in the front-rear direction, and the main symbols stopped in the middle of the sub-display area Rs are the upper and lower movable auditors 310, 320. , And 330 and 340. Accordingly, the establishment of the special reservation notice using the main symbol stopped at the middle stage is not only the viewpoint of the visibility of the main symbol stopped at the middle stage, but also the operation of the upper and lower movable auditors 310, 320 and 330, 340. From the viewpoint, it is possible to show to the player, and the player can easily recognize the establishment of the special reservation notice.

  In such a configuration, the upper and lower movable members 310, 320 and 330, 340 are formed as fan-shaped movable members, so that the decorativeness of the movable members is enhanced, and the occupied area when closed (unshielded state). Has been realized. The upper and lower movable members 310, 320 and 330, 340 thus formed in a fan shape are arranged such that the open ends are reversed. This makes it possible to reduce the front and rear widths of the movable regions of the movable auditors 310, 320 and 330, 340 while achieving the above-described effects. Therefore, the distance between the display screen G and the game board 100 can be reduced, and the visibility of the display screen G can be improved.

  Furthermore, in order to enhance the shielding effect (effect of lowering visibility) of the display screen G by the movable auditors apparatus 300, the fan surfaces 312, 322, and 322 are opened in a state where the movable auditors 310, 320, 330, and 340 are opened. The non-fixed portions 312b, 322b, 332b, and 343b of 332 and 342 are made non-parallel to the display screen G. Accordingly, light emitted from the display screen G is refracted at the non-fixed portions 312b, 322b, 332b, and 342b, and the shielding effect of the display screen G can be enhanced. As a configuration that enhances such a shielding effect, for example, it is conceivable to form the fan surfaces 312, 322, 332, and 342 using a non-transparent member or a member such as Japanese paper having a light-transmitting property. . However, in the case of the former, there is a concern that the decorativeness of the movable role is reduced, and in the case of the latter, there is a concern that it is difficult to secure the strength of the movable role. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the fan portions 312, 322, 332, and 342 are formed as a translucent material such as a resin, so that the decorativeness and strength are enhanced. It is possible to secure the shielding effect of the screen G.

<Eighth Embodiment>
In each of the above-described embodiments, by operating the movable auditors 170 to 173 to display a plurality of symbol combinations (specifically, a combination of the same specific symbols) corresponding to a plurality of reservation notices during one game round, 1 Although it is configured to make it appear as if a plurality of suspension notices have been performed during the game round, in the present embodiment, the display modes of the symbol combinations corresponding to the suspension notices are further diversified. Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 93, a display mode of the suspension notice added in the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 93 is a schematic diagram showing the flow of the reservation notice.

  With respect to the suspension notice added in the present embodiment, there are roughly two patterns. Specifically, a first display pattern for displaying a symbol combination corresponding to a plurality of types (two types in the present embodiment) of the suspension notice at one time, and a plurality of stages (two stages in the present embodiment) And a second display pattern for displaying a symbol combination corresponding to the suspension notice.

  When determining which of the first display pattern and the second display pattern to execute, the display pattern determination table stored in the various table areas 243a of the effect control device 82 is referred to. Here, the display pattern determination table indicates that the second display pattern is more easily selected than the first display pattern when the hold information that triggered the hold notice corresponds to the jackpot, and If the hold information does not correspond to the jackpot, the first display pattern is set to be more easily selected than the second display pattern. Thus, the second display pattern has a higher degree of expectation when the suspension notice is executed than the first display pattern.

  In each of the above embodiments, the case where only one symbol combination corresponding to the suspension notice is stopped and displayed has been described, but the number of the symbol combinations corresponding to the suspension notice displayed in one suspension notice ( Are set such that the greater the number of types, the higher the degree of expectation. More specifically, the degree of expectation is set to be the same as that in the above-described embodiment in the case where the symbol combination corresponding to the hold notice is stopped and displayed once for a plurality of game times (specifically, two times). Is set.

  First, the first display pattern will be described. As shown in FIG. 93 (a) → FIG. 93 (b), when the variable display of the symbol starts and ends, the combination of the symbol “7” and the symbol “6” are displayed in the main display area Rm of the display screen G. The combinations are displayed simultaneously. That is, two types of symbol combinations corresponding to the suspension notice are displayed collectively. In the first display pattern, the sense of expectation of the player can be increased at a stretch as compared with the case where only one symbol combination corresponding to the suspension notice is stopped and displayed. After the two types of the symbol combinations corresponding to the reservation notice are displayed, the variation display of the symbols is started as shown in FIG. 93 (c), and the process proceeds to the next game.

  As for the second display pattern, as described with reference to FIG. 62 and the like, the suspension notice is executed in two stages in one game. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 93 (a) → FIG. 93 (d), when the symbol change display starts → ends, a combination of “8” symbols is displayed in the main display area Rm of the display screen G. Will be displayed. At this timing, another symbol combination corresponding to the pending notice can be displayed by the combination of the symbols “7” stopped and displayed in the sub display area Rs, but the sub display area Rs is displayed by the movable auditors 170 to 173. It is shielded, making it difficult to check for stopped symbols. That is, in FIG. 93 (d), only one symbol combination corresponding to the suspension notice is displayed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 93 (d) → FIG. 93 (e), the movable characters 170, 172, 173 operate and the symbol stopped and displayed in the sub-display area Rs becomes visible. As a result, the display screen G is brought into a state where the combination of the symbol "7" including the main display area Rm and the sub display area Rs is displayed so as to be visible to the player. As a result, two types of symbol combinations corresponding to the suspension notice are displayed for convenience. After the two types of the symbol combinations corresponding to the reservation notice are displayed, the variation display of the symbols is started as shown in FIG. 93 (c), and the process proceeds to the next game.

  In this manner, by displaying a plurality of types of design combinations corresponding to the reservation notice in the main display area Rm, a reservation notice with a high impact can be executed. Further, even if only one symbol combination corresponding to the suspension notice is stopped in the main display area Rm, after that, two more patterns are provided, and this pattern has a higher degree of expectation than the former. By setting, the player expects that the second symbol combination corresponding to the reservation notice is displayed, and it is possible to appropriately suppress the early decline of the player's expectation.

  In the present embodiment, the superiority is set for the two display patterns. However, instead of using the two display patterns in combination to change the degree of expectation, the first display pattern / first display pattern is determined by the timing of determining the suspension notice. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which two display patterns are selected.

  For example, in a case where a suspension notice is performed based on the suspension information already stored at the start of the game round, or in a situation where all the symbols fluctuate at a high speed, the stop mode (stop eye) of the symbols is changed ( Can be replaced). Therefore, in such a case, the first display pattern is selected. On the other hand, when the suspension notice is performed based on the suspension information newly acquired after the start of the game round, and it is already difficult to change the stop mode (stop eye) of the symbol, the main display area It is determined whether or not it is possible to display two symbol combinations corresponding to the pending notice on the entire display screen G including Rm and the sub-display area Rs, and if the result of the determination is a positive result, Select the second display pattern.

  As described above, if the first display pattern / second display pattern is selected in response to the start of the suspension notice, it is possible to determine from the contents of the suspension notice which suspension information has a high possibility of winning the jackpot. A game of prediction is added, which can contribute to an increase in the degree of attention to the game.

<Ninth embodiment>
In the fourth embodiment described above, the configuration in which the degree of expectation of the jackpot result after that differs depending on the suspension mode of the suspension notice has been described. Here, in the fourth embodiment, a part of the configuration in which the outline of the effect is simplified will be additionally described based on its technical significance.

  As described above, in the suspension notice as “special announcement”, the first suspension notice, the second suspension notice, and the third suspension notice having different expectations from the jackpot result are set. The first to third reservation notices are common in that the same notice-corresponding symbols are stopped in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 so that the symbol combination corresponding to the reservation notices can be visually recognized by the player. However, the stop area (spreading range) of the symbol combination is different. Then, according to the stop area, the degree of expectation of the jackpot result after that is set to be different. In other words, even when the suspension notice is performed using the same symbol combination, the degree of expectation differs according to the degree of dispersion of the symbols forming the symbol combination.

  As shown in the schematic diagram of FIG. 94, the first suspension notice is an effect in which the suspension notice is established by a combination of only the main symbols stopped in the main display area Rm. The distribution range of the symbol combination corresponding to the first reservation notice remains in the main display area Rm.

  In the second reservation notice, the symbol corresponding to the second reservation notice is scattered in a wider area than the symbol corresponding to the first reservation notice. More specifically, a symbol that stops in the main display region Rm and a symbol that stops in one of the left and right sub-display regions Rs1 and Rs2 constitute a symbol combination corresponding to the reservation notice. That is, the distribution range of the symbol combination corresponding to the second reservation notice extends not only within the main display region Rm but also over the main display region Rm and the sub display region Rs2.

  In the third reservation notice, the symbols corresponding to the third reservation notice are scattered in a wider area than the symbols corresponding to the second reservation notice. More specifically, a symbol combination corresponding to the suspension notice is constituted by a symbol that stops in the main display area Rm and a symbol that stops in both the left and right sub-display areas Rs1 and Rs2. That is, the distribution range of the symbol combination corresponding to the third suspension notice extends not only within the main display region Rm but also over the main display region Rm and the sub display regions Rs1 and Rs2.

  If the opportunity of the hold notice is the hold information corresponding to the jackpot result, the probability of being selected in the order of the third hold notice> the second hold notice> the first hold notice increases, and the hold corresponding to the missed result is made. If the information is information, it is set so that the probability of selection in the order of the first reservation notice> the second reservation notice> the third reservation notice increases. As a result, the degree of expectation that the jackpot results will be higher thereafter is higher in the order of the third reservation notice> the second reservation notice> the first reservation notice. In other words, for the symbol combination corresponding to the suspension notice, a jackpot result is obtained depending on how many display areas the stop area is formed over, that is, the degree of dispersion of the symbols forming the symbol combination. The degree of expectation is different, and the degree of expectation increases as the degree of scattering of the symbols increases.

  Also, in the first reservation notice, the number of symbols in the other symbols based on the symbols belonging to the middle symbol row as the final stop target, specifically, the number of symbols in the upper symbol row is “1”, and the lower symbol row is “1”. Is "0". As a result, the sum of the number of misplaced frames of other symbols based on the symbols belonging to the middle symbol row is “1”.

  In the second suspension notice, the sum of the numbers of symbols in the other symbols based on the symbols belonging to the middle symbol row as the final stop target, specifically, the symbols in the upper symbol row is “2”, and the lower symbol row is Is two. As a result, the sum of the number of misplaced frames of other symbols based on the symbols belonging to the middle symbol row is “3”.

  In the third reservation notice, the total number of symbols in the other symbols based on the symbols belonging to the middle symbol row as the final stop target, specifically, the number of symbols in the upper symbol row is “2”, and the lower symbol row is Is four. As a result, the sum of the number of misplaced frames of other symbols based on the symbols belonging to the middle symbol row is “6”.

  In this way, for the symbol combination corresponding to the reservation notice, the number of misplaced frames of other symbols based on the symbol belonging to the specific symbol row increases, that is, the sum of the separation distance between the symbols increases. In other words, it can be said that the degree of expectation of the jackpot result is increased.

  In the game time after performing the suspension notice (the game time that triggered the suspension notice), various indication effects, main effects, and the like can be executed in a wide area of the display screen G. In this case, if the field of view of the player is narrow, even if the various effects are executed, there is a high possibility that the effect is overlooked. Therefore, as shown in the present embodiment, if the degree of expectation is increased by increasing the degree of dispersion of the symbol combination corresponding to the suspension notice, it is possible to suitably widen the player's field of view, It is possible to prevent the effect of the production from being unsatisfactorily exerted due to the occurrence of overlooking or the like.

  In particular, after prompting the player's visual field to be widened by the reservation notice, by performing the above-mentioned sign effect or main performance, the game will shift to the subsequent game round while the effect of expanding the visual field is maintained. . Therefore, it is possible to more suitably exert the above-described effects.

<Tenth embodiment>
The game board 100 of the game board unit 90 shown in each of the above embodiments is provided with a portion facing the display screen G of the symbol display device 161. One of the features of the present embodiment is that a contrivance such as a smooth operation of the movable accessory device is made by utilizing the opposing portion. Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 95 and FIG. 96, a description will be given of a movable accessory device 300X and a configuration (game board 100X) related thereto according to the present embodiment. 95 (a) is a front view of the game board unit 90X, (b) is a partially enlarged view of the game board unit 90X, FIG. 96 (a) is a rear perspective view of the game board 100X, and FIG. 96 (b) is a view of the game board 100X. It is the schematic which shows the relationship with the movable accessory device 300X. In FIG. 95 (b), for convenience of description, a solid line indicates that the movable accessory device 300X is visible through the game board 100X.

  The main configuration of the gaming board 100X is common to that of the seventh embodiment. Therefore, the description of these common configurations will be referred to, and the description will focus on the differences from the seventh embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 95 (a), a decoration 125X is provided on a portion of the front surface of the game board 100X which faces the display screen G. The decoration 125X improves the appearance of the game board 100X.

  The decoration 125 </ b> X suppresses the straight transmission of light (made translucent) by matting (for example, shot blasting). By making the decoration 125X translucent and ensuring the visibility of the display screen G located behind the decoration 125X, the inconvenience of making the display screen G extremely difficult to see is suppressed. That is, it is avoided that the improvement of the appearance by the decoration 125X becomes a factor that hinders confirmation of a symbol or the like related to the interest of the player.

  The decoration 125X has a band shape and is arranged so as to divide the main display area and the sub display area set on the display screen G. That is, the decoration 125X is provided with a support function for easily distinguishing the main display area from the sub display area.

  As schematically shown in FIG. 95 (b), similarly to the other embodiments, a movable accessory device 300X is provided between the game board 100X and the symbol display device 161 (display screen G). . A guide groove 126X as a “guide portion” that supports the movement of each movable accessory (in the figure, the upper-right movable accessory 310X is illustrated) that forms the movable accessory device 300X is formed on the back surface portion of the game board 100X. (See FIG. 96 (a)).

  The guide groove 126X is formed so as to extend along the decoration 125X when the gaming machine is viewed from the front. More specifically, the groove width of the guide groove 126X is suppressed to be smaller than the width of the decoration 125X, and is formed so as to entirely overlap the decoration 125X. This prevents the guide groove 126X from protruding from the decoration 125X in the game machine front view, and the guide groove 126X is hidden behind the decoration 125X.

  An engaging pin 350X that engages with the guide groove 126X protrudes from a pivotal tip portion of the rib part 314 (corresponding to a “movable body”) that constitutes the movable accessory 310X (see FIG. 96B). ). When opening / closing the movable accessory 310X, the opening / closing operation can be performed stably by moving while the engagement pin 350X is engaged with the guide groove 126X.

  Further, when the movable role 310X is open, the engagement pin 350X abuts on the end of the guide groove 126X, so that further movement is prevented. That is, the guide groove 126X is provided with a function as a stopper for the movable accessory 310X.

  Furthermore, when the movable role 310X is open, the engagement pin 350X is supported by the guide groove 126X. Thereby, the support function of movable movable object 310X is strengthened.

  The same applies to the relationship between the decoration 125X and the guide groove 126X and the movable members 320, 330, and 340.

  As described above in detail, by providing the function of guiding the movable auditors 310X to the opposing portion of the game board 100X, the movement of the movable auditors 310X can be stabilized.

  For example, when the size of the movable auditorium 310X is increased or the operating range of the movable auditorium 310X is set wider, the effect using the movable auditorium apparatus 300X can be made to have an impact. This is advantageous in increasing the degree of attention to. However, on the other hand, it is assumed that the movement of the movable role 310X tends to be unstable. As described above, the unstable movement of the movable role 310X may cause a malfunction or a poor appearance, and may be a hindrance in exerting the above effects. In this regard, according to the configuration shown in the present embodiment, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of such inconvenience, and it is possible to suitably exert the effect function of movable movable object device 300X.

  In particular, in a configuration in which the supporting position (holding position) of the movable auditorium 310X is arranged at a position that does not overlap the display screen G, the movable auditorium 310X attempts to move in front of the display screen G, so that the movable auditorium 310X moves from the supporting position. Variations in the position of the movable role 310X are likely to increase in a distant portion. In this regard, if the opposing portion exists in the gaming board 100X and the guide groove 126X is provided in the opposing portion, the occurrence of such inconvenience can be suitably suppressed. That is, the technical idea described in the present embodiment is applied to the movable role 310X having a movable portion (a rib portion or the like) that is displaced so that the overlap with the display screen G increases depending on the situation. This can contribute to the realization of a preferable configuration in which the staging function and the like by the movable accessory device 300X can be stably exhibited.

  When the movable accessory 310X is of a rotating type, the movement width (for example, displacement) of the leading end of the movable accessory 310X during the operation of the movable accessory 310X tends to be large. Therefore, if the object to be guided by the guide groove 126X is the pivotal tip of the movable role 310X, the movement can be suppressed and the movement of the movable role 310X can be suitably stabilized.

  When viewing the display screen G through the opposing portion of the gaming board 100X, if the guide groove 126X becomes conspicuous, the appearance of the gaming machine may be reduced. Therefore, by disposing the guide groove 126X behind the decoration 125X as a “pattern” formed on the game board 100X (opposing portion), the guide groove 126X is made less noticeable, and the above-described deterioration in appearance is suppressed. be able to.

  The decoration 125X is provided on the front portion of the facing portion, and the guide groove 126X is provided on the back portion of the facing portion. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the presence of the guide groove 126X from being a factor that makes it difficult to provide the decoration 125X, and to allow the decoration 125X and the guide groove 126X to coexist suitably in the opposing portion of the game board 100X. It becomes possible.

  Although the above description has been given based on the movable accessory device 300 shown in the seventh embodiment, the technical idea shown in the present embodiment is not limited to the movable accessory device 300. Instead, it is also possible to apply to the movable accessory device 162 shown in the first embodiment.

  In this case, for example, guide rails corresponding to the movable movable members 170 to 173 are provided on the back surface of the game board 100, and patterns such as decorations are provided on the front part of the game board 100 at positions overlapping the guide rails from the front of the gaming machine. May be provided.

<Eleventh embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the configuration of the movable accessory device 300 provided between the game board 100 and the symbol display device 161 is different from that of the above-described tenth embodiment. The configuration of the decoration etc. given to 100 is changed. Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 97, a description will be given of the movable accessory device 300Y and the configuration related thereto according to the present embodiment. FIG. 97 (a) is a schematic diagram showing a relationship between the game board 100Y and the movable accessory device 300Y, and FIG. 97 (b) is a partial cross-sectional view taken along line XX of FIG. 97 (a).

  As shown in FIG. 97 (a), in the present embodiment, decorations 125Y are formed along each of the effective lines L1 to L5, and a function of teaching the effective lines is provided to these decorations 125Y. In this manner, by teaching the effective line by the decoration 125Y as a “pattern”, it becomes difficult to distinguish between the effective line and the non-effective line in a gaming machine using both the effective line and the non-effective line. Restrained.

  Note that the effective lines intersect with each other, and the decorations 125Y corresponding to these effective lines also intersect to form one picture as a whole. However, the decorations 125Y do not necessarily need to be connected to each other, and The decoration 125Y may be provided separately for each active line.

  A guide groove 126Y as a “guide portion” is formed behind the decoration 125Y corresponding to the effective line L4 (downward right line) and the effective line L5 (upward right line) that are obliquely inclined. In the present embodiment, the movable decorative body 401Y constituting the movable accessory device 300Y is integrated with the game board 100Y via the guide groove 126Y and the like. For this reason, the movable decorative body 401Y moves (by its own weight) along the guide groove 126Y while being held by the game board 100Y, thereby moving obliquely across the display screen G. In addition, since the structure regarding the movement of the movable decorative body 401Y has been devised in various ways, the details of the movement of the movable decorative body 401Y will be described later.

  The movable accessory device 300Y includes the movable decorative body 401Y as a “movable body” movably provided, and a return mechanism for returning the movable decorative body 401Y to an initial position. Since the movable decorative body 401Y returns to the initial position by moving along the predetermined route, it is possible to repeatedly perform the effect by the movable accessory device 300Y.

  The movable decorative body 401Y includes a disk-shaped facing portion 402Y facing the back of the game board 100Y, and a protruding ridge engaging portion 403Y that is provided to protrude forward from the facing portion 402Y and engages the guide groove 126Y. A base body.

  A seal member 404Y as a decorative member is attached to a rear portion (rear portion) of the facing portion 402Y. A picture such as a character is provided on the front surface (sticking surface) of the seal member 404Y. The base body is made of a transparent synthetic resin material, and the pattern applied to the seal member 404Y can be visually recognized through the base body.

  At both ends of the guide groove 126aY corresponding to the effective line L5 rising to the right and at both ends of the guide groove 126bY corresponding to the effective line L4 descending to the right, stop portions capable of stopping the movable decorative body 401Y are provided.

  On both left and right sides of the display screen G, holders 411Y and 412Y capable of holding the movable decorative body 401Y reaching the stationary portion are provided, respectively. These holders 411Y and 412Y are configured to be switchable between a hold state in which the convex portion 405Y formed on the movable decorative body 401Y is sandwiched from behind and a release state in which the convex portion 405Y is not sandwiched.

  Here, rails 413Y and 414Y are attached to positions on the left and right sides of the display screen G on the back side of the game board 100Y so as to connect a set of upper and lower stationary parts. The rails 413Y and 414Y movably hold the holders 411Y and 412Y, and the holders 411Y and 412Y are allowed to move up and down along the rails 413Y and 414Y. Note that the holders 411Y and 412Y can move in the up-down direction, but are not allowed to move in the left-right direction. In FIG. 97 (b), the holders 411Y and 412Y are simulated by two-dot chain lines, but actually the holders 411Y and 412Y move to this position (a position overlapping the variable display area of the display screen G). I do not.

  The movable decorative body 401Y moves while following the holders 411Y and 412Y while being held by the holders 411Y and 412Y. In the present embodiment, a contrivance is made to prevent the movable decorative body 401Y from falling off the game board 100Y during such movement.

  As shown in FIG. 97 (a), in each of the stationary portions, rotating bodies 421Y to 424Y are respectively housed in concave portions 126cY to 126fY formed on the back surface of the game board 100X. Engagement grooves 421aY to 424aY that engage with the engagement portions 403Y of the movable decorative body 401Y are formed in the rotating bodies 421Y to 424Y, respectively. The movable decorative body 401Y that has reached the stopping portion is stopped in a state where the base body (the engaging portion 403Y) of the movable decorative body 401Y is engaged with the engaging grooves 421aY to 424aY.

  The rotating bodies 421Y to 424Y are rotatably supported by the game board 100Y so as to be rotatable about an axis extending in the thickness direction of the game board 100Y. A motor as a drive unit for rotating the rotating bodies 421Y to 424Y is attached to the gaming board 100Y in a one-to-one correspondence with the rotating bodies 421Y to 424Y. By operating these motors, the rotating bodies 421Y to 424Y rotate clockwise or counterclockwise in the recesses 126cY to 126fY.

  Grooves 126gY and 126hY extending in the vertical direction are formed on the game board 100Y so as to connect upper and lower stationary parts. The grooves 126gY and 126hY are also formed in accordance with the engaging portions 403Y of the movable decorative body 401Y.

  The rotating body 421Y is configured to switch between a state in which the engagement groove 421aY communicates with the guide groove 126aY and a state in which the engaging groove 421aY communicates with the groove 126hY by rotation of the rotating body 421Y, and the rotating body 422Y rotates the rotating body 422Y. As a result, the state in which the engagement groove 422aY communicates with the guide groove 126aY and the state in which the engagement groove 422aY communicates with the groove 126gY are switched, and the rotating body 423Y is turned into the guide groove 126bY by the rotation of the rotating body 423Y. The rotating body 424Y is configured to be switched between a communicating state and a communicating state with the groove 126gY. The rotating body 424Y rotates the rotating body 424Y so that the engaging groove 424aY communicates with the guide groove 126bY and communicates with the groove 126hY. It is configured to switch to

  The holders 411 and 412Y are also attached to the rails 413Y and 414Y so as to be rotatable around an axis extending in the thickness direction of the game board 100Y. When the rotating bodies 421Y to 424Y rotate in a state where the movable decorative body 401Y stopped at the stopping section is held by the holders 411Y and 412Y, the holders 411Y and 412Y also follow the rotation. In other words, even when the movable decorative body 401Y is held by the holders 411Y and 412Y, the movement of the rotating bodies 421Y to 424Y, that is, the change in the attitude of the movable decorative body 401Y is prevented by the presence of the holders 411Y and 412Y. is not.

  In addition, when the rotating bodies 421Y to 424Y are in communication with one of the two grooves, a stopper for preventing further rotation is formed on the gaming board 100Y, and the rotation angle is limited. ing. By defining the rotational position when communicating with each groove by these stoppers, it is possible to avoid that the above-mentioned communication function, that is, the function of securing the moving path of the movable decorative body 401Y, does not work well.

  The drive motors for the rotating bodies 421Y to 424Y and the drive motors for the holders 411Y and 412Y are connected to the effect control device 82, and operate by outputting a drive signal from the effect control device 82. The movable accessory unit 400Y includes a detection sensor for detecting the movable decorative body 401Y, a detection sensor for detecting the positions of the holders 411Y and 412Y, and a rotation sensor for detecting the rotational positions of the rotating bodies 421Y to 424Y. And a detection sensor. These various sensors are connected to the effect control device 82, and based on the detection information (detection signal) from these detection sensors, the effect control device 82 determines the stopping position of the movable decorative body 401Y, the vertical position of the holders 411Y, 412Y, The rotation positions of the rotating bodies 421Y to 424Y can be grasped.

  As shown in FIG. 97 (a), the center frame 130Y shown in this embodiment has a gate shape, and the movable accessory device 300Y is covered by the center frame 130Y from the front of the gaming machine. As described above, by hiding the movable accessory device 300Y behind the center frame 130Y and making it difficult to visually check, the deterioration of the appearance of the game board unit 90Y is suppressed. Note that it is difficult to visually check the movable decorative body 401Y that is parked in the parking area. Therefore, it is difficult to recognize whether the movable decorative body 401Y moves from the left or right, and the impact when the movable decorative body 401Y moves can be increased.

  Next, an operation mode of the movable accessory device 300Y (movable decorative body 401Y) will be described with reference to the schematic diagram of FIG. The standby position of the movable decorative body 401Y is roughly classified into a stop portion at the upper right of the display screen G and a stop portion at the upper left of the display screen G. Here, for convenience of explanation, an example of a movement from a state in which the movable decorative body 401Y is parked in a stationary section at the upper right of the display screen G will be described.

  In a situation where the movable decorative body 401Y is standing by at the stop at the upper right of the display screen G, when it is time to perform an effect by the movable accessory device 300Y, the rotating body 421Y rotates and rotates. The state is switched so that the engagement groove 421aY of the body 421Y communicates with the guide groove 126aY. At this time, since the movable decorative body 401Y is not held by the holder 412Y, the movable decorative body 401Y moves from the engagement groove 421aY of the rotating body 421Y to the guide groove 126aY of the game board 100Y by its own weight. The movable decorative body 401Y that has moved to the guide groove 126aY moves from the upper right stop to the lower left stop by its own weight while being held by the game board 100Y.

  After the movable decorative body 401Y that has been waiting at the stopping portion moves to the gaming board 100Y side, the rotating body 421Y rotates and switches to a state in which the engaging groove 421aY of the rotating body 421Y communicates with the groove 126hY. .

  Here, a supplementary description will be given of a configuration in which the movable decorative body 401Y is stopped (standby) at the upper right stop. As described above, the rotating body 421Y can switch between a state in which the engaging groove 421aY communicates with the guide groove 126aY and a state in which the rotating body 421Y communicates with the groove 126hY by rotating itself. Here, in the middle between the two rotational positions, the end of the engaging groove 421aY faces the wall surface of the concave portion 126cY without communicating with either the guide groove 126aY or the groove 126hY. That is, in this state, the wall surface of the concave portion 126cY functions as a stopper for preventing the movable decorative body 401Y from coming off the engagement groove 421aY. As a result, the movable decorative body 401Y does not flow into any of the guide groove 126aY and the groove 126hY, and is maintained at a stop at the stop.

  The movable decorative body 401Y that has flowed into the guide groove 126aY flows down along the guide groove 126aY. However, the guide groove 126aY intersects the guide groove 126bY at an intermediate position, and the guide groove 126aY is partially cut. However, the engaging portion 403Y of the movable decorative body 401Y is formed to be sufficiently longer than the cut distance. Therefore, when the movable decorative body 401Y arrives at the above-mentioned cut portion, the engaging portion 403Y and the guide groove 126aY are engaged so as to straddle the cut portion, and the presence of the cut portion is movable. It is avoided that the movement of the decorative body 401Y is hindered.

  When the movable decorative body 401Y is waiting at the upper right stop, the rotating body 422Y of the lower left stopping section waits at a position where the engagement groove 422aY of the rotary body 422Y communicates with the guide groove 126aY. I have. Therefore, the movable decorative body 401Y that has moved along the guide groove 126aY moves from the game board 100Y to the rotating body 422Y. As a result, the movable decorative body 401Y is hidden behind the center frame 130Y and comes out of the player's view.

  After the movable decorative body 401Y reaches the rotating body 422Y, the movable decorative body 401Y is held by the holder 411Y arranged at the lowermost part of the rail 413Y. After that, the rotating body 422Y rotates, and the engagement groove 422aY of the rotating body 422Y is switched to a state communicating with the groove 126gY.

  In this way, after the posture of the movable decorative body 401Y is changed and the upward movement path is secured, the holder 411Y moves up along the rail 413Y. As a result, the movable decorative body 401Y moves toward the upper left stop. Also in this case, since the movable decorative body 401Y moves behind the center frame 130Y, the movement of the movable decorative body 401Y is prevented from being visually recognized by the player.

  After the movable decorative body 401Y that has been waiting at the stopping portion moves from the rotating body 422Y to the gaming board 100Y side, the rotating body 422Y rotates, and the engaging groove 422aY of the rotating body 422Y communicates with the guide groove 126aY. Switch to the state to do.

  Here, with respect to the rotating body 423Y constituting the upper left stationary portion, the engagement groove 423aY of the rotating body 423Y is in a state of communicating with the groove 126gY. Thereby, the movable decorative body 401Y lifted by the holder 411Y reaches the upper left stationary portion.

  As described above, the rotating body 423Y can switch between a state in which the engaging groove 423aY communicates with the guide groove 126bY and a state in which the rotating body 423Y communicates with the groove 126gY by rotating itself. Here, at an intermediate position between the two rotation positions, the end of the engagement groove 423aY faces the wall surface of the recess 126eY without communicating with either the guide groove 126bY or the groove 126gY. That is, in this state, the wall surface of the concave portion 126eY functions as a stopper for preventing the movable decorative body 401Y from coming off the engagement groove 423aY. After the movable decorative body 401Y reaches the upper left stopping portion, the rotating body 423Y rotates, and in this state, the movable decorative body 401Y does not flow into any of the guide groove 126bY and the groove 126gY. , The state of being stopped at the stop part. Along with this, the holding of the movable decorative body 401Y by the holder 411Y is released, and the holder 411Y returns to the position at the bottom of the rail 413Y.

  In a situation where the movable decorative body 401Y is standing by at a stop portion at the upper left of the display screen G, when it is time to execute an effect by the movable accessory device 300Y, the rotating body 423Y rotates and rotates. The state is switched so that the engagement groove 423aY of the body 423Y communicates with the guide groove 126bY. At this time, since the movable decorative body 401Y is not held by the holder 411Y, the movable decorative body 401Y moves from the engagement groove 423aY of the rotating body 423Y to the guide groove 126bY of the game board 100Y by its own weight. The movable decorative body 401Y that has moved to the guide groove 126bY moves from the upper left stop to the lower right stop under its own weight while being held by the game board 100Y.

  After the movable decorative body 401Y that has been waiting at the stopping portion moves to the gaming board 100Y side, the rotating body 423Y rotates and switches to a state in which the engaging groove 423aY of the rotating body 423Y communicates with the groove 126gY. .

  The movable decorative body 401Y that has flowed into the guide groove 126bY flows down along the guide groove 126bY. However, the guide groove 126bY intersects the guide groove 126aY at an intermediate position, and the guide groove 126bY is partially cut. However, the engaging portion 403Y of the movable decorative body 401Y is formed to be sufficiently longer than the cut distance. Therefore, when the movable decorative body 401Y arrives at the above-described cut portion, the engaging portion 403Y and the guide groove 126bY are engaged so as to straddle the cut portion, and the presence of the cut portion is movable. It is avoided that the movement of the decorative body 401Y is hindered.

  When the movable decorative body 401Y is waiting at the upper left stop, the rotating body 424Y of the lower right stopping section waits at a position where the engagement groove 424aY of the rotary body 424Y communicates with the guide groove 126bY. ing. Therefore, the movable decorative body 401Y that has moved along the guide groove 126bY moves from the game board 100Y to the rotating body 424Y. As a result, the movable decorative body 401Y is hidden behind the center frame 130Y and comes out of the player's view.

  After the movable decorative body 401Y reaches the rotating body 424Y, the movable decorative body 401Y is held by the holder 412Y arranged at the lowermost part of the rail 414Y. Thereafter, the rotating body 424Y rotates, and the engagement groove 424aY of the rotating body 424Y is switched to a state of communicating with the groove 126hY.

  In this way, after the posture of the movable decorative body 401Y is changed and the upward moving path is secured, the holder 412Y moves up along the rail 414Y. As a result, the movable decorative body 401Y moves toward the upper right stop. Also in this case, since the movable decorative body 401Y moves behind the center frame 130Y, the movement of the movable decorative body 401Y is prevented from being visually recognized by the player.

  After the movable decorative body 401Y waiting at the stop moves from the rotating body 424Y to the game board 100Y side, the rotating body 424Y rotates, and the engaging groove 424aY of the rotating body 424Y communicates with the guide groove 126bY. Switch to the state to do.

  Here, as for the rotating body 421Y constituting the upper right stopping part, the engaging groove 421aY of the rotating body 421Y is in communication with the groove 126hY. Thereby, the movable decorative body 401Y lifted by the holder 411Y reaches the upper left stationary portion.

  After the movable decorative body 401Y reaches the rotating body 421Y, the rotating body 421Y rotates to the intermediate position, and the end of the engagement groove 423aY faces the wall surface of the recess 126eY. In this state, the wall surface of the concave portion 126eY functions as a stopper for preventing the movable decorative body 401Y from coming off the engagement groove 423aY, and the movable decorative body 401Y flows into both the guide groove 126bY and the groove 126gY. Without stopping, it will be maintained in the state where it stopped at the stop part. Along with this, the holding of the movable decorative body 401Y by the holder 412Y is released, and the holder 412Y returns to the position at the lowermost portion of the rail 414Y.

  The relationship between the operation of the movable accessory device 300Y described above and the display effect performed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 161 will be described. In the present embodiment, a first-type role-linked effect and a second-type role-linked effect are set as effects unique to the present embodiment.

  The first-class accessory-linked effect is a so-called notice effect, and can be selected in the case of suggesting a reach line with a high expectation of becoming a jackpot before shifting to reach fluctuation display. Specifically, when the first class accessory-linked production is selected at the game time in which the reach production is executed, the movable decorative body 401Y can pass through either the valid line L4 or the valid line L5. It is determined whether or not there is, and the stop mode of the picture is determined so that the reach line is formed by the determined effective line.

  In addition, when the game time corresponds to the jackpot result, the stop mode of the symbol is set such that the effective line at which the combination of the symbols corresponding to the jackpot result stops coincides with the line on which the movable decorative body 401Y moves. It may be configured to be determined, and the first-class accessory-linked production may be a confirmed production in which the jackpot is decided.

  The second-type role-linked effect is a so-called chance-up effect, and is selected when a shift to the reach fluctuation display is indicated and a reach line with a high expectation of a jackpot is suggested. Specifically, when the second type accessory-linked effect is selected in the game time in which the reach effect is executed, the movable decorative body 401Y can pass through any of the active line L4 and the active line L5. Figure out if there is. When it is determined that the grasped activated line and the activated line in which the combination of the symbol corresponding to the jackpot is stopped and displayed coincide with each other, the movable decorative body 401Y is operated with reference to the rendering effect determination table for coincidence. It is determined whether or not the determined effective line and the activated line for which the combination of the symbol corresponding to the jackpot is stopped and displayed do not match, refer to the non-matching effect possible / impossible determination table It is determined whether the movable decorative body 401Y is operated.

  The effect determination table for matching is set so that the number of cases where the movable decorative body 401Y is operated is larger than the case where the movable decorative body 401Y is not operated. On the other hand, the effect determination table for non-coincidence is set so that the number of cases where the movable decorative body 401Y is operated is smaller than the case where the movable decorative body 401Y is not operated. As a result, the degree of expectation to be a big hit when the movable decorative body 401Y operates is adjusted to be higher than when the movable decorative body 401Y does not operate.

  In the present embodiment, the guide groove 126Y is camouflaged by the decoration 125Y that teaches the effective line, and the decoration 125Y and the guide groove 126Y can coexist suitably.

  The movable decorative body 401Y crosses the front of the display screen G while being held by the guide grooves 126aY and 126bY of the game board 100Y. At this time, the arm or the like supporting the movable decorative body 401Y does not protrude to a position overlapping with the display screen G, so that the appearance using the movable decorative body 401Y can be suitably improved.

  A plurality of paths along which the movable decorative body 401Y crosses the front of the display screen G are set, and the player can be predicted along which path the movable decorative body 401Y will fall. The effect can be prevented from being monotonous.

  Further, the moving path of the movable decorative body 401Y has a shape (figure of eight) that can be traced with one stroke, and the movable decorative body 401Y can be used repeatedly. Regarding the configuration used when moving the movable decorative body 401Y from the lower stop to the upper stop, it is hidden behind the center frame 130Y, so that the presence of the movable accessory device 300Y makes the gaming machine look good. Can be suitably suppressed from decreasing.

<Other embodiments>
The present invention is not limited to the content described in each of the above-described embodiments, and may be implemented as follows, for example. Incidentally, each of the following configurations may be individually applied to each of the above embodiments, or some or all of them may be combined and applied to each of the above embodiments. In addition, all or some of the various configurations described in the above embodiments can be arbitrarily combined. In this case, it is preferable that the technical significance (effect to be exhibited) of each component to be combined is ensured. Each of the following configurations may be individually applied to a new configuration formed by a combination of the embodiments, or some or all of them may be applied in combination.

  (1) In each of the above-described embodiments, the symbol that stops is always displayed in the sub-display area Rs as the “second area”. However, the sub-display area Rs is at least used as “switching means”. It is only necessary that a symbol is displayed when various effects such as a holding notice effect are executed in association with the operation of the movable auditors 170 to 173 and the like. That is, when the effects are not executed, the symbol displayed in the sub-display area Rs may be hidden.

  (2) In each of the above embodiments, the symbols displayed in the sub-display area Rs are shielded by the movable auditors 170 to 173 as “switching means”, but the visibility of these symbols is relatively low. If it is possible to switch between a high state and a low state, it is sufficient that the shielding function is not necessarily provided.

  For example, the movable auditors 170 to 173 and the like are configured to be translucent or opaque so that the symbol displayed in the sub-display area Rs is not made invisible but is difficult to be visually recognized through the movable auditors 170 to 173. You may.

  (3) It is only necessary to be able to change the visibility of the symbol stopped in the sub-display area Rs, and it is not always necessary to make the “switching means” movable.

  For example, a transmissive liquid crystal or the like is mounted on a portion of the game board 100 that overlaps with the sub-display area Rs before and after, and the visibility of the sub-display area Rs is changed by changing the display mode of the transmissive liquid crystal (visual approval / visual impossibility). ) Is also possible.

  In addition, if attention is paid to changing the visibility of the symbol stopped in the sub-display area Rs by the movable movable members 170 to 173 and the like, for example, a configuration corresponding to the movable character is displayed / not displayed on the display screen G. (A configuration in which movable movable objects are pseudo-displayed), the visibility of the symbol in the sub-display area Rs may be changed.

  (4) A part of the main symbol stopped and displayed rearward (in the seventh embodiment, the first portion P1) when movable movable members 170 to 173 or the like as “switching means” are arranged at the shielding position. ) Is covered so as to be visible from the front, but may be covered so that the entire main symbol stopped and displayed behind is invisible.

  (5) Although the effective lines L1 to L5 and the non-effective lines L6 to L11 are provided as the lines at which the symbols stop, it is not necessary to distinguish the lines L1 to L11 at which the symbols can stop as the effective lines and the non-effective lines. It is not necessarily required that the non-effective lines L6 to L11 can be set as the effective lines. In this case, for example, the movable auditors 170 to 173 are operated so as to straddle both the main display area Rm and the sub-display area Rs or when a combination of symbols corresponding to the jackpot result is displayed in the sub-display area Rs. By indicating the combination of the symbols in this way, a configuration in which the jackpot is won can be notified. By the way, in the case of such a configuration, it is optional whether or not to perform the above-described re-fluctuation effect of the symbol, and furthermore, when performing the re-fluctuation effect, a line for stopping the combination of the symbols corresponding to the jackpot is provided. Whether or not to change is optional.

  For example, in the case of the probability variable jackpot result, after straddling both the main display region Rm and the sub display region Rs or after displaying a combination of symbols corresponding to the normal jackpot result in the sub display region Rs, It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the symbol is changed again so that a combination of symbols corresponding to the result of the probability change jackpot is displayed in the main display area Rm, and a re-change effect is performed. Regarding the re-fluctuation effect, the main display region Rm is straddled over both the main display region Rm and the sub display region Rs, or is displayed in the sub display region Rs, as compared with the case where a combination of symbols corresponding to the normal jackpot result is displayed in the main display region Rm. By adopting a configuration that is more likely to occur when a combination of symbols corresponding to the normal jackpot result is displayed, more specifically, a combination of symbols corresponding to the ordinary jackpot result is displayed in the main display region Rm. <When a combination of symbols corresponding to the normal jackpot result is displayed so as to straddle both the main display region Rm and the sub-display region Rs <A combination of symbols corresponding to the normal jackpot result is displayed in the sub-display region Rs The combination of symbols corresponding to the jackpot result in the main display area Rm is configured by increasing the possibility of occurrence in the order of There can be expectation even player even if you do not see to suitably suppress the lowered early.

  (6) The display mode of the symbols in the symbol display device 161 as the “symbol display means” (that is, the type of each symbol, the symbol arrangement, the mode of the variable display, the mode of the reach display, the mode of executing the hold notice, and the like) are as described above. The present invention is not limited to the embodiments, and can be variously changed without departing from the gist shown in each embodiment.

  For example, the scroll display direction of the symbol row is not limited to the horizontal direction but may be the vertical direction. Also, the number of symbol rows is not limited to three, but may be four or more rows or two rows. Further, it is not necessary to set a plurality of valid lines, and at least one is sufficient.

  By the way, in the display screen G, it is not always necessary to scroll and display the symbol row in a predetermined direction, and a variable display in which the symbol displayed at a predetermined position disappears and the next symbol is displayed so that the symbol is switched. Embodiments are also possible. In this case, although the concept of the moving direction of the symbol disappears, by providing a certain regularity to the mode of the change, the gaming ability of predicting the changing display pattern of the symbol is secured.

  (7) In each of the above-described embodiments, when the symbol corresponding to the jackpot result finally stops in the state where the reach display is being performed, the more the further the stop is made on the downstream side of the reach line, the later the replay is made. Although it was configured to increase the possibility of a jackpot result by fluctuating, it is sufficient that at least the expectation of the jackpot is set to be higher as the degree of separation of the symbol from the reach line described above increases. The separation direction is not limited to the downstream direction. When the vehicle stops in the upstream direction, the degree of expectation of a big hit may be set to be high. Also, a combination of these two configurations may be set so that the expectation of a big hit increases with the degree of separation from the reach line to the upstream side or the downstream side when the symbol stops.

  According to the modification, when the reach display is performed, the player first expects the predetermined symbol to stop at a position far away, and otherwise, the predetermined symbol is displayed on the reach line. In the case where the vehicle is expected to stop, and when the vehicle passes the reach line, it is expected that a predetermined symbol stops far away from the reach line. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately maintain the player's expectation during the reach display, thereby contributing to a further improvement in the degree of attention to the game.

  (8) If the degree of expectation of the big hit differs depending on the stop mode of the symbol related to the reach display, the big hit does not necessarily need to be made during the game round by the re-change. For example, it is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the reach display that greatly deviates is easily selected when the effect is set as a preliminary announcement effect (a look-ahead effect) and a jackpot is won in a later game round.

  Further, in such a configuration, when the reach display (for example, normal reach) is performed, the stop condition of the middle symbol row is changed by satisfying the execution condition of the hold notice (replacement of symbols or scrolling). It is possible to increase the chances of executing the suspension notice. Such a reservation notice can be realized by changing only the symbol that finally stops without having to change all of the symbol change display modes, so even if the reservation notice is interrupted during the game round, As a result, the control load does not increase extremely.

  If the above-mentioned change of the stop eye is performed under the condition that the discriminating power is low and the visual recognition power is changing at a high speed, it is possible to appropriately suppress the occurrence of a sense of discomfort due to the interruption of the suspension notice.

  (9) For example, it may be assumed that new hold information is acquired between the start of the game round and the final display of the game result, and the game round being executed based on such hold information is assumed. (The timing of determining whether or not execution (for example, the reservation notice) is performed by displaying a combination of symbols is set as the timing after the start of the game round), and the execution conditions of the reservation notice Is reduced to increase the execution opportunity of the suspension notice. However, by adding the following conditions when the execution condition is satisfied, the notice effect can be more appropriately executed.

  For example, when the hold information corresponding to the jackpot result is newly obtained and the hold notice is executed based on the hold information, the combination of the symbols to be finally stopped determined at the start of the game round is grasped, and this grasp is performed. Based on the obtained information, it is determined whether or not there is a combination of the symbols corresponding to the suspension notice with a high degree of dispersion corresponding to the combination with a high expectation. Then, if there is a thing with a large degree of dispersion, the suspension notice is given, and if there is no thing with a large degree of dispersion, it is determined whether or not a thing with a large degree of dispersion can be formed by replacing the stop symbol. Alternatively, if the replacement is possible, the reservation advance notice may be made based on the replacement.

  (10) In each of the above-described embodiments, the lottery (holding notice setting processing) for generating the reservation notice is performed by the effect control device 82, but this may be performed by the main control device 81. In this case, by adopting a configuration in which a command is output from the main control device 81 when a hold notice is won, the number of command outputs can be reduced as compared with the above-described configuration in which a command is output each time the hold information is acquired.

  (11) In each of the above embodiments, a configuration may be adopted in which a plurality of working ports 115 are provided. In this case, the plurality of working ports may be configured to be superior or inferior in the execution frequency or the expectation of the suspension notice.

  For example, when two working ports are provided, the holding information based on winning in the other working port is more effective than the holding information based on winning in the other working port in the hold notice setting process by the effect control device 82. It is good also as a structure which is easy to win the lottery which generates a suspension notice. In addition, the hold information based on the winning of the other operating port is easier to win the special holding advance lottery process by the effect control device 82 than the holding information based on the winning of the one operating port (the special holding advance notice is executed). (Easy) configuration. Furthermore, when the hold information based on winning in one of the operating ports is information corresponding to the jackpot result, it is more directing than when the holding information based on the winning in the other operating port is information corresponding to the jackpot result. It is good also as a structure which is easy to win the lottery of generation of a reservation notice or the special reservation notice lottery by the control device 82.

  In these configurations, if the electric accessory is provided for one of the operating ports, a winning is likely to occur in the operating port provided with the electric accessory in the high-frequency support mode. The notice (special reservation notice) is easily executed, and the execution frequency of these reservation notices (special reservation notice) can be changed without changing the winning probability of the occurrence of the reservation notice (special reservation notice). In this way, the production can be given inflection and the interest can be improved.

  (12) In each of the above-mentioned embodiments, the configuration may be such that the ineffective uniform effect or the re-fluctuation effect and the special reservation notice can be established at the same time. Specifically, for example, the upper and lower symbol rows Z1 and Z3 are set to the stop mode in which the cross line reach is performed in the non-effective line, and in the stop mode of the cross line reach, the symbol combination corresponding to the jackpot result is stopped in one of the reach lines. In this way, a non-effective uniform effect is produced, and the symbol forming the other reach line is stopped in another region of the middle symbol row Z2 to stop the special reservation notice by the symbol forming the other reach line. . After the variable display of all the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 is completed, the symbol of the line on which the symbol combination corresponding to the jackpot result is formed can be visually recognized to perform a re-variation effect, or a symbol combination to be a special reservation notice is formed. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the symbol on the side to be played is made visually recognizable and a special reservation notice is given (in this case, the other becomes an ineffectively aligned effect). According to this configuration, if it is a re-fluctuation effect, a jackpot result is obtained in the game time, and there is a possibility that a special reservation notice will be issued even if it does not become a re-fluctuation effect, Can also have a sense of expectation.

  (13) In the above embodiments, the main control device 81 determines the variable display time, and the effect control device 82 determines various effects in accordance with the variable display time. The device 81 may be configured to determine the variable display time and various effects, or the effect control device 82 may be configured to determine the variable display time and various effects. In these cases, the variable display time may be determined first and various effects may be determined in accordance with the variable display time as in the above embodiments, or the various effects may be determined and then determined. It is good also as a structure which determines a variable display time according to an effect.

  (14) In the above-described first to third embodiments, based on the fact that the advance notice condition has been satisfied during the execution of the variable display, the holding advance notice is executed in the game time in which the variable display is being executed. However, the following may be changed. That is, in place of or in addition to the above-described configuration, based on the fact that the advance notice condition has been established in the game time in which the non-specific symbol is executed as the preliminary notification corresponding symbol and the preliminary announcement is made, the preliminary announcement of the non-specific symbol is changed to the preliminary announcement of the specific symbol. A configuration may be adopted in which it is determined whether or not the change can be made, and if the change can be made, the notice is changed to a reservation notice with a specific symbol.

  More specifically, when the advance notice condition of the suspension notice by the specific symbol is satisfied in the game time for executing the suspension announcement by the non-specific symbol, that is, for example, based on the suspension information corresponding to the outreach by the non-specific symbol If the hold condition corresponding to the probability change jackpot result is acquired at the timing before the notice condition is satisfied and the hold information corresponding to the out-of-reach becomes the target of the pass / fail judgment, the hold notice by the non-specific symbol is specified It is configured to change as a reservation notice by design. In the case of executing the suspension notice by the non-specific symbol, the stop mode corresponding to the duplicate announcement in the third embodiment may be selected, and the non-specific symbol among the stop modes corresponding to the duplicate announcement may be selected. In this case, the movable accessory is operated so that only the suspension notice is established. Then, when the stop mode corresponding to the duplicate notice is selected in the game time for executing the reservation notice by the non-specific symbol, the movable role to be operated by changing to the reservation notice by the specific symbol is changed, It is good also as a structure which establishes the suspension notice of a specific symbol, without establishing the suspension notice of a specific symbol.

  According to the modified example, it is possible to change from the suspension notice by the non-specific symbol to the suspension announcement by the specific symbol without changing the stop symbol, and even after the end of the variable display of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3. It is possible to easily change the design to be subjected to the suspension notice.

  In addition, the stop mode of each symbol on the display screen G includes the stop mode of the suspension notice (normal suspension advance notice) using only the symbol stopped in the main display area Rm, and the symbol stopped in the sub-display area Rs. The suspension mode of the suspension notice (special suspension notice) is also included. For example, the mode in which the main symbol with “6” attached to the upper portion of the middle line L2 and the middle and lower portions of the left line L1 is stopped is a mode of stopping the normal reservation notice by the non-specific symbol. In this case, the main symbol with “7” attached to the upper portion of the left non-effective line L9 and the middle and lower portions of the right line L3 is stopped, and the special reserve notice is stopped by the specific symbol. A stop mode such as in a game round in which a non-specific symbol is given a preliminary notice is selected, and if a preliminary notice condition is established by a specific symbol during execution of the specific game, the reserve notice of the specific game is normally given. It may be configured to change from the suspension notice to the special suspension notice.

  (15) In the stage effect described in the third embodiment, the number of steps can be arbitrarily changed, but the upper limit of the number of steps is preferably within the range of the upper limit of the number of reservations plus one. . Note that the stage effect is not an indispensable configuration, and the stage effect can be removed from the suspension notice.

  (16) In the configuration in which a plurality of suspension notices are executed without changing the stop result in one game round as in the third embodiment, a part of the suspension notices constituted by the movable auditors 170 to 173. Is not an essential component. That is, for example, in the main display region Rm, a stop result corresponding to a plurality of suspension notices may be visually displayed as a stop result of one game round, whereby a plurality of suspension notices may be established.

  (17) In the fourth and fifth embodiments, the development point may be set on the fluctuation base side of the reach line. In this case, since the development points in one reach line are more diversified than in the fifth embodiment, it is difficult to limit the presence or absence of the development from the reach line to the super reach display.

  (18) In the fifth embodiment, the expectation of the jackpot result becomes higher as the development point from the normal reach display to the super reach display is further away from the reach line, but if the reach symbol is away from the reach line, It is good also as composition which the development rate to super reach display becomes so high that it separates.

  (19) In the sixth embodiment, the movable auditors 170 to 173 are moved from the shielding position to the non-shielding position based on the detection results of the detection sensors 136a and 136b. It is good also as a structure moved to a position. That is, the movable auditors 170 to 173 may be arranged in the non-shielding position instead of the shielding position in the normal state, and may be moved from the non-shielding position to the shielding position based on the detection results of the detection sensors 136a and 136b. For example, by configuring the movable auditors 170 to 173 to move to the shielding position when the game balls pass through the rear ball passage 143, the movable auditors 170 to 173 disposed behind the game balls passing therethrough The operation of the game ball can be emphasized by the contrast with.

  (20) In the seventh embodiment, the upper and lower movable members 310, 320, 330, and 340 may be inverted. That is, in the seventh embodiment, the upper movable members 310 and 330 have the rear ribs 314b and 334b as the open distal ends, and the lower movable members 320 and 340 have the front ribs 324a and 344a as the lower ribs. Although the front movable ribs 314a and 334a of the upper movable roles 310 and 330 are set as the open distal end, the rear movable ribs 324b and 344b of the lower movable roles 320 and 340 are set as the open distal end. Is also good.

  (21) In the tenth and eleventh embodiments, the decoration 125 as the “predetermined pattern” is formed by processing the surface of the game board 100. It is optional to provide. For example, a pattern may be formed by attaching a seal or the like. In addition, a light emitting unit provided on the outer peripheral portion of the game board 100 and a light guide unit for guiding light from the light emitting unit to a light emitting area formed on the game board 100 are provided. May be displayed.

  In addition, the “predetermined pattern” may be configured so as to overlap the guide groove 126 as the “guide portion” in the front-rear direction, and the location of the “predetermined pattern” is not limited to the front portion of the game board 100. For example, it is also possible to dispose it on the back of the game board 100 or bury it inside the game board.

  (22) In the tenth and eleventh embodiments, the concave guide groove 126 is provided as the “guide portion”, but the function of guiding the movable decorative body 401 and the like as the “movable body” can be exhibited. If so, the shape is not limited to a concave shape. It is also possible to form a convex shape protruding from the back surface of the game board 100. For example, a guide rail may be provided on the back surface of the game board 100. In addition, about the structure equivalent to a "guide part", it is not necessary to integrally form with the game board 100, and the guide member (for example, rail member) provided separately from the game board 100 is attached to the game board 100. It is also possible.

  (23) In each of the above embodiments, the symbol combination corresponding to the reserved notice is constituted by, for example, the same symbol combination (for example, “7” symbols × 3), but any symbol combination is associated with the reserved notice. Is optional. For example, three consecutive symbols (for example, "1" symbol, "2" symbol, "3" symbol) may constitute a symbol combination corresponding to the reservation notice.

  Moreover, although the symbol combination corresponding to the reservation notice is configured using three symbol columns, the present invention is not limited to this. It is only necessary that a symbol combination corresponding to the reservation notice is formed by combining at least a plurality of symbols, and the target can be two symbol columns.

  (24) In each of the above embodiments, based on the command output from the main control device 81, the effect control device 82 controls the movable characters 170 to 173, 310, 320, 330, 340 and the display control device 212. Instead, the display control device 212 controls the effect control device 82 and the movable characters 170 to 173, 310, 320, 330, and 340 based on the command output from the main control device 81. It is good also as a structure which performs. Further, instead of the configuration in which the effect control device 82 and the display control device 212 are separately provided, a configuration in which both the control devices 82 and 212 are provided as one sub-side control device may be adopted. Further, the configuration may be such that the functions of the effect control device 82 or the display control device 212 are integrated in the main control device 81, or a configuration in which the functions of both the effect control device 82 and the display control device 212 are integrated in the main control device 81. It may be.

  (25) In the above-described embodiment, a so-called chance is formed as “special notification” by a combination of symbols that are stopped or temporarily stopped, but the specific mode of “special notification” is arbitrary. is there. For example, a configuration in which “special notification” is performed by causing a specific character to appear may be adopted. In particular, when a plurality of special announcements are made during one game round, it is possible to adopt a configuration in which the character appears a plurality of times or a plurality of times.

  (26) Other types of pachinko machines, such as pachinko machines, which are different from the above embodiments, such as a pachinko machine in which an electric accessory opens a predetermined number of times when a game ball enters a specific region of a special device, or a game in a specific region of a special device The present invention can also be applied to a pachinko machine that becomes a jackpot when a ball enters and a jackpot, a pachinko machine equipped with another accessory, an arrangement ball machine, a sparrow ball, and the like.

  (26) The characteristic configurations shown in the first to eleventh embodiments and the configurations shown in the other embodiments may be mutually applied in any combination.

<About the inventions extracted from the above embodiments>
Hereinafter, features of the invention group extracted from each of the above-described embodiments will be described while showing effects and the like as necessary. In the following, for ease of understanding, the corresponding configuration in each of the above embodiments is appropriately shown in parentheses or the like, but is not limited to the specific configuration shown in parentheses or the like.

<Characteristic A group>
The invention described in the following feature group A is described as follows: "Some gaming machines such as pachinko machines are provided with a picture display device for changing and displaying a picture on a display screen. For example, when a game ball passes through an operating port provided in the game area, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to generate a specific game state advantageous to a player such as a hit state, and a variation display of a pattern is performed. When a lottery is won, a specific pattern combination or the like is finally stopped and displayed on the display screen, and the gaming state shifts to the specific gaming state (see, for example, JP-A-2005-074175). "In recent years, various ideas have been devised to increase the level of attention to games. However, in the configuration of gaming machines, in order to increase the level of interest in games, But there is room for improvement. In which the invention has been made with the problem to be solved that. "

Feature A1. A picture display means (symbol display device 161) for variably displaying a plurality of pictures on a display screen (display screen G);
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on satisfaction of a predetermined acquisition condition (a function of executing a winning process for an operating port in the main control device 81);
Acquisition information storage means (reservation area RE) for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means up to a predetermined number predetermined as a plurality of numbers;
An assignment determining unit (in the main control unit 81) that sequentially determines whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage unit corresponds to an assignment corresponding result corresponding to granting a privilege to a player. Function for executing the processing of step S501);
A bonus granting unit (a function of executing a game state transition process in the main control device 81) for granting a bonus to a player based on the result of the granting determination by the granting determination unit being the granting correspondence result;
Prior to the provision of the provision determination by the provision determination means or based on the provision of the provision determination by the provision determination means, the pattern display means starts the variable display of the design, and the provision determination is performed. Displaying a stop result corresponding to the result of the determination and terminating the variation display of the pattern as one of the game times, and setting the game information of each game time in accordance with the special information stored in the acquisition information storage means. Game control means for controlling the picture display means so that the picture is displayed in a variable manner (the function of executing the change start processing in the main control device 81 and the function of executing the change display control processing in the effect control device 82). In the equipped gaming machine,
A first area (main display area Rm) and a second area (sub-display area Rs) are set in a display area of the pattern on the display screen of the pattern display means.
The game times control means,
For each game round, based on the result of the determination, the stop mode determining means (for starting the change in the effect control device 82) for determining the mode of stopping the pattern in the game cycle related to the special information targeted for the determination. Function to perform processing),
In the case where the variation display of the pattern is performed at each game time, the pattern is stopped in the first area and the second area in the stop mode determined by the stop mode determination means, and the variable display of the game mode is ended. And means,
Switchable between a first state (for example, a non-shielded state) and a second state (for example, a shielded state) in which at least a part of the pattern stopped in the second area is more difficult or invisible than the first state. Switching means (movable accessory devices 162, 300);
Special notifying means (a function of executing an effect setting process for holding notice in the effect control device 82) for performing special notice (for example, holding notice) based on the stop state of the picture determined by the stopping manner determining means,
The stop mode determined by the stop mode determining means includes:
A first special stop mode (a stop result corresponding to a normal suspension notice) that is a predetermined special stop mode depending on a combination of pictures stopped in the first area;
A second special stop mode (a stop result corresponding to the special reservation notice) that is a predetermined special stop mode based on a combination of patterns including a pattern stopped in the second area;
The special notification unit controls the switching unit to switch from the second state to the first state based on the determination of the second special stop mode being made by the stop mode determination unit. A game machine characterized by having a notification switching control means (a function of executing the processing of steps S1208 to S1214 in the effect control device 82) for performing the special notification according to (1).

  According to the feature A1, the first area and the second area are set in the display area of the pattern on the display screen, and the special notification includes the special notification based on the combination of the patterns stopped in the first area (first special stop mode). , A special notification based on a combination of pictures including a picture that stops in the second area (second special stop mode). In this way, by diversifying the stop mode of the special notification, it is possible to prevent the special notification from being monotonous, and to contribute to an increase in the degree of attention to the game.

  In particular, it is possible to switch between a first state (for example, a non-blocking state) and a second state (for example, a blocking state) in which at least a part of the pattern stopped in the second area is more difficult or invisible than the first state. When the switching means is provided, and the special notification in the second special stop mode is performed, the switching means is controlled to switch from the second state to the first state. As described above, the special notification according to the second special stop mode involves not only a combination of the patterns stopped and displayed on the display screen but also a change in the state of the switching unit. As described above, when the special notification is performed, the notification mode is provided with the difference in the motion of the entire device related to the notification, whereby the effect of improving the degree of attention can be easily exerted.

Feature A2. A picture display means (symbol display device 161) for variably displaying a plurality of pictures on a display screen (display screen G);
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on satisfaction of a predetermined acquisition condition (a function of executing a winning process for an operating port in the main control device 81);
Acquisition information storage means (reservation area RE) for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means up to a predetermined number predetermined as a plurality of numbers;
An assignment determining unit (in the main control unit 81) that sequentially determines whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage unit corresponds to an assignment corresponding result corresponding to granting a privilege to a player. Function for executing the processing of step S501);
A bonus granting unit (a function of executing a game state transition process in the main control device 81) for granting a bonus to a player based on the result of the granting determination by the granting determination unit being the granting correspondence result;
Prior to the provision of the provision determination by the provision determination means or based on the provision of the provision determination by the provision determination means, the pattern display means starts the variable display of the design, and the provision determination is performed. Displaying a stop result corresponding to the result of the determination and terminating the variation display of the pattern as one of the game times, and setting the game information of each game time in accordance with the special information stored in the acquisition information storage means. Game control means for controlling the picture display means so that the picture is displayed in a variable manner (the function of executing the change start processing in the main control device 81 and the function of executing the change display control processing in the effect control device 82). In the equipped gaming machine,
A first area (main display area Rm) and a second area (sub-display area Rs) are set in a display area of the pattern on the display screen of the pattern display means.
The game times control means,
For each game round, based on the result of the determination, the stop mode determining means (for starting the change in the effect control device 82) for determining the mode of stopping the pattern in the game cycle related to the special information targeted for the determination. Function to perform processing),
In the case where the variation display of the pattern is performed at each game time, the pattern is stopped in the first area and the second area in the stop mode determined by the stop mode determination means, and the variable display of the game mode is ended. And means,
Switchable between a first state (for example, a non-shielded state) and a second state (for example, a shielded state) in which at least a part of the pattern stopped in the second area is more difficult or invisible than the first state. Switching means (movable accessory devices 162, 300);
The information corresponding to the determination result in the case where the predetermined special information stored in the acquisition information storage unit is the target of the assignment determination, the information before the predetermined special information is the target of the assignment determination. Destination specifying means for specifying at the timing (a function of executing a confirmation process for a hold notice in main controller 81);
When the specified result by the preceding specifying means is a predetermined specifying result, the preceding specifying means is executed in a game time performed before the gaming time related to the special information specified by the preceding specifying means. Special notification means (a function of executing an effect setting process for an advance notice in the effect control device 82) for performing a special notification (suspension notice) corresponding to the specified result of
The stop mode determined by the stop mode determining means includes:
A first special stop mode (a stop result corresponding to a normal suspension notice) that is a predetermined special stop mode depending on a combination of pictures stopped in the first area;
A second special stop mode (a stop result corresponding to the special reservation notice) that is a predetermined special stop mode based on a combination of patterns including a pattern stopped in the second area;
The special notification unit controls the switching unit to switch from the second state to the first state based on the determination of the second special stop mode being made by the stop mode determination unit. A game machine characterized by having a notification switching control means (a function of executing the processing of steps S1208 to S1214 in the effect control device 82) for performing the special notification according to (1).

  According to the feature A2, the special notification corresponding to the predetermined special information stored in the acquisition information storage unit and not subject to the addition determination is performed at a timing before the special information becomes the target of the addition determination. May be executed. Accordingly, for the player, not only the game for checking the obtained determination result of the special information but also the order in which the determination is made when a plurality of special information is stored in the obtained information storage means. With respect to the later special information, a game for checking or predicting the result of the case of being subjected to the grant determination according to the content of the special notification is added, and diversification of the game is realized.

  Also, a first area and a second area are set in the display area of the pattern on the display screen, and the special notification is a special notification based on a combination of the patterns stopped in the first area (first special stop mode), and the second area. Is set to a special notification based on a combination of pictures including a picture to be stopped (second special stop mode). In this way, by diversifying the stop mode of the special notification, it is possible to suppress the special notification from becoming monotonous, and to contribute to an increase in the degree of attention to the game.

  In particular, it is possible to switch between a first state (for example, a non-blocking state) and a second state (for example, a blocking state) in which at least a part of the pattern stopped in the second area is more difficult or invisible than the first state. When the switching means is provided, and the special notification in the second special stop mode is performed, the switching means is controlled to switch from the second state to the first state. As described above, the special notification according to the second special stop mode involves not only a combination of the patterns stopped and displayed on the display screen but also a change in the state of the switching unit. As described above, when the special notification is performed, the notification mode is provided with the difference in the motion of the entire device related to the notification, whereby the effect of improving the degree of attention can be easily exerted.

Feature A3. A transition unit (a function of executing a hold notice setting process in the effect control device 82) for transitioning to an executable state for the special notification based on a result of the specification by the destination specifying unit being the predetermined result. ,
The special notification means,
When shifting to the executable state by the shift unit, based on the stop mode of the current game round determined by the stop mode determination unit, the first area and the second area are changed during the game round. Grasping means for grasping a stopped pattern or a pattern to be stopped in the first area and the second area (a function of executing the step S2101, the step S2403, the step S2503, etc. in the effect control device 82);
Judgment means for judging whether or not the pattern stop mode in the game round can be changed to the first special stop mode or the second special stop mode based on the grasping result by the grasping means (production) Functions for executing steps S2404, S2504, and the like in the control device 82);
If the determining means determines that the first special stop mode can be changed, the first special stop mode is executed by changing the pattern stop mode in the current game round to the first special stop mode. Notifying means (a function of executing a process of correcting to the normal suspension notice in the first to third correction processes in the effect control device 82);
When it is determined by the determination unit that the change to the second special stop mode is possible, the stop mode of the pattern in the current game round is changed to the second special stop mode, and the notification switching control unit switches the switching unit. Is switched from the second state to the first state to execute the special notification. (A processing for correcting the special hold notice in the first to third correction processing in the effect control device 82 is executed.) The gaming machine according to feature A2, comprising:

  According to the above configuration, the state may shift to the executable state for special notification during the game round (during display of the change of the pattern). In this case, the first special notification unit or the second special notification unit may set the current state. Special announcements may be made during the game times. In this way, by expanding the allowable range of the acquisition timing of the special information in which the special notification can be executed, it is possible to preferably increase the chances of the special notification being executed.

  In particular, in the present gaming machine, a special notification based on a combination of pictures stopped in the first area and a special notification based on a combination of pictures including a pattern stopped in the second area are set. For this reason, when the game state shifts to the standby state during the game round as described above, even if the stop mode of the current game round cannot be changed to the special notification based on the combination of the patterns to be stopped in the first area, the game state is changed to the second area. If the pattern to be stopped is included, there is a possibility that the special information can be changed to the special information, and even if the acquisition timing of the special information is diversified, it is possible to preferably prevent the opportunity to perform the special information from being missed.

  Feature A4. The special notification means, when the determination means determines that the first special stop mode and the second special stop mode can be changed to both, the first special stop mode and the second special notification mode. The gaming machine according to Feature A3, further comprising a unit that prioritizes the special notification by the special notification unit.

  According to the above configuration, in a case where a transition is made to the standby state during the game, the special notification in the first special stop mode is executed with priority over the special notification in the second special stop mode. Here, in the case of the special notification that is the second special stop mode, not only the stop mode but also the switching control of the switching unit is a condition of the special notification. The movement of the switching means is unnecessary when the special notification in which the special notification is established only in the pattern stop mode is performed. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly perform the change, and it is possible to appropriately suppress an increase in the processing load due to the special notification.

  Feature A5. The special notification means, when the determination means determines that the first special stop mode and the second special stop mode can be changed to any of the first special stop mode and the second special stop mode, performs the second special notification by the second special notification mode. The gaming machine according to Feature A3 or Feature A4, further comprising a unit that prioritizes the special notification by the special notification unit.

  According to the above configuration, when the state is shifted to the executable state during the game, the special notification in the second special stop mode is executed with priority over the special notification in the first special stop mode. . In the case of the special notification in the second special stop mode, the switching control of the switching unit is performed, so that the visual impact is stronger than in the special notification in the first special stop mode. Thereby, it is possible to improve the degree of attention to the game.

Feature A6. In the display area of the pattern on the display screen, a plurality of variable display areas (each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3) are provided in one-to-one correspondence with a plurality of pattern rows,
The variation display mode of the pattern in the variation display area includes a high identification variation mode and a low identification variation mode in which the discriminability of the pattern is relatively high and low, and the high identification variation mode and the low identification variation mode are included. The change mode can be switched for each of the change display areas,
The first special notifying means and the second special notifying means change the pattern of the variable display area of the plurality of variable display areas, in which the variable display is performed in the low identification variation mode, to change the game time. The gaming machine according to any one of features A3 to A5, wherein the stop mode of the pattern is changed to the stop mode corresponding to the special notification.

  According to the above configuration, in the configuration in which the stop pattern is changed during the game round and the special notification is performed, the change of the pattern in the variable display area in which the variable display is performed in the low identification variation mode in which the pattern identification is low is low. Since this is performed, it is possible to reduce the sense of discomfort given to the player when the picture is changed.

Feature A7. A transition unit (a function of executing a hold notice setting process in the effect control device 82) for transitioning to an executable state for the special notification based on a result of the specification by the destination specifying unit being the predetermined result. ,
The stop mode determining means is configured to be capable of determining the second special stop mode even in a situation where the state has not shifted to the executable state,
The notifying switch control means, when the game state shifts to the executable state during the game time, if the stop mode of the game time being executed is the second special stop mode, the switch means sets the switch means to the second state. A2 to A3, characterized in that it has an in-operation switching control means (function of executing the processing of steps S2101 to S2105 in the effect control device 82) for switching from the first state to the first state and executing the special notification. The gaming machine according to any one of features A6.

  According to the above configuration, if a transition is made to the standby state in a state in which the variation display of the game times is performed so that the stop mode becomes the second special stop mode, the switching unit is switched from the second state to the first state. Special announcement. On the other hand, even in a situation in which the variation display of the game times is performed so that the stop mode becomes the second special stop mode, unless the execution mode is set, the switching control of the switching unit is not performed and the second area is displayed. The stopped pattern is maintained in a state in which it is difficult to visually recognize or is invisible, and no special notification is performed. That is, without changing the stop mode determined by the stop mode determination means at the start of the game round, it is possible to change whether or not to perform the special notification depending on the subsequent situation. As a result, it is possible to increase the chances of performing the special notification without changing the stop mode during the execution of the fluctuation display of the game times.

Feature A8. The special notification means,
The pattern stopped in the first area and the second area or the first area and the second area during the game time based on the current game time stop mode determined by the stop mode determination means. Grasping means for grasping a pattern to be stopped in an area; and a specific picture combination corresponding to special notification by a combination of pictures including a picture to be stopped in the second area based on the grasping result of the grasping means after the start of the game round. Determining means for determining whether or not can be formed,
The notification switching control means controls the switching means to switch from the second state to the first state when the determination means determines that the specific picture combination can be formed, thereby providing the second state. The gaming machine according to Feature A2, further including a unit that allows a pattern forming the specific pattern combination to be visually recognized in the region.

  In recent years, special notification (so-called pre-reading effect) according to predetermined special information that is stored in the acquired information storage means and is not targeted for addition determination is performed more than the special information is targeted for addition determination. A gaming machine executed at the previous timing has been proposed. In this type of gaming machine, the following game is added to the player, in addition to the game for checking the obtained determination result of the special information. In other words, when a plurality of special information is stored in the acquired information storage means, the result of the case where the assignment determination is made for the special information whose order of assignment is later depends on the content of the special notification. A game of checking or predicting is added. Thereby, the monotony of the game is suppressed, and the interest of the game is improved.

  However, when performing such special notification, it is general that whether or not to perform the special notification is determined based on the hold information stored at the start of the game round. There was a problem that the restrictions were so strong that the effect of improving the interest by the special notification could not be sufficiently exhibited. In this regard, according to the configuration shown in this feature, when special information is acquired after the start of the game round, there is a possibility that special notification corresponding to this special information can be executed. That is, the execution conditions are relaxed as compared with the conventional look-ahead effect, and the above-described effect can be more appropriately exhibited.

  Feature A9. The feature A1 to feature A8, wherein the notification switching control unit performs the switching control so that the switching unit switches from the second state to the first state after the change display of the pattern is completed. A gaming machine according to any one of the preceding claims.

  As described above, when the switching unit is in the second state, the pattern that has stopped or stopped in the second area is difficult or invisible. For this reason, it is difficult for the player to recognize that the second special stop mode has been set. Therefore, after the change display of the pattern is completed, that is, when the pattern is stopped, the switching unit is set to the first state, so that a special notification that is unexpected to the player is performed. Further, according to the above configuration, the expectation that the special notification may be performed even after the change display of the pattern is finished remains, and attention to the game is quickly reduced after the stop display of the pattern. It can be suppressed suitably.

Feature A10. The picture display means is configured to scroll and display the picture row in the arrangement direction,
The feature A1 is characterized in that the second region is set to include a region on the display screen that is upstream from the first region in the scroll direction of the picture row. A gaming machine according to one.

  According to the above configuration, the pattern stopped in the second area passes through the first area before the stop. As a player, it is possible to grasp to some extent whether or not the second special stop mode is set before switching of the switching means, and it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the stopped pattern.

Feature A11. The picture display means is configured to scroll and display the picture row in the arrangement direction,
The second area is set so as to include an area downstream of the first area on the display screen in the scroll direction of the pattern row, any of the features A1 to A10. The gaming machine according to one.

  Since the second area is located on the downstream side of the first area, it is difficult to grasp the pattern stopped in the second area during the change (immediately before the stop). Thereby, it can be suppressed that the player is in the second special stop mode before the switching means is switched, and the special notification can be made surprising.

Feature A12. The picture display means is configured to scroll and display the picture row in the arrangement direction,
The first area and the second area on the display screen are arranged in a scroll direction of the picture row,
The pattern display means, when a predetermined pattern is stopped and displayed in the first area in a state where the pattern row is stopped and displayed, a pattern preceding or following the predetermined pattern in the second area. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A11, wherein the pattern is configured to be stopped and displayed.

  According to the above configuration, since the pattern row is scroll-displayed, the player stops the pattern stopped in the second area which is difficult or invisible by the switching means, and stops the pattern in the first area. It can be guessed based on the pattern that is present. In other words, by watching the symbol stopped and displayed in the first area, it is possible to grasp to some extent whether or not the second special stop mode is set before switching of the switching unit. As a result, the degree of attention to the stop pattern can be increased.

Feature A13. The switching means,
A movable body (movable members 170 to 173, 310, 320, and 320) that overlaps with the second region by being in the second state and retracts to a position that does not overlap with the second region by being in the first state. 330, 340),
A drive unit (drive units 170a to 173a, 313, 323, 333, 343) for operating the movable body,
The notification switching control unit switches between the first state and the second state by driving and controlling the driving unit to operate the movable body, wherein the switching between the first state and the second state is performed. A gaming machine according to any one of the preceding claims.

  When the special notification according to the second special stop mode is performed, the movable body operates to change the visibility of the picture. By making the special notification an effect accompanied by the movement of the movable body, it becomes easier to draw the player's attention, which can contribute to an increase in the degree of attention to the special notification.

Feature A14. A picture display means (symbol display device 161) for variably displaying a plurality of pictures on a display screen (display screen G);
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on satisfaction of a predetermined acquisition condition (a function of executing a winning process for an operating port in the main control device 81);
Acquisition information storage means (reservation area RE) for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means up to a predetermined number predetermined as a plurality of numbers;
An assignment determining unit (in the main control unit 81) that sequentially determines whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage unit corresponds to an assignment corresponding result corresponding to granting a privilege to a player. Function for executing the processing of step S501);
A bonus granting unit (a function of executing a game state transition process in the main control device 81) for granting a bonus to a player based on the result of the granting determination by the granting determination unit being the granting correspondence result;
Prior to the provision of the provision determination by the provision determination means or based on the provision of the provision determination by the provision determination means, the pattern display means starts the variable display of the design, and the provision determination is performed. Displaying a stop result corresponding to the result of the determination and terminating the variation display of the pattern as one of the game times, and setting the game information of each game time in accordance with the special information stored in the acquisition information storage means. Game control means for controlling the picture display means so that the picture is displayed in a variable manner (the function of executing the change start processing in the main control device 81 and the function of executing the change display control processing in the effect control device 82). In the equipped gaming machine,
A first area (main display area Rm) and a second area (sub-display area Rs) are set in a display area of the pattern on the display screen of the pattern display means.
The game times control means,
For each game round, based on the result of the determination, the stop mode determining means (for starting the change in the effect control device 82) for determining the mode of stopping the pattern in the game cycle related to the special information targeted for the determination. Function to perform processing),
In a case where the pattern is changed and displayed in each game time, the pattern is stopped in at least the first area of the first area and the second area in the stop mode determined by the stop mode determination means, and the game mode is displayed. Means for ending the variable display of
Switching means (movable accessory device 162) capable of switching between a first state (for example, a non-shielded state) and a second state (for example, a shielded state) in which the second region is more difficult or invisible than the first state. 300)
Special notifying means (a function of executing an effect setting process for holding notice in the effect control device 82) for performing special notice (for example, holding notice) based on the stop state of the picture determined by the stopping manner determining means,
The stop mode determined by the stop mode determining means includes:
A first special stop mode (a stop result corresponding to a normal suspension notice) that is a special stop mode based on a combination of pictures stopped and displayed in the first area;
A second special stop mode (a stop result corresponding to a special suspension notice) that is a predetermined special stop mode based on a combination of patterns including a pattern stopped and displayed in the second area;
The special notification unit controls the switching unit to switch from the second state to the first state based on the determination of the second special stop mode being made by the stop mode determination unit. A game machine characterized by having a notification switching control means (a function of executing the processing of steps S1208 to S1214 in the effect control device 82) for performing the special notification according to (1).

  According to the feature A13, the first area and the second area are set in the display area of the pattern on the display screen, and the special notification includes the special notification based on the combination of the patterns stopped in the first area (the first special stop mode). , A special notification based on a combination of pictures including a picture that stops in the second area (second special stop mode). In this way, by diversifying the stop mode of the special notification, it is possible to prevent the special notification from being monotonous, and to contribute to an increase in the degree of attention to the game.

  In particular, it is possible to switch between a first state (for example, a non-blocking state) and a second state (for example, a blocking state) in which at least a part of the pattern stopped in the second area is more difficult or invisible than the first state. When the switching means is provided, and the special notification in the second special stop mode is performed, the switching means is controlled to switch from the second state to the first state. As described above, the special notification according to the second special stop mode involves not only a combination of the patterns stopped and displayed on the display screen but also a change in the state of the switching unit. As described above, when the special notification is performed, the notification mode is provided with the difference in motion of the entire device related to the notification, thereby making it easier to exhibit the effect of increasing the degree of attention.

  In addition, in the configuration shown in this feature, when the special notification relating to the second area is performed, the pattern may be always displayed in the second area, or the pattern may not be displayed before performing the special notification. → The display may be configured.

Feature A15. A picture display means (symbol display device 161) for variably displaying a plurality of pictures on a display screen (display screen G);
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on satisfaction of a predetermined acquisition condition (a function of executing a winning process for an operating port in the main control device 81);
Acquisition information storage means (reservation area RE) for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means up to a predetermined number predetermined as a plurality of numbers;
An assignment determining unit (in the main control unit 81) that sequentially determines whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage unit corresponds to an assignment corresponding result corresponding to granting a privilege to a player. Function for executing the processing of step S501);
A bonus granting unit (a function of executing a game state transition process in the main control device 81) for granting a bonus to a player based on the result of the granting determination by the granting determination unit being the granting correspondence result;
Prior to the provision of the provision determination by the provision determination means or based on the provision of the provision determination by the provision determination means, the pattern display means starts the variable display of the design, and the provision determination is performed. Displaying a stop result corresponding to the result of the determination and terminating the variation display of the pattern as one of the game times, and setting the game information of each game time in accordance with the special information stored in the acquisition information storage means. Game control means for controlling the picture display means so that the picture is displayed in a variable manner (the function of executing the change start processing in the main control device 81 and the function of executing the change display control processing in the effect control device 82). In the equipped gaming machine,
A first area (main display area Rm) and a second area (sub-display area Rs) are set in a display area of the pattern on the display screen of the pattern display means.
The game times control means,
For each game round, based on the result of the determination, the stop mode determining means (for starting the change in the effect control device 82) for determining the mode of stopping the pattern in the game cycle related to the special information targeted for the determination. Function to perform processing),
In the case where the variation display of the pattern is performed at each game time, the pattern is stopped in the first area and the second area in the stop mode determined by the stop mode determination means, and the variable display of the game mode is ended. And means,
Switching that can be switched between a first state (unshielded state) and a second state (shielded state) in which at least a part of the pattern stopped in the second area is more difficult or invisible than the first state. Means (movable accessory devices 162, 300);
Special notifying means (a function of executing an effect setting process for holding notice in the effect control device 82) for performing special notice (for example, holding notice) based on the stop state of the picture determined by the stopping manner determining means,
The special notification means,
Based on the stop mode of the current game round determined by the stop mode determination means, the pattern or the first area and the second area stopped in the first area and the second area during the game round. Grasping means for grasping the pattern to be stopped in the area,
A determination unit configured to determine whether a specific pattern combination corresponding to special notification can be formed by a combination of patterns including a pattern stopped in the second area based on a grasp result of the grasp unit after the start of the game round. When,
When the determination unit determines that the specific pattern combination can be formed, the control unit controls the switching unit to switch from the second state to the first state, thereby allowing the specific pattern combination to be formed in the second area. A game machine comprising: a notification switching control unit that allows a picture forming a symbol to be visually recognized.

  In recent years, special notification (so-called pre-reading effect) according to predetermined special information that is stored in the acquired information storage means and is not targeted for addition determination is performed more than the special information is targeted for addition determination. A gaming machine executed at the previous timing has been proposed. In this type of gaming machine, the following game is added to the player, in addition to the game for checking the obtained determination result of the special information. In other words, when a plurality of special information is stored in the acquired information storage means, the result of the case where the assignment determination is made for the special information whose order of assignment is later depends on the content of the special notification. A game of checking or predicting is added. Thereby, the monotony of the game is suppressed, and the interest of the game is improved.

  However, when performing such special notification, it is general that whether or not to perform the special notification is determined based on the hold information stored at the start of the game round. There was a problem that the restrictions were so strong that the effect of improving the interest by the special notification could not be sufficiently exhibited. In this regard, according to the configuration shown in this feature, when special information is acquired after the start of the game round, there is a possibility that special notification corresponding to this special information can be executed. That is, the execution conditions are relaxed as compared with the conventional look-ahead effect, and the above-described effect can be more appropriately exhibited.

  It is also possible to apply the technical ideas shown in the features A3 to A13 to the features A14 and A15.

  Further, the “predetermined specific stop mode” shown in the above feature group only needs to correspond to a stop mode determined in advance by the game turn control means or the like, and the appearances do not necessarily need to completely match. For example, when there are a plurality of pattern combination patterns and arrangement patterns in a configuration that forms a so-called chance eye or the like, that is, when a plurality of specific stop modes (chance eyes) are stored, these are combined as a concept. What is necessary is just "predetermined specific stop mode".

<Characteristic B group>
In addition, the invention described in the following feature B group is described as follows: "Some game machines such as pachinko machines include a picture display device that displays a picture on a display screen in a variable manner. For example, when a game ball passes through an operating port provided in the game area, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to generate a specific game state advantageous to a player such as a hit state, and a variation display of a pattern is performed. When a lottery is won, a specific pattern combination or the like is finally stopped and displayed on the display screen, and the gaming state shifts to the specific gaming state (for example, JP 2005-074175 A). Regarding the background and technology, "In recent years, various ideas have been devised to increase the level of attention to games. One in which the invention that there is room for good. "Has been made with the problem to be solved.

Feature B0. A picture display means (symbol display device 161) for variably displaying a plurality of picture rows on a display screen (display screen G);
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on satisfaction of a predetermined acquisition condition (a function of executing a winning process for an operating port in the main control device 81);
Acquisition information storage means (reservation area RE) for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means as an upper limit of a predetermined number as a plurality of numbers;
An assignment determining unit (in the main control unit 81) that sequentially determines whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage unit corresponds to an assignment corresponding result corresponding to granting a privilege to a player. Function for executing the processing of step S501);
A bonus granting unit (a function of executing a game state transition process in the main control device 81) for granting a bonus to a player based on the result of the granting determination by the granting determination unit being the granting correspondence result;
Prior to the provision of the provision determination by the provision determination means or based on the provision of the provision determination by the provision determination means, the pattern display means starts the variable display of the design, and the provision determination is performed. Displaying a stop result corresponding to the result of the determination and terminating the variation display of the pattern as one of the game times, and setting the game information of each game time in accordance with the special information stored in the acquisition information storage means. Game time control means for controlling the picture display means so that the picture is displayed in a variable manner (a function for executing a variation start process in the main control device 81, a function for performing a variation display control process in the effect control device 82, and the like); ,
The information corresponding to the determination result in the case where the predetermined special information stored in the acquisition information storage unit is the target of the assignment determination, the information before the predetermined special information is the target of the assignment determination. Destination specifying means for specifying at the timing (a function of executing a confirmation process for a hold notice in main controller 81);
In the case where the specification result by the preceding specifying means is a predetermined specifying result, in the game time performed before the game time related to the special information specified by the preceding specifying means, Special notification means (a function of executing an effect setting process for an advance notice in the effect control device 82) for performing a special notification (holding notice) corresponding to the specified result of the means,
The special notification means includes a plurality of execution means (movable character devices 162, 300, a symbol arrangement of each symbol row Z1 to Z3, a duplicate effect setting by the effect control device 82) for executing a plurality of the special notifications in one game round. A game machine having a function of executing a process and a correction process for duplicate notice).

  According to the feature B0, the special notification corresponding to the predetermined special information stored in the acquired information storage unit and not subject to the addition determination is performed at a timing before the special information becomes the target of the addition determination. May be executed. In other words, for the player, not only the game in which the obtained determination result of the special information is checked in the game round corresponding to the determination result, but also a plurality of special information is stored in the obtained information storage unit. Is added to the special information in which the order in which the determination is to be made is later, and a result in which the result when the determination is made in accordance with the content of the special notification is predicted or predicted. Thereby, the monotony of the game is suppressed.

  In this feature, in particular, the special notification can be executed for a plurality of times in one game round. Therefore, for example, even when the special information is issued, even if there is less special information to be subjected to the grant determination before the special information that triggered the special information, that is, when the special information is performed, the special information at that time is obtained. Even when there is little opportunity to execute the notification, the special notification can be executed for a plurality of times in the game time corresponding to the special information to be subjected to the grant determination before that. Thereby, it is possible to suitably execute the special notification regardless of the number of the special information in the situation where the special notification is performed.

  As described above, the degree of attention to the game can be appropriately increased.

Feature B1. A picture display means (symbol display device 161) for variably displaying a plurality of picture rows on a display screen (display screen G);
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on satisfaction of a predetermined acquisition condition (a function of executing a winning process for an operating port in the main control device 81);
Acquisition information storage means (reservation area RE) for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means as an upper limit of a predetermined number as a plurality of numbers;
An assignment determining unit (in the main control unit 81) that sequentially determines whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage unit corresponds to an assignment corresponding result corresponding to granting a privilege to a player. Function for executing the processing of step S501);
A bonus granting unit (a function of executing a game state transition process in the main control device 81) for granting a bonus to a player based on the result of the granting determination by the granting determination unit being the granting correspondence result;
Prior to the provision of the provision determination by the provision determination means or based on the provision of the provision determination by the provision determination means, the pattern display means starts the variable display of the design, and the provision determination is performed. Displaying a stop result corresponding to the result of the determination and terminating the variation display of the pattern as one of the game times, and setting the game information of each game time in accordance with the special information stored in the acquisition information storage means. Game time control means for controlling the picture display means so that the picture is displayed in a variable manner (a function for executing a variation start process in the main control device 81, a function for performing a variation display control process in the effect control device 82, and the like); ,
The information corresponding to the determination result in the case where the predetermined special information stored in the acquisition information storage unit is the target of the assignment determination, the information before the predetermined special information is the target of the assignment determination. Destination specifying means for specifying at the timing (a function of executing a confirmation process for a hold notice in main controller 81);
In the case where the specified result by the destination specifying means is a predetermined specified result, each pattern sequence is performed in a game time performed before the game time related to the special information specified by the destination specified means. A special notification means for displaying a specific pattern combination, which is a combination of at least two patterns one by one from the at least two pattern rows, and performing special notification (holding notice) corresponding to the specified result of the destination specifying means (production) A function of executing an effect setting process for holding notice in the control device 82).
The special notification means displays a plurality of the specific pattern combinations or displays a plurality of types of the specific pattern combinations in one game, and executes the special notification for a plurality of times (the movable accessory device) 162, 300, a symbol arrangement of each symbol row Z1 to Z3, and a function of executing an effect rendering setting process and an overlapping notice correction process by the effect control device 82).

  According to the feature B1, the special notification corresponding to the predetermined special information stored in the acquired information storage unit and not subject to the addition determination is performed at a timing before the special information becomes the target of the addition determination. May be executed. In other words, for the player, not only the game in which the obtained determination result of the special information is checked in the game round corresponding to the determination result, but also a plurality of special information is stored in the obtained information storage unit. Is added to the special information in which the order in which the determination is to be made is later, and a result in which the result when the determination is made in accordance with the content of the special notification is predicted or predicted. Thereby, the monotony of the game is suppressed.

  The player knows the determination result of each game round based on the information (final stop result) from the picture display means. The mode information corresponding to the pattern stop mode in the pattern display unit is determined by the mode information determining unit based on the assignment determination result. Then, the special notification is executed in the pattern stop mode (the pattern combination) in the pattern display means. With the configuration in which the special notification is performed by the pattern combination in this way, the player can naturally confirm the special notification if he or she tries to grasp the result of the determination of the giving of each game. Therefore, even though the special notification is performed, it is prevented from being overlooked.

  In this feature, in particular, the special notification can be executed for a plurality of times in one game round. Therefore, for example, even when the special information is issued, even if there is less special information to be subjected to the grant determination before the special information that triggered the special information, that is, when the special information is performed, the special information at that time is obtained. Even when there is little opportunity to execute the notification, the special notification can be executed for a plurality of times in the game time corresponding to the special information to be subjected to the grant determination before that. Thereby, it is possible to suitably execute the special notification regardless of the number of the special information in the situation where the special notification is performed.

  As described above, the degree of attention to the game can be appropriately increased.

  Feature B2. The plurality of execution units may include a unit that executes the special notification for a plurality of times without changing the combination of the patterns stopped and displayed on the display screen when performing the plurality of special notifications. A gaming machine according to Feature B1.

  According to the feature B2, when a plurality of specific pattern combinations are displayed, the special notification is performed while the pattern row stopped and displayed on the display screen is maintained as it is, that is, the pattern row is stopped. By performing the special notification for a plurality of times, it is not necessary to repeat the stop, change, and stop of the pattern row, and it is possible to preferably suppress the increase in the control load caused by the effect while enjoying the effects shown in the feature B1 and the like. it can.

  Feature B3. The game according to Feature B1 or Feature B2, wherein the plurality of execution units have means for sharing a combination of pictures stopped and displayed on the display screen when the plurality of special announcements are executed. Machine.

  According to the feature B3, when executing special notification for a plurality of times, it is not necessary to change the appearance for each special notification, and it is possible to suppress an extreme increase in the processing load required for the special notification.

  In addition, for example, the “multiple execution unit has a unit that executes the special notification for a plurality of times by performing display such that a plurality or a plurality of types of the specific pattern combination are included in one stop mode of the pattern. In this case, the effect shown in the feature B2 can be suitably exerted.

  In addition, for example, “the game time control means may include a plurality of unit displays for stopping or temporarily stopping the pattern after the variable display of the pattern is started in the plurality of variable display areas as the one game time. Means for performing the special notification for a plurality of times by displaying the specific pattern combination in each unit display, and stopping in each unit display. In this configuration, the combination of the displayed patterns is the same as that of the same pattern ", the effect shown in the feature B3 can be suitably exerted.

Feature B4. A stop mode determining means for determining a stop mode of the pattern in the game cycle related to the special information targeted for the grant, based on a result of the grant determination, for each game cycle, The control device 82 has a function of executing a variation start process), and when the variation display of the pattern is performed at each game time, the pattern is stopped in the stop mode determined by the stop mode determination means to perform the same game. The change display of the pattern at the time is ended,
The stop mode determined by the stop mode determining means includes a special stop mode (special mode) in which a plurality of the specific pattern combinations exist.
The selection means (the movable accessory device 162, which enables the special notification based on one specific pattern combination included in the special stop mode and disables the special notification based on another specific pattern combination included in the special stop mode. 300, a function of executing a process during fluctuation by the effect control device 82)
The plurality of execution units are configured to execute the special notification for a plurality of times in one game by sequentially switching the specific pattern combinations to be enabled and disabled by the selection unit. The gaming machine according to any one of B3.

  According to the above configuration, the pattern combinations corresponding to the specified results of the plurality of destination specifying means included in the special stop mode are sequentially switched between valid and invalid by the selecting means, so that one of the pattern combinations can be changed without changing the stop result. It is possible to execute the special notification for a plurality of times in the game time.

  Note that, for example, a stop eye related to special notification may be set as a special eye in which a plurality of specific pattern combinations are mixed.

  Feature B5. The selecting means enables special notification by the specific pattern combination by making one of the plurality of specific pattern combinations visible, and at least one of the other specific pattern combinations. The gaming machine according to Feature B4, wherein the special notification by the specific picture combination is invalidated by making a part unrecognizable or difficult to recognize.

  According to the above configuration, whether or not the special notification is valid is determined based on the visual recognition level (for example, easy / difficult) of the specific pattern combination, so that the player can easily understand whether or not the special notification is valid. In other words, even with a special configuration in which a plurality of special notifications are performed during one game round, it is possible to appropriately prevent each special notification from being missed without being recognized well.

Feature B6. With a movable body,
A second state (shielding state) in which the movable body is in a first state (non-shielding state) and in which at least a part of the specific picture combination is more difficult or invisible from the front of the gaming machine than in the first state; Switching means (movable characters 170 to 173, 310, 320, 330, 340) that can be switched to
The selection unit controls the switching unit so that the movable body is in the second state, disables special notification by the specific pattern combination, and performs the switching so that the movable body is in the first state. The gaming machine according to Feature B5, further comprising: means for controlling means for enabling special notification based on the specific picture combination.

  According to the above configuration, the effectiveness of the special notification is determined by a change in visibility on the display screen (specifically, a change in a range that is easy to view or difficult to view). This is advantageous in helping the player to understand and appropriately exhibiting the notification function by the special notification. The movable body is switched from the second state to the first concealed state when the special notification is enabled (when executed), while the movable body is switched to the second state when the special notification is disabled (not executed). By maintaining, it is possible to draw the player's attention by the operation of the movable body. Therefore, the player can be interested in the state (movement) of the movable body.

Feature B7. A first area (main display area Rm) and a second area (sub-display area Rs) are set in a display area of the pattern on the display screen of the pattern display means.
The game time control means stops the pattern in the first area and the second area in the stop mode determined by the stop mode determination means when the display of the pattern is changed in each game mode, and To end the variable display of
The movable body covers at least a part of the pattern stopped in the second area by switching from the second state to the second state so as to be difficult or invisible from the front of the gaming machine,
The stop mode determined by the stop mode determining means includes a stop mode (a stop result corresponding to a special suspension notice) in which the special stop mode is set based on a combination of patterns including a pattern stopped in the second area. And
The special notification means controls the switching means to switch the movable body from the second state to the first state by controlling the switching means based on the determination of the special stop state by the stop state determination means. The gaming machine according to Feature B6, further comprising means for performing the special notification.

  A first area and a second area are set in the pattern display area on the display screen, and the special notification is set to a special notification based on a combination of patterns including a pattern stopped in the second area (special stop mode). For example, by using the display area (second display area) located outside the normal display area (first display area), the number of combinations of pictures that can be used for special announcements increases, and the execution conditions of special announcements (stop of pictures) Aspects) can be suitably increased.

  In particular, when the special notification is performed, by providing the notification mode with a difference in the movement of the entire device related to the notification, the effect of increasing the degree of attention can be easily exerted.

Feature B8. The grant response result includes a first grant response result (probably variable jackpot result) in which the first privilege is granted to the player by the privilege granting means, and a benefit of the player over the first privilege by the privilege granting means. A second grant corresponding result (usually a jackpot result) in which a small second special privilege is given,
The special notifying means may include a first specific pattern combination corresponding to the first assignment corresponding result (a stop corresponding to a reserved notice by a specific symbol) when the result specified by the preceding identifying means corresponds to the first assignment corresponding result. The special notification is executed in such a manner as to be (result), and when the specified result by the preceding specifying means corresponds to the second added correspondence result, the second specific picture combination (non- Means for executing the special notification so as to be the stop result corresponding to the suspension notice by the specific symbol),
The pattern stop mode determined by the stop mode determination means includes a special stop mode in which the first specific pattern combination and the second specific pattern combination stop,
The selection means is configured to validate one of the first specific pattern combination and the second specific pattern combination included in the special stop mode and invalidate the other.
The plurality of execution units are configured to switch the first specific pattern combination and the second specific pattern combination to be enabled or disabled by the selection unit sequentially in accordance with the specification result by the destination specifying unit, so that the one execution time The gaming machine according to any one of features B4 to B7, wherein the special notification is executed for a plurality of times.

  According to the above configuration, the first specific pattern combination corresponding to the provision of the first privilege and the second mode corresponding to the provision of the second privilege are provided in the stop mode of the pattern stopped and displayed on the display screen. A special stop mode in which both of the specific picture combinations are stopped is included. Then, the multiple execution means executes the special notification for a plurality of times by sequentially switching the validity / invalidity of the first / second specific picture combination in the game time in the special stop mode. In this case, the special notification is sequentially performed in accordance with the result of the specification by the first specifying unit. That is, if the order corresponds to the first assignment corresponding result, the player expects that the first privilege will be given thereafter, and if the order corresponds to the second assignment corresponding result. , The player expects that the second privilege will be given thereafter. Then, since the second benefit is set so that the profit obtained by the player is smaller than that of the first benefit, the player expects that the order will correspond to the first benefit, so that a plurality of executions are performed. Attention will be paid to the order of the special announcement by means. This makes it possible to appropriately increase the degree of attention to the game.

Feature B9. The grant response result includes a first grant response result (probably variable jackpot result) in which the first privilege is granted to the player by the privilege granting means, and a benefit of the player over the first privilege by the privilege granting means. A second grant corresponding result (usually a jackpot result) in which a small second special privilege is given,
The special notifying means may include a first specific pattern combination corresponding to the first assignment corresponding result (a stop corresponding to a reserved notice by a specific symbol) when the result specified by the preceding identifying means corresponds to the first assignment corresponding result. The special notification is executed in such a manner as to be (result), and when the specified result by the preceding specifying means corresponds to the second added correspondence result, the second specific picture combination (non- Means for executing the special notification so as to be the stop result corresponding to the suspension notice by the specific symbol),
The pattern stop mode determined by the stop mode determination means includes a special stop mode in which the first specific pattern combination and the second specific pattern combination stop,
When the special information that triggered the special notification corresponds to the second assignment correspondence result, the multiple execution unit simultaneously validates the first specific pattern combination and the second specific pattern combination. The gaming machine according to any one of features B4 to B8, characterized by having means.

  According to the above configuration, the first specific pattern combination and the second specific pattern combination can be simultaneously validated by the multiple execution unit. In this case, it is difficult for the player to understand which specific pattern combination corresponds to the special information that triggered the setting of the special notification state. Even though the special information that triggered the setting of the special notification state corresponds to the second assignment corresponding result, the order in which the first / second specific picture combinations are valid is the first specific pattern combination. When the pattern combination is established and the second specific pattern combination is established, the player is discouraged that the expected granting result after that has been demoted from the first granting result to the second granting result. Maybe.

  Therefore, by adopting the present configuration, by leaving a possibility that any of the application corresponding results can be obtained, it is possible to suppress the discourage of the player due to the special notification, and to reduce a plurality of times in one game round. It is possible to suitably execute the special notification.

  Feature B10. The special notification unit is configured to perform the special notification by the plurality of execution units in a game time during the change display based on a condition that the execution condition of the special notification is satisfied under a situation in which the pattern change display is being performed. The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B9, further comprising means for executing a plurality of processes (a function of executing a replacement process by the effect control device 82).

  According to the above configuration, when the execution condition of the special notification is satisfied in a situation where the fluctuation display of the game time is being performed, the special notification is executed for a plurality of times in the game time in which the fluctuation display is performed. For this reason, even if the number of special information (game times) in which the above-described special notification can be executed is small, it is possible to preferably increase the chances of performing the special notification. That is, it is possible to prevent the number of times of performing the special notification from being limited by the number of the special information stored at the time of the previous specification.

Feature B11. A stop mode determining means for determining a stop mode of the pattern in the game cycle related to the special information targeted for the grant, based on a result of the grant determination, for each game cycle, The control device 82 has a function of executing a variation start process), and when the variation display of the pattern is performed at each game time, the pattern is stopped in the stop mode determined by the stop mode determination means to perform the same game. The change display of the pattern at the time is ended,
The plurality of execution units may be configured such that the combination of the patterns stopped and displayed in the stop mode of the pattern determined by the stop mode determination unit includes a plurality or a plurality of types of the specific pattern combinations. The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B10, wherein the special notification is executed based on the special notification.

  According to the above configuration, the display for the special notification is made using the stop mode of the pattern in the game in which the special notification for a plurality of times is executed. By performing special notification by using the pattern stop mode set in advance by the game time control means (stop mode determination means), it is not necessary to reset the pattern stop mode or the like at the time of executing the special notification. Extreme increase in processing load at the time of performing can be suppressed.

  In particular, in combination with the feature B7, it is possible to appropriately suppress the restriction on the execution opportunity of the special notification by adding the pattern stopped in both the first area and the second area.

Feature B12. The special notification means, when the execution condition of the special notification is satisfied in a situation where the pattern is displayed in a variable manner, the pattern stop mode in the game round determined by the stop mode determination means. Determining means for determining whether or not the special notification can be executed at the game time based on the aspect information according to (1) (the function of executing the processing of step S3204, step S2404, step S2504, and the like by the effect control device 82). Has,
The carry-over means (execution control) for executing a plurality of the special notifications in the next and subsequent game times of the determined game times when the plurality of execution means determines that the special information is not executable by the determination means. Function of executing the processing of steps S3301, S3302, S3401, and S3402 by the device 82)
The gaming machine according to Feature B11, wherein the stop mode determination unit includes a unit that determines a stop mode based on information of the carryover unit in a subsequent game round.

  According to the above configuration, when the special notification cannot be executed, the special notification by the multiple execution means is executed in the next and subsequent game times. This eliminates the need to perform a process such as changing the stop result or the variable display time to execute the special notification in the currently executed game time, and furthermore, the plurality of execution units perform the processing for a plurality of times in one game time. Since the special notification is performed, the special notification can be executed without reducing the number of executions of the special notification. Further, in the subsequent game rounds for which multiple notifications are to be made, the stop mode is determined based on the fact that the multiple notifications have been made.For example, the stop mode does not correspond to the special notification, and the special notification is not performed. It is possible to preferably prevent the execution from being performed satisfactorily.

  Feature B13. If a plurality of pieces of special information that are subject to the assignment determination before the special information that triggered the special notification are stored by the acquired information storage unit, Means for limiting the special notification for the plurality of executions by the plurality of execution means in the game times related to the special information of interest (the function of executing the step S3104, step S3201, etc. by the effect control device 82). The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B12.

  If there is a plurality of special information subject to the grant determination before the special information that triggered the special notification, the special notification may be performed in each of the game times related to the plurality of special information. It is less necessary to execute a plurality of special announcements in the game times. Therefore, in the present configuration, a plurality of special announcements by the plurality of execution units are restricted. Thereby, it is possible to suppress an unnecessary increase in the number of occasions where a plurality of special announcements are performed, and to clarify a difference between a mere special announcement and a plurality of announcements. Therefore, it is possible to ensure a premium feeling that the special notification shown in this feature is performed.

Feature B14. When the special notification is executed, a notification mode setting means (effect control device 82) for setting such that the special notification executed in the current game time is accompanied by an effect different from the special information executed in the previous game time. Function for executing the processing of steps S3004 to S3008, steps S3105 to S3109, etc.)
In the case where a plurality of the special announcements are performed in one game round by the plurality of execution means, the special announcements to be executed later in the plurality of special announcements are accompanied by an effect different from the special announcement executed first. Continuous notification setting means to be set (the function of executing step S3211, step S3504, step S3609, step S3620, step S3630, etc., by effect control device 82);
The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B13, comprising:

  According to the above configuration, the player recognizes the special notification of each game time as a so-called step-up effect that develops differently for each game time. Even when a plurality of special announcements are made in one game time by a plurality of execution means, different effects are performed for each special game time, so the player develops the step-up effect in each game time in one game time. It is easy to understand as (established). Thereby, the significance of having a plurality of execution units can be enhanced.

Feature B15. Determining means for determining whether or not to shift to the executable state for the special notification based on the fact that the specifying result by the preceding specifying means is a predetermined specifying result (a jackpot notice setting process by the effect control device 82; A function of executing a notice setting process for disengagement), and whether or not the setting is made to accompany the different special notification by the notification mode setting unit or the continuous notification setting unit when the determination unit shifts to the executable state. (A function of executing the processing of steps S2809 and S2908 by the effect control device 82).
The lottery means sets a higher probability of a winning result when the specified result by the preceding specifying means is the granting result than when the specified result by the preceding specifying means is not the providing result. The gaming machine according to Feature B14, wherein the gaming machine is a game machine.

  According to the above configuration, if the current special notification is accompanied by an effect different from the previously executed special notification, it can be expected that the special information to be subsequently subjected to the determination of the assignment is the assignment corresponding result. For this reason, the player expects that the special notification of this time is accompanied by an effect different from that of the previous special notification, that is, that the special notification is developed. Here, if a plurality of execution means shown in the characteristic B1 are provided, it is possible to make it difficult to cause the inconvenience that the prerequisite plurality of notifications cannot be executed when developing special notification.

<Characteristic C group>
In addition, the invention described in the following feature C group is described as "a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine, for example, is provided with a pattern display device for variably displaying a plurality of patterns on a display screen. In such a gaming machine, for example, when a game ball passes through an operating port provided in a game area, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to generate a specific gaming state advantageous to a player such as a winning state, When the lottery is won, the combination of the specific patterns and the like are finally stopped and displayed on the display screen, and the game state shifts to the specific game state. Accordingly, for example, the opening and closing of the variable ball-in device provided in the game area is started, and a large amount of game balls are paid out (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2005-074175). About Jing and technology, "Here, in the gaming machine must increase the degree of attention to the game, still there is room for improvement. In this regard," in which the invention that has been made with the problems to be solved.

Feature C1. On a display screen (display screen G) in which a plurality of variable display areas (each symbol row Z1 to Z3) are set, a picture display means (symbol display device 161) for scroll-displaying picture rows respectively corresponding to the variable display areas. ,
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on satisfaction of a predetermined acquisition condition (a function of executing a winning process for an operating port in the main control device 81);
Acquisition information storage means (reservation area RE) for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means up to a predetermined number predetermined as a plurality of numbers;
An assignment determining unit (in the main control unit 81) that sequentially determines whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage unit corresponds to an assignment corresponding result corresponding to granting a privilege to a player. Function for executing the processing of step S501);
A bonus granting unit (a function of executing a game state transition process in the main control device 81) for granting a bonus to a player based on the result of the granting determination by the granting determination unit being the granting correspondence result;
In one game round based on establishment of the acquisition condition, after the variable display of the pattern is started in the plurality of variable display areas, unit display for stopping or temporarily stopping the pattern is performed at least once. In this way, in each of the game times, the game time control means for controlling the picture display means so as to stop and display the result corresponding to the determination result of the giving determination (a function of executing a fluctuation start process by the main control device 81, an effect control A function of executing the process for variable display by the device 82);
A special notification unit (a function of executing an effect setting process for a hold notice in the effect control unit 82) for performing a special notice (for example, a hold notice) by causing a specific pattern combination to be stopped or temporarily stopped by the game time control means. With
In the mode of the stop display or the temporary stop display of the specific pattern combination,
A first display mode (for example, a weak chance eye) in which the degree of scattering in the scroll direction of each pattern constituting the specific pattern combination is set to be relatively small;
A second display mode (for example, a strong chance eye) set such that the degree of dispersion in the scroll direction of each pattern constituting the specific pattern combination is relatively large;
In the case where the special notification is executed at the game time at which the special notification is executed or at a game time after the game time, the second display mode is selected from the first display mode and the second display mode. In the case where the result is not given in the game time in which the special notification is executed and the game time in which the special notification is executed or the game time after the game time, the first display mode of the first display mode and the second display mode A game machine provided with a selection means set so as to be easily selected.

  In a gaming machine of a type in which a pattern row is displayed on a display screen, it is general that the pattern is shifted to a reach display by stopping or temporarily stopping the patterns together. In the case of transition to a special game state (for example, winning) advantageous to the player, such reach display is often performed. For these reasons, the player's attention tends to turn to a very limited area of the display screen.

  Here, as shown in this feature, a difference is set in the degree of scattering of the pattern when the specific pattern combination is stopped or temporarily stopped, and the expectation that the degree of the scattering becomes large results in an assignment determination result. With a configuration in which the degree is increased, it is possible to urge the player to pay attention to a wide area of the display screen. Thus, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of inconvenience such that the effect on the display screen is overlooked and the effect function is not properly performed.

Feature C2. On a display screen (display screen G) in which a plurality of variable display areas (each symbol row Z1 to Z3) are set, a picture display means (symbol display device 161) for scroll-displaying picture rows respectively corresponding to the variable display areas. ,
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on satisfaction of a predetermined acquisition condition (a function of executing a winning process for an operating port in the main control device 81);
Acquisition information storage means (reservation area RE) for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means up to a predetermined number predetermined as a plurality of numbers;
An assignment determining unit (in the main control unit 81) that sequentially determines whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage unit corresponds to an assignment corresponding result corresponding to granting a privilege to a player. Function for executing the processing of step S501);
A bonus granting unit (a function of executing a game state transition process in the main control device 81) for granting a bonus to a player based on the result of the granting determination by the granting determination unit being the granting correspondence result;
In one game round based on establishment of the acquisition condition, after the variable display of the pattern is started in the plurality of variable display areas, unit display for stopping or temporarily stopping the pattern is performed at least once. In this way, in each of the game times, the game time control means for controlling the picture display means so as to stop and display the result corresponding to the determination result of the giving determination (a function of executing a fluctuation start process by the main control device 81, an effect control A function of executing the process for variable display by the device 82);
A special notification unit (a function of executing an effect setting process for a hold notice in the effect control unit 82) for performing a special notice (for example, a hold notice) by causing a specific pattern combination to be stopped or temporarily stopped by the game time control means. With
In the mode of the stop display or the temporary stop display of the specific pattern combination,
A first display mode (for example, a weak chance eye) in which the separation distance in the scroll direction between the patterns constituting the specific pattern combination is relatively small;
A second display mode (for example, a strong chance) in which the separation distance in the scroll direction between the patterns constituting the specific pattern combination is relatively large;
In the case where the special notification is executed at the game time at which the special notification is executed or at a game time after the game time, the second display mode is selected from the first display mode and the second display mode. In the case where the result is not given in the game time in which the special notification is executed and the game time in which the special notification is executed or the game time after the game time, the first display mode of the first display mode and the second display mode A game machine provided with a selection means set so as to be easily selected.

  In a gaming machine of a type in which a pattern row is displayed on a display screen, it is general that the pattern is shifted to a reach display by stopping or temporarily stopping the patterns together. In the case of transition to a special game state (for example, winning) advantageous to the player, such reach display is often performed. For these reasons, the player's attention tends to turn to a very limited area of the display screen.

  Here, as shown in this feature, a plurality of distances between the patterns when a specific pattern combination is stopped or temporarily stopped are set to cause a difference in the degree of dispersion of the specific pattern combinations, and the distance ( If the configuration is such that the degree of expectation as the assignment determination result increases as the degree of dispersion increases, it is possible to urge the player's attention to be directed to a wide area of the display screen. Thus, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of inconvenience such that the effect on the display screen is overlooked and the effect function is not properly performed.

Feature C3. A first region (main display region Rm) and a second region (sub-display region Rs) are set in a variable display region of the pattern on the display screen of the pattern display means,
The second area is arranged so as to include an area on the display screen that is upstream of the first area in the scroll direction of the picture row,
In the first display mode, the specific pattern combination is stopped or temporarily stopped in the first area,
In the second display mode, the specific pattern combination is configured to be stop-displayed or temporarily stopped over both the first area and the second area. The feature C1 or the feature C2. A gaming machine according to claim 1.

  As shown in the feature C1 and the like, by making the region where the specific pattern combination is formed different between the first region and the second region, it is difficult to recognize the difference between the first display mode and the second display mode. Can be suppressed.

Feature C4. The information corresponding to the determination result in the case where the predetermined special information stored in the acquisition information storage unit is the target of the assignment determination, the information before the predetermined special information is the target of the assignment determination. A destination specifying means for specifying at the timing (a function of executing a confirmation process for a reservation notice in the main control device 81);
The special informing means, when the specification result by the preceding specifying means is a predetermined specific result, a game time performed before the game time related to the special information specified by the preceding specifying means. By controlling the picture display means so that the mode of the stop display or the temporary stop display of the game time is the first display mode or the second display mode, a special corresponding to the specification result of the destination specifying means The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C3, further comprising means for performing notification (holding notice).

  According to the feature C4, when the special notification corresponding to the specification result of the preceding specifying unit is executed, the degree of variation of the specific pattern combination increases, and the expectation for the subsequent game round increases. . In other words, the game proceeds to the subsequent game rounds with the player's field of view expanded by the specific notification. As a result, even when performing an effect corresponding to the determination result on the display screen, for example, by directing the player's consciousness to a wide area of the display screen, the effect (for example, a fine effect) may be overlooked. Can be suitably suppressed. Further, when a subsequent effect is performed in a narrow range (for example, in the center of the display screen), the effect is performed in a state where the field of view is widened, so that it is possible to prevent the effect from being overlooked. This can contribute to improving the impact of the performance.

Feature C5. When the determination result of the giving determination is the giving corresponding result, a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the giving corresponding result on a preset active line is set as a variation mode of the game number executed by the game number controlling means. Is set to stop display or temporary stop display,
At least as the unit display, by stopping the variable display of the pattern in a part of the variable display area, the reach pattern combination in which the predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the giving correspondence result is likely to be established is the effective line or it A reach variation display is set to form a reach line by stopping and displaying on a different line, and to perform a variation display of a pattern in the remaining variation display area under a state where the reach line is formed,
At least as the reach fluctuation display,
The reach pattern combination corresponding to the giving correspondence result is stopped and displayed, and the reach corresponding pattern forming the predetermined pattern combination together with the reach pattern combination is stopped and displayed on the reach line by stopping on the reach line. Reach variation display,
An out-of-reach variation display in which the reach pattern combination corresponding to the giving correspondence result is stopped and displayed, and the reach corresponding pattern is shifted to the upstream or downstream side in the scroll direction of the pattern from the reach line and stopped and displayed is set. And
The unit display includes a result mode that is displayed when a game related to the predetermined special information is ended based on the predetermined special information being acquired by the information acquisition unit. Special control means for performing the special notification by controlling the picture display means so that the out-of-reach unit display, which is the unit display including the out-of-reach variation display, is performed before the out-of-reach variation display is performed. Function of executing the processing of steps S3805 to S3812 and steps S3906 to S3914 by the device 82)
At least as the out-of-reach unit display,
A first-type out-of-reach unit display for stopping and displaying the reach corresponding pattern in a first area away from the reach line on the upstream side or the downstream side in the scroll direction of the pattern,
A second type out-of-reach reach unit display for stopping and displaying the reach-relevant pattern in a second area further upstream or downstream in the scroll direction of the pattern than the first area from the reach line,
Is set,
The special control means includes the selection means, and when the predetermined pattern combination is displayed via the out-of-reach unit display, the selection unit is more than the first-type out-of-reach unit display. It is configured such that it is easy to select two types of reach unit display, and when the predetermined pattern combination is not displayed, it is easier to select the first type reach unit display than the second type reach unit display. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C3.

  When a bonus (for example, a transition to a special game state more advantageous to the player than usual) is given to the player, the reach-relevant pattern is stopped and displayed on the reach line, and a predetermined pattern combination is stopped and displayed. In the situation where the reach fluctuation display is being performed, the player expects that the reach corresponding pattern reaches the reach line on the upstream side of the reach line, for example, and stops displaying at the timing when the reach corresponding pattern reaches the reach line. Hope to be done.

  In such a configuration, it is assumed that the attention degree to the game increases as the reach-response pattern approaches the reach line, while the attention degree decreases as the reach-response pattern moves away from the reach line. In addition, it is assumed that the degree of attention is reduced at a stretch by shifting to the reach variation display and stopping and displaying the reach-response pattern before the reach line.

  In this regard, according to the present feature, it may be set so that the out-of-reach unit display is executed before the transition unit display in which the stop result corresponding to the assignment correspondence result is displayed. Then, as the out-of-reach reach unit display, the reach-relevant design is shifted from the reach line in comparison with the first out-of-reach reach variation display in which the reach-relevant design is stopped and displayed in a first region that is further downstream or upstream of the reach line. The selectivity is set higher in the second out-of-range reach variation display that is stopped and displayed in the second area farther upstream or downstream than the first area. Therefore, as the player moves away from the reach line as the reach-response pattern moves away from the reach line, it can be expected that the benefit will be given later as a result of the provision of the correspondence. As a result, it is possible to suppress the decrease in the degree of interest caused by the positional relationship between the reach line and the reach-corresponding pattern in the situation where the reach variation display is being performed.

Feature C6. On a display screen (display screen G) in which a plurality of variable display areas (each symbol row Z1 to Z3) are set, a picture display means (symbol display device 161) for scroll-displaying picture rows respectively corresponding to the variable display areas. ,
Information acquisition means (a function of executing information acquisition processing by the main control device 81) for acquiring special information based on satisfaction of a predetermined acquisition condition;
Acquisition information storage means (reservation area RE) for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means,
A determination unit (a step in the main control device 81) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquisition information storage unit corresponds to an assignment corresponding result corresponding to granting a privilege to a player; Function for executing the processing of S501);
A bonus granting unit (a function of executing a game state transition process in the main control device 81) for granting a bonus to a player based on the result of the granting determination by the granting determination unit being the granting correspondence result;
In one game round based on establishment of the acquisition condition, after the variable display of the pattern is started in the plurality of variable display areas, unit display for stopping or temporarily stopping the pattern is performed at least once. In this way, in each of the game times, the game time control means for controlling the picture display means so as to stop and display the result corresponding to the determination result of the giving determination (a function of executing a fluctuation start process by the main control device 81, an effect control A function of executing a variable display process by the device 82).
When the determination result of the giving determination is the giving corresponding result, a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the giving corresponding result on a preset active line is set as a variation mode of the game number executed by the game number controlling means. Is set to stop display or temporary stop display,
At least as the unit display, by stopping the variable display of the pattern in a part of the variable display area, the reach pattern combination in which the predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the giving correspondence result is likely to be established is the effective line or it A reach variation display is set to form a reach line by stopping and displaying on a different line, and to perform a variation display of a pattern in the remaining variation display area under a state where the reach line is formed,
At least as the reach fluctuation display,
The reach pattern combination corresponding to the giving correspondence result is stopped and displayed, and the reach corresponding pattern forming the predetermined pattern combination together with the reach pattern combination is stopped and displayed on the reach line by stopping on the reach line. Reach variation display,
An out-of-reach variation display in which the reach pattern combination corresponding to the giving correspondence result is stopped and displayed, and the reach corresponding pattern is shifted to the upstream or downstream side in the scroll direction of the pattern from the reach line and stopped and displayed is set. Gaming machine,
Based on the fact that the predetermined special information is obtained by the information obtaining means, the unit display including the result mode displayed when the game round related to the predetermined special information is ended is executed. Previously, the special control means (steps S3805 to S3812, S3906 to S3906 by the effect control device 82) for controlling the picture display means so that the out-of-reach unit display which is the unit display including the out-of-reach variation display is executed. Function for executing the processing of step S3914).
At least as the out-of-reach unit display,
A first-type out-of-reach unit display for stopping and displaying the reach corresponding pattern in a first area away from the reach line on the upstream side or the downstream side in the scroll direction of the pattern,
A second type out-of-reach reach unit display for stopping and displaying the reach-relevant pattern in a second area further upstream or downstream in the scroll direction of the pattern than the first area from the reach line,
Is set,
The special control means, when displaying the predetermined pattern combination via the out-of-reach unit display, the second type out-of-reach unit display is easier to select than the first type out-of-reach unit display, When the predetermined pattern combination is not displayed, there is provided a selection means set so that the first-type out-of-reach unit display is more easily selected than the second-type out-of-reach unit display. A gaming machine.

  When a bonus (for example, a transition to a special game state more advantageous to the player than usual) is given to the player, the reach-relevant pattern is stopped and displayed on the reach line, and a predetermined pattern combination is stopped and displayed. In the situation where the reach fluctuation display is being performed, the player expects that the reach corresponding pattern reaches the reach line on the upstream side of the reach line, for example, and stops displaying at the timing when the reach corresponding pattern reaches the reach line. Hope to be done.

  In such a configuration, it is assumed that the attention degree to the game increases as the reach-response pattern approaches the reach line, while the attention degree decreases as the reach-response pattern moves away from the reach line. In addition, it is assumed that the degree of attention is reduced at a stretch by shifting to the reach variation display and stopping and displaying the reach-response pattern before the reach line.

  In this regard, according to the present feature, it may be set so that the out-of-reach unit display is executed before the transition unit display in which the stop result corresponding to the assignment correspondence result is displayed. Then, as the out-of-reach reach unit display, the reach-relevant design is shifted from the reach line in comparison with the first out-of-reach reach variation display in which the reach-relevant design is stopped and displayed in a first region that is further downstream or upstream of the reach line. The selectivity is set higher in the second out-of-range reach variation display that is stopped and displayed in the second area farther upstream or downstream than the first area. Therefore, as the player moves away from the reach line as the reach-response pattern moves away from the reach line, it can be expected that the benefit will be given later as a result of the provision of the correspondence. As a result, it is possible to suppress the decrease in the degree of interest caused by the positional relationship between the reach line and the reach-corresponding pattern in the situation where the reach variation display is being performed.

  Feature C7. The gaming machine according to Feature C5 or Feature C6, wherein the first area and the second area are provided downstream of the reach line in the scroll direction of the picture.

  In a configuration in which a benefit is given if the reach-response pattern stops on the reach line, the degree of attention of the reach variation display tends to decrease at a stretch especially after the reach-response pattern passes through the reach line. In this regard, as shown in this feature, by providing the first region and the second region on the downstream side of the reach line, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the degree of attention even after passing through the reach line.

Feature C8. The acquired information storage means stores the special information acquired by the information acquisition means, with a predetermined number predetermined as a plurality as an upper limit,
The assignment determining unit is configured to sequentially determine the assignment of the special information stored in the acquired information storage unit,
The information corresponding to the determination result in the case where the predetermined special information stored in the acquisition information storage unit is the target of the assignment determination, the information before the predetermined special information is the target of the assignment determination. Destination specifying means for specifying at the timing (a function of executing a confirmation process for a hold notice in main controller 81);
When the specified result by the preceding specifying means is a predetermined specified result, the game time of the game time performed before the game time related to the special information which is the specified object of the previous specifying means is determined. A special notification that performs a special notification (holding notice) corresponding to the specified result of the destination specifying unit by controlling the pattern display unit so that the stop display mode is a predetermined display mode in which a specific pattern combination is stopped and displayed. Means (a function of executing an effect setting process for a pending notice in the effect control device 82),
As the predetermined display mode, a first display mode corresponding to the first type out of reach unit display and a second display mode corresponding to the second type out of reach unit display are set. The gaming machine according to any one of features C5 to C7.

  The special notification according to the predetermined special information stored in the acquired information storage unit and not subject to the assignment determination may be performed at a timing before the special information is subject to the assignment determination. is there. In other words, for the player, not only the game for checking the obtained determination result of the special information but also the order in which the determination of the addition is performed when a plurality of special information is stored in the obtained information storage means. For the special information described above, a game is added in which the result of the case of being subjected to the grant determination is confirmed or predicted according to the content of the special notification. Thereby, the monotony of the game is suppressed.

  In such a configuration, the above-described special notification is performed as a reach unit display. That is, in the game time in which the special notification is performed, the game is executed in the expectation that the reach variation display executed as the player will correspond to the result of providing the grant (not the out-of-reach unit display). Pay attention to the times. On the other hand, even if the reach fluctuation display is the out-of-reach fluctuation display, if the out-of-reach unit display corresponds to the special notification, there is room for the benefit to be given in the subsequent game round.

  As described in the feature C5 and the like, the second type out-of-reach reach unit display in which the reach-relevant pattern stops in the second area is displayed later than the first-type out-of-reach reach unit display in which the reach-relevant pattern stops in the first area. The degree of expectation to shift to the special game state at a time is high (selection rate is high). Therefore, as a player, in the game time in which the reach fluctuation display is performed, first, it is expected that a benefit is given in the game time, and otherwise, the reach corresponding pattern is set to be smaller than the first area. Also expect to stop in the second area. By doing so, a novel game effect of increasing the degree of attention to the reach fluctuation display of the game times based on the game results of the subsequent game times is realized.

  Feature C9. When the determination result of the grant determination is the grant response result, the game time control means may execute the second type by the special control means in a game cycle relating to the special information targeted for the grant response result. The gaming machine according to Feature C8, further comprising a limiter that limits the display of the out-of-reach unit.

  According to the above configuration, in the game time in which the determination result of the grant determination is the grant corresponding result, the display of the type 2 out-of-reach reach unit display is restricted. In other words, in the game time in which the type 2 out-of-reach reach unit display is performed, the special information related to the game time does not correspond to the result of providing the response, and the privilege is not provided in the current game time. Therefore, when the reach-response pattern passes through the reach line and further passes through the first region, the expectation of the privilege provision in the game round may be reduced, and the degree of attention may be reduced. However, even in this case, as described in the feature C8, if the reach-relevant pattern stops in the second area, the sense of expectation for the privilege is increased in the subsequent game round, so that the decrease in the degree of attention is preferably avoided. it can.

  Feature C10. When the determination result of the grant determination is the grant response result, in the game times related to the special information targeted for the grant response result, the special notification means selects the first type out of reach unit display. The gaming machine according to Feature C8 or Feature C9, wherein the probability that the second type out-of-reach reach unit display is selected is set higher than the probability that the second-type out-of-reach reach unit display is selected.

  According to the above configuration, in the out-of-reach reach unit display, once the reach-corresponding symbol temporarily stops in the first area, the probability that the privilege is given in the next and subsequent game rounds is lower than when the reach-corresponding symbol stops in the second area. However, the probability that the privilege is given in the current game round increases. In other words, based on the relationship between the first area and the second area, the player has an expectation for the current game time if the reach corresponding pattern stops in the first area, and the next time if the reach corresponding pattern stops in the second area. Expectations for the game times. Thereby, the degree of attention of the reach variation display can be appropriately increased in relation to the stop area of the reach corresponding pattern in the reach variation display.

Set so that a plurality of reach lines are simultaneously formed such that the first reach picture combination is stopped and displayed on the reach line of the feature C11.1 and the second reach picture combination is stopped and displayed on the other reach lines. And
The reach variation display includes a first pattern that forms the predetermined pattern combination with the first reach pattern combination, and a predetermined pattern different from the first pattern and the second reach pattern combination. , And a variable display that is set so that both of the second pattern and the second pattern pass on the reach line,
The special notification means is configured to display the reach-relevant pattern of the reach line formed by the first pattern in a state where the first reach pattern combination and the second reach pattern combination are stopped and displayed on the plurality of reach lines. Any one of features C8 to C10, wherein a reach-corresponding pattern of a reach line formed by the second pattern is stopped in the second area when stopping in one area. A gaming machine according to claim 1.

  According to the above configuration, in the multiple line reach, when the first pattern stops in the first area, the second pattern stops in the second area. Therefore, it is possible to have a sense of expectation for a pattern forming any of the reach lines in the multiple line reach. In particular, as described in the feature C8, since the expectation of the next and subsequent game times increases when stopping in the second area than in stopping in the first area, the first pattern stops in the first area as described above. When the second pattern is stopped in the two areas, it is expected that the reach variation display using the second pattern is performed in the next game round rather than the reach variation display using the first pattern in the next game round. The degree increases. In this way, by associating the fluctuation display of the current game times with the reach corresponding pattern of the reach fluctuation display that can occur in the next and subsequent times, it is possible to appropriately increase the degree of interest in the fluctuation display of the next and subsequent game times Become.

Feature C12. The special notification means,
If the specified result by the preceding specifying means becomes a predetermined specified result during the variable display from the start of the game round to the stop display, the current game determined by the stop mode determining means First determining means for determining whether or not the mode of the stop display corresponds to the reach variation display;
When the first determination means determines that the display corresponds to the reach variation display, the determination means determines whether or not the stop display mode of a specific picture row other than the picture row forming the reach line can be changed. When,
When it is determined by the determination unit that the mode of the stop display can be changed, the mode of the stop display of the specific pattern row during the variable display according to the predetermined specific result is changed to the predetermined display mode. The gaming machine according to any one of features C8 to C11, further comprising changing means for changing to a corresponding one.

  As shown in the feature C8, when an effect corresponding to the preceding specification result is performed by the reach variation display, when the timing at which a specific pattern row can be changed is such that the pattern row is changed, It is possible to reflect the specification result by the first specifying means in the stop display mode in the previous game round. Thus, it is possible to suppress the restriction on the special notification using the destination specifying unit and to appropriately increase the opportunities for executing the special notification.

  Even in the case of rewriting such an effect, the stop display mode of a specific pattern row may be rewritten, so that an increase in control load due to the rewriting can be suitably suppressed.

Feature C13. The variation display mode of the pattern row includes a high identification variation mode and a low identification variation mode in which the pattern identification is relatively high and low, and the high identification variation mode and the low identification variation mode are each It is possible to switch for each picture row,
The feature C12 is characterized in that the determination unit determines that the stop display mode of the specific picture sequence can be changed when the variation display mode of the specific picture row is the low identification variation mode. Gaming machine.

  According to the above configuration, when the variable display is performed in the low discrimination fluctuation mode in which the pattern discriminability is low, the mode of the stop display is changed, so that the change reduces the sense of incongruity given to the player. Can be.

  In addition, if the special notification is performed by such a change, it is not necessary to adjust the execution period of the game times indiscriminately, and it is possible to more suitably suppress an increase in control load due to rewriting.

<Feature D group>
In addition, the invention described in the following feature group D is described as follows: "Some game machines such as pachinko machines have a game board having a game area formed on the front surface mounted on a frame. Game ball fired based on the operation wins the ball entry section provided in the game area, so that whether or not to shift to a special game state more advantageous to the player than the normal game state is determined. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2003-190511) In this type of gaming machine, the pattern of the symbol changes on the game board in response to a prize in the ball entry section. By providing a variety of gaming devices related to gaming effects such as a symbol display device that performs display, and movable performances that operate in accordance with the variation display of the symbols to indicate the winning or losing lottery result, etc. Some have been improved. With this configuration, the movement of the game ball toward the ball entry unit, the benefit (prize) based on the winning, and the process (producing) of enjoying the benefit are integrated, thereby improving the interest of the gaming machine. In some cases, the above-mentioned degree of attention has been improved by arranging game parts such as decorative members for the purpose of improving the appearance of the game machine in the game area. In some gaming machines of the type described above, the movement of a game ball can be tracked with eyes. The configuration itself is a means of improving the original interest of the gaming machine, and therefore, when increasing the size of the above-mentioned gaming machine or gaming component, it may be premised that the flow-down area of the gaming ball is secured. Area (Gaming In the case of trying to co-exist with the game machine, etc., for example, expanding the game board itself may be an effective solution, but the width of the game machine is constant due to the relationship with the island facilities in the game hall. In fact, it is difficult to cope with such a problem because of the restrictions, etc. In other words, it is necessary to improve the degree of attention to the game by, for example, coexistence of the game area and the game machine. Therefore, there is still room for improvement in the structure of the gaming machine. "

Feature D1. A game board (game board 100) having a game area (game area 103) on which a game ball flows down,
Display means (symbol display device 161) arranged behind the game board and executing a predetermined display effect on a display screen (display screen G);
The gaming board is formed such that at least a portion facing the display screen has transparency, and the display screen can be visually recognized through the facing portion,
A movable role (movable role 170-173, 310, 320) that is arranged between the game board and the display means and is switchable between a first state (for example, a shielded state) and a second state (for example, an unshielded state). , 330, 340).

  According to the feature D1, the display screen can be visually recognized through a portion of the game board facing the display screen. In order to ensure the visibility of the display screen, it is not necessary to form an opening for the display screen in the game board, so that it is possible to prevent the game area where the game balls flow down from being squeezed due to the guarantee of the visibility. .

  Here, as for the movable auditorium, since the movable auditorium is arranged behind the game board, there is no possibility that the game ball flowing down the game area and the movable auditorium collide with each other. Can be reduced. In addition, since the movable accessory is disposed in front of the display means, the association between the operation of the movable accessory and the display effect by the display means is enhanced, and a dynamic effect in which the two are integrated can be realized.

  As described above, according to the present configuration, it is possible to provide an effect by the movable role and the display means integrally, while avoiding the obsolescence of the game of securing a wide game area and enjoying the flow of the game ball, It can contribute to improving the interest of the machine.

  In addition, "the movable accessory overlaps the display screen of the display means back and forth in the first state, and in the second state, the overlap with the display screen is smaller than in the first state or the display screen overlaps with the display screen. By avoiding the overlap, the change of the range in which the movable accessory and the display means overlap with each other can be associated with the display effect.

Feature D2. The movable role has a movable body provided to be displaceable on the back side of the facing portion, and the movable body is moved to a second position (for example, in accordance with switching from the second state to the first state). Displacement from a non-shielding position) to a first position (for example, a shielding position) changes the mode of overlap of the movable body with respect to the display screen,
The game according to Feature D1, wherein a guide portion (for example, a guide groove or a rail) for guiding the movable body from the first position to the second position is provided on a back surface portion of the facing portion. Machine.

  According to the feature D2, it is possible to stabilize the movement of the movable body (movable auditorium) by adding the function of guiding the movable body to the opposing portion of the game board.

  For example, if the size of the movable body is increased or the operating range of the movable body is set wide, the effect using the movable role can be made more impactful, and the attention on gaming machines will be improved. It is advantageous in doing. However, on the other hand, it is assumed that the movement of the movable body tends to be unstable. As described above, the unstable movement of the movable body causes a malfunction or a poor appearance, and may be an obstacle to exhibiting the above-described effect. In this regard, according to the configuration shown in this feature, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of such inconvenience, and it is possible to suitably exert the effect function by the movable auditorium.

  In addition, for example, when the supporting position (holding position) of the movable role is arranged at a position that does not overlap with the display screen (specifically, the display area), it is possible to move the movable body in front of the display screen. In a portion far from the support position, the position variation of the movable body tends to increase. In this regard, if the game board has an opposing portion and the guide portion is provided at the opposing portion, the occurrence of such inconvenience can be suitably suppressed. In other words, the technical idea described in this feature should be applied to a movable role in which the overlap with the display screen is normally set to be small, and the movable body provided with a movable body that is displaced so that the overlap increases depending on the situation. Thereby, it is possible to contribute to the realization of a preferable configuration in which the staging function and the like by the movable role can be stably exhibited.

Feature D3. The opposing portion of the gaming board is provided with a predetermined pattern that is visible from the front of the gaming machine,
The gaming machine according to Feature D2, wherein the guide section is formed so as to overlap the predetermined pattern from behind the predetermined pattern.

  When viewing the display screen through the gaming board, if the guide portion is conspicuous, the appearance of the gaming machine may be degraded. Therefore, by arranging the guide portion behind the pattern formed on the game board (opposing portion), the guide portion can be made less noticeable, and the above-described deterioration in appearance can be suppressed.

  Feature D4. The gaming machine according to Feature D3, wherein the predetermined pattern is provided on a front portion of the facing portion.

  According to the feature D4, it is possible to prevent the presence of the guide portion from being a factor that makes it difficult to provide the predetermined pattern, and to allow the predetermined pattern and the guide portion to coexist suitably in the opposing portion of the game board. Becomes

Feature D5. When a predetermined condition is satisfied, an application determining unit (executing the process of step S501 in the main control device 81) that performs an application determination as to whether or not the application corresponds to an application corresponding to providing an award to the player. Function), and
A privilege granting means (a function of executing a game state transition process in the main control device 81) for granting a privilege to the player based on the result of the granting determination by the granting determining means being the granting result. Prepared,
The display means has a plurality of variable display areas (each symbol row Z1 to Z3) set on the display screen, and displays a pattern in each variable display area according to the result of the assignment determination. It is configured to stop and display the pattern combination on the active line,
The gaming machine according to Feature D3 or Feature D4, wherein the predetermined pattern is formed along the payline and teaches the payline.

  According to the feature D5, the guide portion is camouflaged by the pattern teaching the effective line, and the predetermined pattern and the guide portion can coexist suitably.

  Feature D6. The movable body is rotatably supported, and an engagement portion that engages with the guide portion is formed at a tip end of the rotation, and any one of features D2 to D5 is provided. The gaming machine described in one.

  When the movable body is configured to be rotatable, a blur width (for example, a displacement) at the tip end of the rotation tends to increase during the operation of the movable body. Therefore, as shown in the present feature, if the object to be guided by the guide section is the rotating tip (engaging section) of the movable body, the above-mentioned movement can be suppressed and the movement of the movable body can be suitably stabilized.

  Feature D7. Any one of the features D2 to D6, wherein the guide section is configured to function as a support section that supports the movable body at least in a state where the movable body is disposed at the first position. A gaming machine according to one.

  According to the feature D7, it is possible to stabilize the posture at the first position by providing the support function to the guide portion.

  In particular, in the combination with the feature D6, the supporting load on the rotation base end side can be reduced by supporting the rotation distal end portion of the movable body. Further, this configuration is also advantageous in suppressing the displacement of the rotating tip.

  Note that the opposing portions and the guide portions shown in the features D2 to D7 are inseparable from the existence of the movable body that operates behind the opposing portions in order to exhibit the various effects described above.

Feature D8. By covering the movable screen with the display screen, a shielding function of reducing visibility of the overlapped portion is provided,
Switching means (effect control device 82) for switching the movable character to the first state or the second state;
In the situation where the movable role is in the first state in the game board, when the game ball reaches an area that overlaps with the movable role in the front-rear direction, detection means (detection sensor 136a, 136b).
By controlling the driving of the switching means based on the detection result of the detection means, the switching control means for switching the movable auditorium to the first state or the second state (executing the processing during the change by the effect control device 82) The gaming machine according to any one of the features D1 to D7.

  According to the above configuration, the state of the movable auditorium can be changed based on the detection result of the detecting means, that is, based on the presence or absence of a game ball passing ahead of the movable auditorium. As described above, by switching the state of the movable auditorium according to the movement of the game ball, it is possible to provide, for example, a relationship between the movement of the game ball, the movement of the movable auditorium, and the display content of the display screen.

Feature D9. In the first state, the movable auditory character overlaps the display screen of the display means back and forth, and in the second state, the overlap with the display screen becomes smaller or the overlap with the display screen becomes smaller than in the first state. It is a configuration that is avoided,
The switching control means includes means for displacing the movable role from the first state to the second state based on detection of a game ball by the detection means. The gaming machine according to D8.

  According to the above configuration, when a game ball is detected by the detection means, the movable role changes from the first state to the second state, and the area where the movable role and the display means overlap each other is reduced. For example, by preventing the detected game ball from overlapping the movable role in the front-back direction, the game ball flows down across the display means (display screen). By allowing the movement of the game ball in front of the display screen in this way, it is possible to associate the movement of the game ball with the display effect by the display means, for example.

Feature D10. In the first state, the movable auditory character overlaps the display screen of the display means back and forth, and in the second state, the overlap with the display screen becomes smaller or the overlap with the display screen becomes smaller than in the first state. It is a configuration that is avoided,
The switching control unit includes a unit configured to switch the movable role from the second state to the first state based on a detection of a game ball by the detection unit. D8. Or the gaming machine according to Feature D9.

  According to the above configuration, when a game ball is detected by the detection means, the movable role is switched from the second state to the first state, and the area where the movable role and the display means overlap is widened. When the movable role is arranged in the first state, the visibility of the display means located behind is reduced, and the game ball flows down in a range overlapping the portion of the display means with reduced visibility in the front and rear. As a result, the movement of the flowing game ball is emphasized, and the movement of the game ball becomes easier to visually follow as compared with the case of flowing down on the display screen in the background.

Feature D11. A ball entrance provided in the game area, in which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter, and a place where the same ball entrance is provided in the game area for a game ball entering the ball entrance. Ball passages (front-side ball passages 134, back-side ball passages 143) that connect the outlets that lead to different locations,
The ball passage is formed at a position overlapping the movable auditorium in the front-rear direction when the movable auditorium is in the first state,
The gaming machine according to any one of features D8 to D10, wherein the detection means detects a game ball passing through the ball passage.

  According to the above configuration, the target detected by the detection means is limited to a game ball passing through the ball passage. In order to exert the effect shown in the feature D8 or the like, it is only necessary to set the operation of the movable accessory and the display content of the display screen in accordance with the positional relationship with the ball passage, and it is necessary to assume various flowing modes of the game ball. Absent. This makes it possible to simplify the effect design. In addition, since the presence or absence of a ball entering the entrance is reflected in the movement of the movable auditorium, it is possible to prevent the relationship between the movable auditorium and the like and the movement of the game ball from becoming difficult for the player to grasp.

Feature D12. A ball entry portion (operating port 115) provided in the game area, in which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter;
A determination unit (a function of executing the process of step S501 by the main control device 81) for determining whether to grant a privilege to the player based on the fact that the game ball has entered the ball entry unit; ,
On the basis of the result of the grant determination by the grant determining means being a grant corresponding result corresponding to granting a privilege to the player, a privilege granting means for granting a privilege to the player (game performed by the main control device 81). Function to execute state transition processing),
A guide portion is provided in the game area, and has a rolling area in which the game ball derived from the ball passage can roll, and a guide section for guiding the game ball on the rolling area to the ball entry section is formed. The gaming machine according to Feature D11, further comprising a stage (stage 144).

  According to the above configuration, by causing the game balls to flow into the ball path, the game balls are easily guided to the ball path → the rolling area → the guide section → the ball entry section. The entry into the entry section is related to the determination of the application. By applying the configuration shown in the above-described feature D5 to such a configuration, it is possible to give motivation to see the above-mentioned effect from the relevance between the movable character and the display means and the movement of the game ball, and to prepare the effect function Can be suppressed from being effectively exhibited.

Feature D13. In the first state, the movable auditory character overlaps the display screen of the display means back and forth, and in the second state, the overlap with the display screen becomes smaller or the overlap with the display screen becomes smaller than in the first state. It is a configuration that is avoided,
The feature D11 or the feature, wherein the detection unit is arranged at a portion upstream of a region overlapping in the front-rear direction in the situation where the movable accessory is arranged in the first state in the ball passage. The gaming machine according to D12.

  According to the above configuration, since the detection means is provided on the upstream side of the area overlapping the movable auditorium in the ball passage, in the gaming machine, the game ball entering the ball passage overlaps the movable auditorium in the front-rear direction. The existence of the game ball can be grasped before. Thus, the movable role can be operated before the game balls overlap, and a preferable configuration for performing an effect is realized.

  In particular, in combination with the feature D9, it becomes easy to cause the game ball to flow in front of the exposed portion with the display screen exposed. In addition, in combination with the feature D10, it becomes easy to cause the game ball to flow down in front of the movable auditorium in a state where the display means is shielded by the movable auditorium.

  Feature D14. The switching control unit switches the state of the movable auditorium based on a predetermined number of game balls determined as a plurality of numbers being detected by the detection unit, and is characterized by the features D8 to D8. The gaming machine according to any one of D13.

  According to the above configuration, since the operating condition of the movable auditors is that a predetermined number of game balls are detected by the detector, as a player who wants to view an effect using the movable auditors, the detection is preferably performed by the detector. The game ball is caused to flow down. As a result, active participation in the game can be promoted, and the degree of attention to the game can be improved.

Feature D15. The display means is configured to be able to display a plurality of types of patterns on the display screen,
The plurality of types of designs include a first design (specific design) and a second design (non-specific design) whose related profit is smaller than that of the first design, as designs related to the player's profit. And
In the first state, the movable auditory character overlaps the display screen of the display means back and forth, and in the second state, the overlap with the display screen becomes smaller or the overlap with the display screen becomes smaller than in the first state. It is a configuration that is avoided,
The movable role is configured to overlap at least one of the first pattern and the second pattern when the movable role is in the first state,
For the first pattern and the second pattern that overlap with the movable character, the overlapping of the movable character with the movable character is avoided, so that the profit set for the non-overlapping character is reduced. The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D14, further comprising a means for giving to a player (a function of executing a hold notice control process by the effect control device 82).

  According to the above configuration, in the configuration in which the first pattern and the second pattern related to the player's profit are displayed on the display screen, the second pattern is set so that the related profit is smaller than the first pattern. Therefore, it is considered that the player desires to display the first pattern rather than the second pattern. And since a movable character is comprised so that these 1st pattern and 2nd pattern may be overlapped, when a 1st pattern and a 2nd pattern are displayed on a display means, a player will display either pattern. Interest (being visible). With such a configuration, it is possible to perform an effect in which the profit related to the first pattern and the second pattern, the pattern that overlaps with the movable character in the front-rear direction, and the position displacement of the movable character are associated with each other. Becomes possible. Thereby, it is possible to contribute to an increase in the degree of attention to the game.

Feature D16. The display means is configured to be able to display a plurality of types of patterns on the display screen, and is set to notify the player of information related to profits by the type of the displayed pattern,
In the first state, the movable auditory character overlaps the display screen of the display means back and forth, and in the second state, the overlap with the display screen becomes smaller or the overlap with the display screen becomes smaller than in the first state. It is a configuration that is avoided,
The gaming machine includes a plurality of the movable roles,
The plurality of movable characters overlap the predetermined patterns displayed on the display means by being in the first state, and are prevented from overlapping with the predetermined patterns by being set in the second state. The gaming machine according to any one of the features D1 to D15, wherein the gaming machine is configured as described above.

  According to the above configuration, the predetermined pattern overlaps with the plurality of movable characters in the first state, and the weight is avoided by setting the movable characters in the second state. Thereby, it is possible to perform an effect in which a predetermined pattern is associated with the state of each movable character. By applying the technical idea described in this feature to a configuration in which information relating to profit is notified to the player according to the type of the pattern displayed on the display means, it is possible to appropriately increase the degree of attention to the game.

<Feature E group>
The invention described in the following feature group E is described as follows: "Some game machines such as pachinko machines have a game board having a game area formed on a front surface mounted on a frame. Game ball fired based on the operation wins the ball entry section provided in the game area, so that whether or not to shift to a special game state more advantageous to the player than the normal game state is determined. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2003-190511) In this type of gaming machine, a symbol is displayed in a fluctuating manner in response to a winning in a ball entry unit. By adopting various game machines related to game effects such as movable auditoriums etc. that indicate the winning or losing result by operating in accordance with the display device and the fluctuation display of the symbol, the attention level of the gaming machine is improved. There is something that is planned, such a configuration By doing so, the movement of the game ball toward the ball entry unit, the enjoyment of the benefits based on the winning, and the process (dramatic) leading to the enjoyment of the benefits are integrated, thereby improving the interest of the gaming machine. Some game components, such as decorative members for the purpose of improving the appearance of the machine, have been placed in the game area to improve the degree of attention, and in particular, in recent years, the size of the game machines has increased the impact. However, the background and technology "can provide effects and the like, and the degree of attention of the player is improved." However, in a gaming machine of the type described above, a configuration in which the movement of a gaming ball can be visually observed. Therefore, when the size of the above-mentioned gaming machine or game component is increased, the downflow area of the game ball can be secured. (Game ball In the case of trying to coexist with the downflow area) and a game machine, for example, expanding the game board itself can be an effective solution, but the width of the game machine is limited to a certain width due to the relationship with the island facilities of the game hall. In reality, such measures are difficult due to restrictions, etc. In other words, there is still room for improvement in the structure of the gaming machine in order to achieve coexistence of a gaming area and gaming machines. The invention was made with the problem to be solved.

Feature E1. A pair of movable members (movable members 310, 320, etc.) provided to be openable and closable,
Each of the movable auditoriums has a fan surface portion (e.g., a fan surface portion 312) formed so as to be widened toward the front of the gaming machine when the movable auditorium is opened.
In the open state, the fan surface portion is configured so that one end and the other end in the opening and closing direction are shifted so as to be shifted in the front-rear direction, and are folded so as to overlap front and rear in the closed state,
Each of the movable auditoriums is arranged so that the position in the front-rear direction is the same, and by being in the open state, a first specific region including a front end of the fan surface portion of one movable auditorium is provided. And a second specific area including a rear end portion of the fan surface portion of the other movable auditory body so as to overlap back and forth.

  In the case where the foldable movable accessory shown in the feature E1 is mounted, the difference between the open state and the closed state can be clarified, but the thickness is increased, so that the arrangement space is likely to be restricted. It is assumed that such inconvenience becomes more serious when one movable character tries to cover a wide area.

  In this regard, as shown in this feature, the number of movable auditors is two, and the front and rear positions thereof are aligned, and the first specific region (including the front end of the fan surface of the one fan) of one movable auditorium is included. The above-described widening of the cover range can be achieved by configuring the second movable region and the second specific region (the region including the rear end portion of the fan surface) in the front and rear of the movable movable member so as to overlap each other. While realizing, it is possible to suppress an increase in the overall thickness caused by overlapping the specific regions. This makes it possible to secure the arrangement area and the operation area of the movable auditorium in a limited space while widening the effect range using the movable auditorium.

Feature E2. A pattern display means (symbol display device 161) provided behind the movable character and having a display screen (display screen G) for performing a predetermined display effect;
The movable auditorium is arranged so as to overlap the front and rear of the display screen when in the open state, and the light from the display screen is irradiated to the front of the gaming machine through the fan surface portion. Yes,
A bent portion (a bent portion 312c or the like) is formed on the fan surface portion as a starting point when the fan portion is folded along with switching from the open state to the closed state, and the opening and closing direction is sandwiched between the bent portions. Are formed with flat portions (fixed portions 312a and the like) having different directions on both sides of.
The gaming machine according to Feature E1, wherein at least one of the flat portions is non-parallel to the display screen when the movable accessory is in the open state.

  According to the above configuration, since the display screen and one of the flat portions are non-parallel, light from the display screen disposed at the rear is refracted by the flat portion, and the display screen is viewed from the front of the gaming machine. Sex can be changed. In this way, by causing a change in the visibility of the display screen through the movable auditors, it is possible to prevent the appearance of the movable auditorium from becoming obsolete when executing a display effect.

Feature E3. The fan surface has a plurality of long bases (for example, ribs 314a and 314b) constituting the flat part,
The base portions are arranged so that the planes face forward and backward and are connected so as to be rotatable with one end in the longitudinal direction as a base end portion,
The game according to Feature E2, further comprising an opening / closing means (a function of executing a process during fluctuation by the effect control device 82) for opening and closing the movable accessory by rotating each of the base portions. Machine.

  According to the above configuration, it is possible to reduce the difference between the open state and the closed state, that is, the range in which the movable object spreads, and minimize the spread of the occupied space in the closed state.

Feature E4. The fan surface portion includes a sheet member having the flat portion, and a frame member forming a skeleton of the movable accessory,
The gaming machine according to Feature E3, wherein the frame member is attached to a portion of the seat member that forms the base portion.

  According to the above configuration, of the flat portions continuing from the bent portion, those that are not non-parallel to the display screen (that is, portions parallel to the display screen) function as base portions of the fan surface portion. In the case where the base portions are arranged one on top of the other with their planes facing forward and backward, the thickness of the movable auditorium in the front-back direction can be reduced. However, on the other hand, in the non-parallel portion, light may be excessively transmitted from the display screen as compared with the non-parallel portion. In this regard, since the frame members overlap with respect to the parallel portions, it is possible to adjust the degree of light transmission by the frame members, and it is preferable that excessively direct light is emitted toward the front of the gaming machine. Can be avoided.

  In addition, it is good to comprise so that the said movable movable object may make the said opening / closing direction become parallel to the said display screen. If the technical idea described in the present feature is applied to such a configuration (a configuration in which the opening / closing direction is parallel to the display screen), it is possible to visually suppress the unnecessary area of the arrangement area and the operation area of the movable auditorium, It is possible to make a significant change.

  Feature E5. The gaming machine according to Feature E4, wherein said frame member is attached to said sheet member forming said base portion so that an edge thereof is along said bent portion.

  According to the above configuration, when the movable role is changed from the open state to the closed state, the deformation triggered by the bent portion of the fan surface is induced, and the other portions are deformed, and the state is changed to the closed state. It is possible to preferably prevent the switching from being performed satisfactorily or to prevent the appearance of the fan portion from deteriorating.

  In particular, in the configuration in which the movable accessory is automatically opened / closed by the opening / closing means shown in the feature E3 or the like, there is a concern that the opening / closing function may not be performed smoothly by bending at a position different from a preset bending portion. You. In this regard, by applying the technical concept described in the present feature, it is possible to preferably avoid the occurrence of such inconvenience even with an automatic opening / closing movable object, and to suppress a decrease in the opening / closing function due to repeated use or the like. Becomes possible.

  Feature E6. The movable accessory has a transmission portion (gear 319) for transmitting power from a driving portion (drive motor 313 or the like) to each of the base portions, and the plurality of base portions are in the closed state. Any one of the features E3 to E5, characterized in that one of the front and rear portions of the movable object is used as a base end to open and close by rotating another base portion. A gaming machine according to one.

  For example, in a general fan, when the fan is opened, a force is applied only to the ribs, so that the opening / closing operation may not be performed smoothly. In this regard, according to this feature, the power is transmitted to each base unit via the transmission unit, so that the opening and closing operation can be performed smoothly.

Feature E7. A game board (game board 100) provided in front of the pair of movable objects and having a game area in which a game ball flows down formed on a front face;
A display unit (symbol display device 161) provided behind the pair of movable objects and having a display screen (display screen G) for performing a predetermined display effect; features E1 to E6. The gaming machine according to any one of the above.

  According to the above configuration, the game board is provided in front of the movable role, and the display screen is provided in the rear. Even in this case, the pair of movable characters is installed such that the thickness of the installation area is reduced as shown in the feature E1. For this reason, it is possible to prevent the gap between the game board and the display screen from becoming extremely large, and to dispose the movable role while suppressing a decrease in the visibility of the display screen.

  Feature E8. The gaming machine according to Feature E7, wherein at least a portion of the gaming board facing the display screen has transparency, and the display screen is visible through the facing portion.

  According to the above configuration, it is not necessary to form an opening in the game board in order to ensure the visibility of the display screen, and the game area can be set wide while ensuring the visibility of the display screen. In particular, as described in the feature E3 and the like, the pair of movable auditors is installed so as to be thin, so that the expansion of the distance between the game board and the display screen can be suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the gap between the display screen and the game board from increasing and the display screen from moving away from the player.

Feature F1. A picture display means (symbol display device 161) for variably displaying a plurality of pictures on a display screen (display screen G);
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on satisfaction of a predetermined acquisition condition (a function of executing a winning process for an operating port in the main control device 81);
Acquisition information storage means (reservation area RE) for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means up to a predetermined number predetermined as a plurality of numbers;
An assignment determining unit (in the main control unit 81) that sequentially determines whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage unit corresponds to an assignment corresponding result corresponding to granting a privilege to a player. Function for executing the processing of step S501);
A bonus granting unit (a function of executing a game state transition process in the main control device 81) for granting a bonus to a player based on the result of the granting determination by the granting determination unit being the granting correspondence result;
Prior to the provision of the provision determination by the provision determination means or based on the provision of the provision determination by the provision determination means, the pattern display means starts the variable display of the design, and the provision determination is performed. Displaying a stop result corresponding to the result of the determination and terminating the variation display of the pattern as one of the game times, and setting the game information of each game time in accordance with the special information stored in the acquisition information storage means. Game control means for controlling the picture display means so that the picture is displayed in a variable manner (the function of executing the change start processing in the main control device 81 and the function of executing the change display control processing in the effect control device 82). In the equipped gaming machine,
A stop mode determining means for determining a stop mode of the pattern in the game cycle related to the special information targeted for the grant, based on a result of the grant determination, for each game cycle, The control device 82 has a function of executing a variation start process), and when the pattern variation display is performed in each game round, the pattern is stopped in the stop mode determined by the stop mode determination means and the game is stopped. To end the variable display
The information corresponding to the determination result in the case where the predetermined special information stored in the acquisition information storage unit is the target of the assignment determination, the information before the predetermined special information is the target of the assignment determination. Destination specifying means for specifying at the timing (a function of executing a confirmation process for a hold notice in main controller 81);
When the specified result by the preceding specifying means is a predetermined specified result, the game time of the game time performed before the game time related to the special information which is the specified object of the previous specifying means is determined. Special notification means (holding notice in effect control device 82) for performing special notification (holding notice) corresponding to the specified result of the preceding specifying means by controlling the picture display means so that the stop mode becomes a predetermined special stopping mode. Function to execute the effect setting process for the
The stop mode determining means determines the mode information so that the pattern stop mode is set to the special stop mode based on the satisfaction of a predetermined condition, regardless of the specification result by the previous specifying module. Function to execute an ineffective notice effect such as step S1023 by the effect control device 82)
The special notification means determines whether or not to execute the special notification based on the mode information determined by the preceding determination means (executes processing such as steps S2101 to S2105 by the effect control device 82). Gaming machine having a function of performing

  According to the feature F1, the special notification corresponding to the predetermined special information stored in the acquired information storage unit and not subject to the addition determination is performed at a timing before the special information becomes the target of the addition determination. May be executed. Accordingly, for the player, not only the game for checking the obtained determination result of the special information but also the order in which the determination is made when a plurality of special information is stored in the obtained information storage means. For the later special information, a game for confirming or predicting the result of the case of being subjected to the grant determination according to the content of the special notification is added, thereby diversifying the game.

  In this feature, in particular, the mode information is determined so as to be in the special stop mode by the first determination unit based on the satisfaction of the predetermined condition regardless of the specification result by the first specification unit. Then, in this case, whether or not to execute the special notification is determined by the post-determination means based on the aspect information. With such a configuration, in the configuration in which the stop mode is determined at the start of the variable display of the game times, if the specification is performed by the first specifying unit while the variable display is being performed, the game in which the variable display is being performed is performed. The special notification can be executed without changing the stop mode at the time. As a result, it is possible to suppress a change in the variable display time and a local increase in the processing load due to a change in the stop mode, and appropriately execute the special notification.

  Hereinafter, a basic configuration of a gaming machine to which the above features can be applied will be described.

  Pachinko gaming machine: operating means operated by a player, gaming ball firing means for firing a game ball based on the operation of the operating means, a ball path for guiding the fired game ball to a predetermined game area, A gaming machine comprising: a plurality of game components arranged in a region; and a bonus is provided to a player when a game ball passes through a predetermined passage portion of the game components.

  Spinning-type gaming machines such as slot machines: equipped with variable display means for variably displaying a symbol row composed of a plurality of symbols and then finally displaying the symbol row, and starting to change the symbol due to the operation of the starting operation means The variation of the symbol is stopped due to the operation of the stopping operation means or after a predetermined time has elapsed, and a special game advantageous to the player on condition that the final stopped symbol at the time of the stop is a specific symbol is required. A gaming machine that generates a state (such as a bonus game).

  Ball-based belt-type gaming machine: equipped with variable display means for displaying a symbol row composed of a plurality of symbols in a variable manner and then displaying the symbol row as a final stop. The fluctuation of the symbol is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for the game or after a lapse of a predetermined time, and a special game state (bonus) which is advantageous to the player on condition that the final stop symbol at the time of the stop is a specific symbol is required. And a payout device for paying out game balls to the ball tray, and a payout device for providing a ball tray and taking in game balls from the ball tray. A gaming machine configured such that the operation of the starting operation means is enabled when a game ball is thrown in the game machine.

  81: main control device, 82: effect control device, 100: game board, 103: game area, 115: operating port, 130: center frame, 136a: detection sensor, 136b: detection sensor, 143: rear ball passage, 153 … Back side ball passage, 170… first movable role, 171… second movable role, 172… third movable role, 173… fourth movable role, 202… MPU, 212… display control device, 242… MPU, 243 ROM, 300 movable accessory device, 310 upper right movable accessory, 314a front rib, 314b rear rib, 320 movable accessory, 324a front rib, 324b rear rib Reference numerals 330, upper left movable part, 334a, front rib part, 334b, rear rib part, 340, lower left movable part, 344a, front rib part, 344b, rear rib part.

Claims (1)

A picture display means for variably displaying a plurality of pictures on the display screen,
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the satisfaction of a predetermined acquisition condition,
Acquired information storage means for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means, with a predetermined number predetermined as a plurality as an upper limit,
Grant determining means for sequentially determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storing means corresponds to a grant corresponding result corresponding to granting a privilege to a player;
A bonus granting unit that grants a bonus to the player based on the result of the granting determination by the granting determining unit being the granting result,
Said particular based grant decision is made by the grant determining unit, the variable display of the picture in picture display unit is started, the display to change the display of the picture of the stop result corresponding to the determination result of the grant decision Ending the game as one of the game times, and controlling the pattern display means such that the pattern of each game time is changed and displayed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. A gaming machine provided with time control means,
A first area and a second area are set in a display area of the pattern on the display screen of the pattern display means ,
A first state and a second state and a switchable switching means to invisibility or not visible than the first state at least a portion of the picture to be stopped in the second region,
The information corresponding to the determination result in the case where the predetermined special information stored in the acquisition information storage unit is the target of the assignment determination, and the information before the predetermined special information becomes the target of the assignment determination. Destination specifying means for specifying at the timing;
When the specified result by the preceding specifying means is a predetermined specifying result, the specifying of the preceding specifying means is performed in a game time performed before the gaming time related to the special information targeted by the preceding specifying means. Special notification means for performing special notification corresponding to the result,
The special notifying means, when the specified result by the preceding specifying means is a predetermined specified result, a game time performed prior to the gaming time related to the special information specified by the preceding specifying means. A stop mode determining means for determining a stop mode of the picture,
The stop mode determined by the stop mode determining means includes:
A first special stop mode that is a predetermined special stop mode depending on a combination of pictures stopped in the first area;
A second special stop mode which is a predetermined special stop mode by a combination of patterns including a pattern stopped in the second area;
The special notification means,
A first means for performing the special notification by stopping the picture in the first special stop mode in a game time performed before the game time related to the special information that has been specified by the destination specifying means;
In the game time performed before the game time relating to the special information targeted by the destination specifying means, the pattern is stopped in the second special stop mode, and the switching from the second state of the switching means is performed. And second means for performing the special notification by switching to the first state.
With
The second means includes a means for switching the switching means from the second state to the first state after all of the plurality of patterns variably displayed on the display screen are stopped. A gaming machine.

Images